Operator's Manual

N2 Series
Direct
About this manual
This operator's manual is for Valtra N2 Series Direct tractors. The N2 Direct
models are N122 D and N142 D.
The manual is meant for agricultural tractors only. If the tractor is used for other
applications, it is the owner's responsibility to ensure compliance with local
regulations. In this case, always contact your dealer first.
The purpose of this manual is to enable the owner and operator to use the tractor
in a proper manner. Providing that the instructions are followed carefully, the
tractor will provide years of service in the tradition of Valtra.

IMPORTANT: When using the tractor, always follow all valid laws and regulations
even if they are not specifically pointed out in this manual.

The manual contains detailed instructions for operating, servicing and

maintaining the tractor.
Alternative equipment in the manual refers to equipment that can be selected
when ordering the tractor.
Extra equipment refers to equipment which can be bought and installed on the
tractor later.
Due to the continual development of the products, the content of this manual may
not always correspond to the new product. Therefore, we retain the right to make
alterations without prior notification.
Maintenance, repairs and adjustments which are not described in this manual
require special tools and exact technical data. For such work contact your dealer
who has specially trained personnel to help you.
Valtra Inc.

-1-
Tractor serial numbers
When ordering spare parts or service, give the model indication and serial
numbers and, in some cases, the engine, front axle, cab and transmission numbers.

N142 D AC14.2

V36308

4
5
GUID-4032D9B6-D1E5-4046-8A7A-A4EBAC7B9160

1. Type plate EEC

• Model = model indication used by service/spare part department
• Identification number = tractor serial number
2. Cab number
3. Tractor serial number
4. Engine number
5. Front axle number

-2-
 Contents

Contents
About this manual........................................................................................1
Tractor serial numbers.................................................................................2
1 Safety precautions................................................................................13
1.1 Hazard statements.............................................................................................13
1.2 Safety rules........................................................................................................13
1.2.1 Replacing safety and information signs............................................................13
1.2.2 Maintaining hardware safety............................................................................14
1.2.3 Using tractor safety features............................................................................15
1.2.4 Safe operation..................................................................................................15
1.2.4.1 Following safe operating practices.............................................15
1.2.4.2 Driving on public roads...............................................................17
1.2.4.3 Controlling the driving speed......................................................18
1.2.4.4 Driving downhill...........................................................................18
1.2.4.5 Operating with implements.........................................................18
1.2.4.6 Running with power take-off driven implements or
machines....................................................................................18
1.2.4.7 Using ballast weights..................................................................19
1.2.4.8 Towing........................................................................................19
1.2.4.9 Ensuring personal safety of other people...................................20
1.2.4.10 Fire hazards................................................................................20
1.2.4.11 Handling viton seals subjected to high temperatures.................20
2 Instruments and controls......................................................................21
2.1 Pedals................................................................................................................21
2.2 Dashboard.........................................................................................................22
2.2.1 Proline instrument panel ..................................................................................22
2.2.2 Symbols on the Proline instrument panel display.............................................23
2.2.3 Indicator lights on the left side of the display....................................................24
2.2.4 Indicator lights on the right side of the display.................................................25
2.3 Controls on the right-hand side..........................................................................26
2.3.1 Tractor terminal................................................................................................26
2.3.2 Driving controls.................................................................................................27
2.3.3 Linkage.............................................................................................................28
2.3.4 Power take-off..................................................................................................29
2.3.5 Auxiliary hydraulics...........................................................................................31
2.3.6 Other controls...................................................................................................32
2.4 Controls on the rear side....................................................................................33
2.4.1 Rear window opening device...........................................................................33
2.4.2 Reverse drive system controls.........................................................................34
2.5 Controls on the left-hand side............................................................................35
2.6 Controls on the front roof console .....................................................................35
2.7 Controls on the right-hand side roof console.....................................................36
2.8 Controls on the forest equipment right-hand side roof console.........................37
2.9 Controls on the left-hand side roof console.......................................................37
2.10 Controls on the forest equipment left-hand side roof console............................38
2.11 Air conditioning controls.....................................................................................38
2.11.1 Manual air conditioning controls ......................................................................38
2.11.2 Automatic air conditioning controls ..................................................................39
2.12 Driver's seat.......................................................................................................40
2.13 Air suspended driver's seat ...............................................................................41
2.14 Valtra Evolution driver's seat..............................................................................42
2.15 Controls on the rear mudguard..........................................................................43
2.16 Controls on the bonnet.......................................................................................43
2.17 Rear controls and connections outside the cab.................................................44

-3-
Contents

3 Operation..............................................................................................45
3.1 Running the tractor in.........................................................................................45
3.2 Preparing for use...............................................................................................45
3.2.1 Adjusting the driver's seat................................................................................45
3.2.2 Adjusting the air-suspended driver's seat........................................................47
3.2.3 Adjusting the Valtra Evolution driver's seat......................................................50
3.2.4 Adjusting the right-side armrest........................................................................54
3.2.5 Adjusting the steering wheel............................................................................55
3.2.6 Adjusting standard mirrors...............................................................................56
3.2.7 Adjusting optional mirrors.................................................................................56
3.2.8 Heating mirrors.................................................................................................57
3.2.9 Using the windscreen wiper and washer..........................................................57
3.2.10 Using the rear window wiper............................................................................58
3.2.11 Using the rear window washer.........................................................................58
3.2.12 Power shuttle lever...........................................................................................59
3.2.13 Using the main switch......................................................................................59
3.2.14 Control stop......................................................................................................60
3.2.15 Using the control stop.......................................................................................61
3.2.16 Using the ignition switch...................................................................................61
3.3 Starting the tractor.............................................................................................63
3.3.1 Starting under normal conditions......................................................................63
3.3.2 Starting under cold conditions..........................................................................64
3.3.3 Starting with an auxiliary battery......................................................................65
3.4 Using lights........................................................................................................66
3.4.1 Using headlights...............................................................................................66
3.4.2 Using upper headlights.....................................................................................67
3.4.3 Using working lights.........................................................................................67
3.4.4 Using the trailer hitch light................................................................................68
3.4.5 Using the cab light............................................................................................69
3.5 Using notification devices..................................................................................70
3.5.1 Using the direction indicators...........................................................................70
3.5.2 Using the horn..................................................................................................70
3.5.3 Using the rotating warning light........................................................................71
3.5.4 Using hazard warning flashers ........................................................................71
3.6 Heating and ventilation......................................................................................72
3.6.1 Using the heater...............................................................................................72
3.6.2 Controlling ventilation nozzles and air recirculation.........................................73
3.6.3 Using the manual air conditioning....................................................................74
3.6.4 Automatic air conditioning................................................................................75
3.6.4.1 Air conditioning control panel......................................................75
3.6.4.2 Activating air conditioning when the battery has been
disconnected...............................................................................76
3.6.4.3 Air conditioning control...............................................................76
3.6.4.4 Controlling the fan.......................................................................77
3.6.4.5 Automatic air conditioning system on/off button.........................78
3.6.4.6 Temperature view.......................................................................78
3.6.4.7 Temperature control...................................................................78
3.6.4.8 Defrosting...................................................................................79
3.6.4.9 Selecting air recirculation............................................................80
3.7 Power outlets.....................................................................................................81
3.7.1 Lighter..............................................................................................................81
3.7.2 Using the two-pin power socket and power switch...........................................81
3.7.3 Three-pin power socket....................................................................................82
3.7.4 Trailer socket....................................................................................................83
3.7.5 Two-pin power socket on the bonnet...............................................................84
3.8 Driving the tractor...............................................................................................84
3.8.1 Steering............................................................................................................84
3.8.2 Power shuttle....................................................................................................84
3.8.3 Using the power shuttle lever...........................................................................85

-4-
 Contents

3.8.4 Adjusting the power shuttle engagement speed .............................................86

3.8.5 Using the parking brake...................................................................................87
3.8.6 Standstill function.............................................................................................88
3.8.7 Using the clutch pedal......................................................................................89
3.8.8 Adjusting the clutch pedal engagement position..............................................90
3.8.9 Braking.............................................................................................................91
3.8.10 Using the emergency brake.............................................................................91
3.8.11 Starting to drive................................................................................................92
3.8.12 Speed ranges...................................................................................................93
3.8.12.1 Selecting the speed range..........................................................93
3.8.12.2 Changing the speed range while driving.....................................94
3.8.12.3 Programming automatic shifting between speed ranges C
and D..........................................................................................95
3.8.13 Driving modes..................................................................................................95
3.8.13.1 Automatic driving mode..............................................................96
3.8.13.2 Activating the automatic driving mode........................................96
3.8.13.3 Driving with the automatic driving mode.....................................97
3.8.13.4 Semiautomatic driving mode......................................................98
3.8.13.5 Activating the semiautomatic driving mode................................99
3.8.13.6 Driving with the semiautomatic driving mode...........................100
3.8.13.7 Manual driving mode................................................................100
3.8.13.8 Activating the manual driving mode..........................................101
3.8.13.9 Driving with the manual driving mode.......................................102
3.8.14 Adjusting the transmission droop...................................................................103
3.8.15 Adjusting the speed balance..........................................................................105
3.8.16 Using the ECO/Power function.......................................................................106
3.8.17 Engine brake setting.......................................................................................106
3.8.17.1 Selecting the engine brake setting............................................107
3.8.17.2 Selecting the default engine brake setting................................108
3.8.18 Parking the tractor..........................................................................................109
3.8.19 Cruise control.................................................................................................109
3.8.19.1 Cruise control switches.............................................................110
3.8.19.2 Programming the driving speed cruise control.........................111
3.8.19.3 Activating and deactivating the driving speed cruise
control.......................................................................................111
3.8.19.4 Decreasing the driving speed cruise control setting.................112
3.8.19.5 Increasing the driving speed cruise control setting...................113
3.8.19.6 Programming the engine speed cruise control ........................113
3.8.19.7 Activating and deactivating the engine speed cruise
control ......................................................................................114
3.8.19.8 Decreasing the engine speed cruise control setting.................115
3.8.19.9 Increasing the engine speed cruise control setting...................115
3.8.20 Using the traction force control setting...........................................................116
3.8.21 Limiting the engine speed..............................................................................117
3.8.22 Limiting the maximum driving speed..............................................................118
3.8.23 Using the hydraulic front suspension.............................................................119
3.8.24 Calibrating the hydraulic front suspension.....................................................120
3.8.25 Differential lock...............................................................................................120
3.8.26 Engaging and disengaging the differential lock..............................................121
3.8.27 Four-wheel drive.............................................................................................122
3.8.28 Engaging and disengaging the four-wheel drive............................................123
3.8.29 Driving start automatics..................................................................................123
3.8.30 Setting the driving start automatics................................................................124
3.8.31 Reverse drive system.....................................................................................125
3.8.32 Permitted driving inclinations for driving the tractor on a slope......................125
3.9 Proline instrument panel display......................................................................126
3.9.1 Fixed views.....................................................................................................126
3.9.2 Selecting a view.............................................................................................127
3.9.3 Top and middle row views..............................................................................127
3.9.3.1 Working time view.....................................................................128

-5-
Contents

3.9.3.2 Cruise control view...................................................................128

3.9.3.3 Driving speed view....................................................................129
3.9.3.4 Wheel slip view.........................................................................129
3.9.3.5 Rear power take-off speed view...............................................130
3.9.3.6 Front power take-off speed view...............................................130
3.9.3.7 Engine speed view....................................................................130
3.9.3.8 Fuel consumption views...........................................................131
3.9.3.9 Rear lower links' position view..................................................132
3.9.3.10 Front lower links' position view.................................................133
3.9.3.11 Gearbox temperature view.......................................................133
3.9.3.12 Travel distance view.................................................................133
3.9.3.13 Surface area view.....................................................................134
3.9.4 Periodical maintenance view..........................................................................134
3.9.5 Resetting views..............................................................................................135
3.9.6 Enlarging the middle row................................................................................136
3.9.7 Changing parameters.....................................................................................136
3.9.7.1 Activating and exiting the setting mode....................................136
3.9.7.2 Changing the parameter value.................................................137
3.9.7.3 Setting the display backlight level.............................................138
3.9.7.4 Setting the implement width......................................................138
3.9.7.5 Changing the hour display........................................................138
3.9.7.6 Changing the minute display....................................................139
3.9.7.7 Changing the clock mode.........................................................139
3.9.7.8 Activating the direction indicator buzzer...................................139
3.9.7.9 Changing the temperature unit.................................................140
3.9.7.10 Changing the length unit...........................................................140
3.9.7.11 Changing the volume unit.........................................................141
3.9.7.12 Activating and deactivating the front power take-off speed
view...........................................................................................141
3.9.7.13 Activating and deactivating the front lower links' position
view...........................................................................................141
3.9.7.14 Adjusting the display contrast...................................................142
3.10 A-pillar display..................................................................................................142
3.10.1 Power shuttle section.....................................................................................143
3.10.2 Transmission section......................................................................................144
3.10.3 General information section...........................................................................145
3.10.4 Changing general information section views..................................................146
3.11 Tractor terminal................................................................................................146
3.11.1 Tractor terminal control button functions........................................................147
3.11.2 Entering menus..............................................................................................147
3.11.3 Power shuttle related drive view symbols......................................................148
3.11.4 Transmission related drive view symbols.......................................................149
3.11.5 General information drive view symbols.........................................................150
3.11.6 Pop-up views..................................................................................................152
3.11.7 Entering the large drive view..........................................................................152
3.11.8 Split drive view...............................................................................................153
3.11.9 Entering the split drive view............................................................................153
3.11.10 Changing the lower field views.......................................................................153
3.11.11 Lower field views............................................................................................154
3.11.11.1 Power take-off speed views......................................................155
3.11.11.2 Engine speed view....................................................................156
3.11.11.3 Rear hydraulic valve settings view............................................156
3.11.11.4 Front hydraulic valve settings view...........................................156
3.11.11.5 Gearbox temperature view.......................................................156
3.11.11.6 Hydrostat temperature view......................................................157
3.11.11.7 Working hydraulics oil temperature view..................................157
3.11.11.8 Rear lower links' position view..................................................157
3.11.11.9 Wheel slip view.........................................................................158
3.11.11.10 Working time view.....................................................................158
3.11.11.11 Travel distance view.................................................................158

-6-
 Contents

3.11.11.12 Surface area view.....................................................................159

3.11.11.13 Fuel consumption views...........................................................159
3.11.11.14 Cruise control view...................................................................160
3.11.12 Entering the hydraulics settings view.............................................................161
3.11.13 Hydraulics view symbols................................................................................161
3.11.14 Adjusting the display brightness.....................................................................162
3.11.15 Changing units...............................................................................................163
3.11.16 Changing parameters.....................................................................................163
3.11.16.1 Setting the implement width......................................................163
3.11.16.2 Resetting counters....................................................................164
3.11.17 Transmission settings view............................................................................164
3.12 Rear linkage.....................................................................................................166
3.12.1 Diagnose light.................................................................................................166
3.12.2 Activating the linkage.....................................................................................167
3.12.3 Using the lift/stop/lower switch.......................................................................168
3.12.4 Using the position control knob......................................................................168
3.12.5 Using the linkage floating position..................................................................169
3.12.6 Using the lift/lower push buttons....................................................................170
3.12.7 Lift/lower indicator lights ................................................................................170
3.12.8 Setting the lowering speed.............................................................................171
3.12.9 Limiting the lifting height.................................................................................171
3.12.10 Draft control....................................................................................................172
3.12.11 Activating and deactivating the draft control...................................................173
3.12.12 Passing the position set by the position control knob....................................173
3.12.13 Passing the height set by the lifting height selector.......................................174
3.12.14 Using the drive balance control .....................................................................175
3.12.15 Slip control......................................................................................................176
3.12.16 Using the slip control......................................................................................177
3.13 Three-point linkage..........................................................................................178
3.13.1 Attaching implements.....................................................................................179
3.13.2 Adjusting lifting links ......................................................................................180
3.13.3 Adjusting lower links.......................................................................................181
3.13.4 Adjusting check links......................................................................................181
3.13.4.1 Adjusting the check links' lenght...............................................181
3.13.4.2 Adjusting the check links' support.............................................182
3.13.5 Automatic check links ....................................................................................183
3.13.5.1 Adjusting thread-adjustable check links....................................183
3.13.5.2 Adjusting pin-adjustable check links.........................................184
3.13.5.3 Using the floating position of automatic check links.................185
3.13.6 Using quick couplings for lower links .............................................................185
3.13.6.1 Setting the release cable for lower link quick couplings ..........186
3.14 Auxiliary hydraulics..........................................................................................188
3.14.1 Auxiliary hydraulic controls and functions......................................................189
3.14.2 Activating and deactivating the auxiliary hydraulics.......................................190
3.14.3 Selecting joystick functions for auxiliary hydraulics........................................190
3.14.4 Controlling the auxiliary hydraulics rear valves 1 and 2 and front valves
1F and 2F.......................................................................................................191
3.14.5 Controlling the rear valve 1 from rear mudguard push buttons......................192
3.14.6 Controlling the auxiliary hydraulics rear valves 3 and 4 and the front
valve 3F..........................................................................................................193
3.14.7 Selecting predefined settings for auxiliary hydraulics valves ........................193
3.14.7.1 Factory settings for auxiliary hydraulics....................................194
3.14.7.2 Defining user settings for auxiliary hydraulics...........................194
3.14.8 Activating and deactivating the position locking.............................................195
3.14.9 Activating and deactivating the floating position ...........................................196
3.14.10 Using a hydraulic valve as a single-action valve............................................197
3.14.11 Activating and deactivating the hydraulics assistant......................................197
3.14.12 Using the auxiliary hydraulics on/off valves....................................................198
3.14.13 Using quick-action couplings .........................................................................199
3.14.14 Using Power Beyond couplings......................................................................200

-7-
Contents

3.14.15 Connecting an external hydraulic motor to the auxiliary hydraulics...............201

3.15 Using the front linkage.....................................................................................202
3.15.1 Setting front linkage lifting link positions.........................................................203
3.16 Using the Valtra front loader............................................................................204
3.16.1 Using the Valtra Quick front loader coupling plate.........................................205
3.16.2 Softdrive.........................................................................................................206
3.16.3 Locking the equipment...................................................................................206
3.16.4 Controlling the extra cylinder with the change valve......................................207
3.17 Power take-off..................................................................................................207
3.17.1 Attaching implements to the power take-off...................................................207
3.17.2 Rear power take-off........................................................................................209
3.17.2.1 Recommended rear power take-off shafts................................210
3.17.2.2 Activating rear power take-off...................................................211
3.17.2.3 Starting rear power take-off......................................................212
3.17.2.4 Stopping rear power take-off temporarily..................................213
3.17.2.5 Deactivating rear power take-off...............................................213
3.17.2.6 Stopping the rear power take-off in emergency........................214
3.17.2.7 Using the rear power take-off automatic stop...........................215
3.17.2.8 Proportional ground speed power take-off................................216
3.17.2.9 Adjusting the rear power take-off engagement.........................217
3.17.3 Front power take-off.......................................................................................218
3.17.3.1 Activating and deactivating front power take-off.......................219
3.17.4 Power take-off cruise control..........................................................................219
3.17.4.1 Activating and deactivating the power take-off cruise
control.......................................................................................220
3.17.4.2 Using the power take-off cruise control....................................220
3.18 U-Pilot headland automatics............................................................................221
3.18.1 U-Pilot operating requirements.......................................................................221
3.18.2 U-Pilot switches..............................................................................................222
3.18.3 U-Pilot view....................................................................................................222
3.18.4 U-Pilot view symbols......................................................................................223
3.18.5 Recording a U-Pilot programme.....................................................................225
3.18.6 U-Pilot recording examples............................................................................226
3.18.7 Running the recorded U-Pilot programme......................................................227
3.18.8 U-Pilot error codes.........................................................................................229
3.19 Implement signal connection...........................................................................230
3.19.1 Resetting the implement signal connection....................................................231
3.20 Valtra ISOBUS.................................................................................................231
3.20.1 ISOBUS implement connector.......................................................................233
3.20.2 ISOBUS terminal connector...........................................................................233
3.20.3 Bus extension connectors..............................................................................234
3.20.4 Resetting the ISOBUS connection.................................................................235
3.21 Towing devices................................................................................................235
3.21.1 Trailer hitch.....................................................................................................235
3.21.1.1 Unlatching the trailer hitch equipped with mechanical
unlatching system.....................................................................235
3.21.1.2 Unlatching the trailer hitch equipped with hydraulic
unlatching system.....................................................................236
3.21.1.3 Latching the trailer hitch............................................................238
3.21.2 Agricultural drawbar.......................................................................................239
3.21.3 Scharmüller towing device.............................................................................240
3.21.3.1 Adjusting the jaw height............................................................240
3.21.3.2 Attaching to the mechanical jaw...............................................242
3.21.3.3 Attaching to the automatic jaw..................................................242
3.21.4 Euro trailer hitch.............................................................................................244
3.21.5 Euro trailer hitch with hydraulic extension......................................................245
3.21.5.1 Unlatching the hydraulically extended Euro trailer hitch...........245
3.21.5.2 Extending the Euro trailer hitch.................................................246
3.21.5.3 Latching the hydraulically extended Euro trailer hitch..............247
3.21.5.4 Changing the trailer hitch/draw.................................................250

-8-
 Contents

3.22 Air pressure system.........................................................................................250

3.23 Trailer...............................................................................................................252
3.23.1 Trailer air pressure brakes.............................................................................253
3.23.2 Trailer fluid brake valve..................................................................................254
4 Maintenance.......................................................................................255
4.1 Maintenance schedule.....................................................................................255
4.2 Service inspection............................................................................................255
4.3 Performing maintenance tasks........................................................................256
4.3.1 Greasing lubricating points fitted with grease nipples....................................257
4.3.2 Cleaning the tractor........................................................................................257
4.3.2.1 Cleaning the engine compartment............................................258
4.3.2.2 Cleaning polycarbonate windows.............................................258
4.4 Recommended fuel and lubricants..................................................................259
4.4.1 Fuel................................................................................................................259
4.4.1.1 Quality requirements for engine fuel.........................................259
4.4.1.2 Storing fuel................................................................................259
4.4.1.3 Fuel filter system.......................................................................260
4.4.1.4 Biodiesel fuel............................................................................260
4.4.2 Grease............................................................................................................260
4.4.2.1 Valtra Grease - NLGI2 universal grease...................................261
4.4.2.2 Valtra Calsium LF - NLGI2 calsium grease LF.........................261
4.4.2.3 Valtra Grease Moly - NLGI2 moly grease.................................261
4.5 Storing the tractor............................................................................................261
4.5.1 Storing the tractor for a period shorter than two months................................261
4.5.2 Storing the tractor for a period longer than two months.................................262
4.6 Running the tractor in after storage.................................................................262
4.6.1 Running the tractor in after a storing period shorter than two months...........262
4.6.2 Running the tractor in after a storing period longer than two months............263
4.7 Periodical maintenance....................................................................................263
4.7.1 Periodical maintenance chart.........................................................................264
4.7.2 Daily maintenance..........................................................................................266
4.7.2.1 Checking the engine oil level....................................................266
4.7.2.2 Checking the oil level in the transmission system....................266
4.7.2.3 Checking the oil level in the hydraulic system..........................267
4.7.2.4 Checking the coolant level........................................................269
4.7.2.5 Cleaning radiators.....................................................................270
4.7.3 Weekly maintenance......................................................................................271
4.7.3.1 Greasing the three-point linkage...............................................271
4.7.3.2 Checking the trailer hitch..........................................................272
4.7.3.3 Greasing the trailer hitch...........................................................272
4.7.3.4 Maintaining the front linkage.....................................................273
4.7.3.5 Checking the front power take-off.............................................274
4.7.3.6 Greasing the brake cam...........................................................274
4.7.3.7 Greasing front axle mounting bearings.....................................275
4.7.3.8 Greasing hydraulically suspended front axle mounting
bearings....................................................................................275
4.7.3.9 Greasing flexible front mudguards............................................276
4.7.3.10 Checking belts' tension.............................................................276
4.7.3.11 Adjusting the air conditioning compressor belt.........................277
4.7.3.12 Adjusting the air compressor belt.............................................277
4.7.3.13 Changing the air conditioning compressor belt.........................278
4.7.3.14 Changing the multi-grooved fan belt and the air
compressor belt........................................................................278
4.7.3.15 Checking the fuel system prefilter and sediment bowl..............280
4.7.3.16 Checking the electrolyte level in the battery.............................281
4.7.3.17 Checking the tyre pressure.......................................................282
4.7.3.18 Checking the emergency brake................................................282
4.7.3.19 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir............................................283
4.7.4 Maintenance every 500 hours........................................................................283

-9-
Contents

4.7.4.1 Greasing door hinges...............................................................283

4.7.4.2 Changing the engine oil and the oil filter...................................284
4.7.4.3 Checking the breather pipe.......................................................285
4.7.4.4 Checking the brake fluid level...................................................286
4.7.4.5 Cleaning the cab ventilation air filter.........................................286
4.7.4.6 Checking wheel nuts' tightness................................................287
4.7.4.7 Checking the brake pedal free travel........................................288
4.7.4.8 Adjusting brake pedals' travel...................................................288
4.7.4.9 Checking the parking brake......................................................289
4.7.4.10 Adjusting the parking brake......................................................289
4.7.4.11 Changing transmission oil filters...............................................291
4.7.4.12 Changing hydraulic system oil filters........................................292
4.7.4.13 Checking the oil level in the front axle differential.....................292
4.7.4.14 Checking the oil level in front axle hubs...................................293
4.7.4.15 Changing front PTO housing oil and washing oil filter..............294
4.7.4.16 Checking front PTO rubber couplings.......................................295
4.7.4.17 Checking and greasing the trailer air-pressure brake
system......................................................................................295
4.7.4.18 Checking the air pressure system's automatic water
draining.....................................................................................296
4.7.5 Maintenance every 1000 hours or yearly.......................................................296
4.7.5.1 Changing oil in the hydraulic system........................................296
4.7.5.2 Changing oil in the front axle differential...................................298
4.7.5.3 Changing oil in the front axle hubs...........................................300
4.7.5.4 Changing the cab ventilation air filter........................................300
4.7.5.5 Changing the recirculation filter................................................301
4.7.5.6 Changing the fuel filter..............................................................301
4.7.5.7 Changing the fuel prefilter.........................................................302
4.7.5.8 Changing engine air filters........................................................304
4.7.5.9 Greasing the flywheel ring gear................................................305
4.7.5.10 Checking the front wheel toe-in................................................306
4.7.5.11 Adjusting toe-in of front wheels.................................................306
4.7.5.12 Adjusting engine valves............................................................307
4.7.5.13 Changing the hydraulics breather.............................................307
4.7.5.14 Checking the power shuttle operation......................................308
4.7.5.15 Tightening frame nuts and bolts...............................................308
4.7.6 Maintenance every 2000 hours or every other year.......................................308
4.7.6.1 Changing oil in the transmission system..................................308
4.7.6.2 Changing the transmission breather.........................................310
4.7.6.3 Changing the brake fluid...........................................................311
4.7.6.4 Bleeding the brake system ......................................................312
4.7.6.5 Cleaning the cooling system.....................................................314
4.7.6.6 Maintaining the air conditioning................................................317
4.7.6.7 Checking the refrigerant condition............................................318
4.8 Checks and adjustments..................................................................................319
4.8.1 Changing tyres...............................................................................................319
4.8.1.1 Setting the tyre parameter........................................................319
4.8.1.2 Tyre parameters.......................................................................320
4.8.1.3 Calibrating speed sensors........................................................321
4.8.2 Track widths...................................................................................................323
4.8.2.1 Agricultural front axle track widths............................................323
4.8.2.2 Industrial front axle track widths...............................................324
4.8.2.3 Rear axle track widths..............................................................325
4.8.3 Using chains...................................................................................................325
4.8.4 Using twin-mounted wheels...........................................................................326
4.8.5 Engine............................................................................................................326
4.8.5.1 Bleeding the fuel system...........................................................326
4.8.6 Electrical system............................................................................................327
4.8.6.1 Safety precautions for the electrical system.............................327
4.8.6.2 Checking the battery.................................................................327

- 10 -
 Contents

4.8.6.3 Alternator..................................................................................328
4.8.6.4 Protecting the electrical system before welding........................328
4.8.6.5 Fuses and relays......................................................................329
4.8.6.6 Fuses and relays in the electric centre.....................................330
4.8.6.7 Engine induction air preheater fuse..........................................332
4.8.6.8 Cab power supply fuse.............................................................333
4.8.6.9 Adjusting headlights..................................................................333
4.8.7 Power transmission system............................................................................334
4.8.7.1 Changing the rear power take-off shaft....................................334
4.8.7.2 Checking the transmission ratio of a power take-off driven
trailer.........................................................................................335
4.8.8 Steering system..............................................................................................335
4.8.8.1 Adjusting the steering angle.....................................................335
4.8.9 Cab and shields..............................................................................................336
4.8.9.1 Adjusting the steps for driving off-road.....................................336
4.8.9.2 Limiting the door opening.........................................................337
4.8.9.3 Checking and adjusting front mudguards.................................338
4.8.9.4 Adjusting flexible front mudguards............................................338
4.8.10 Hydraulic system............................................................................................339
4.8.10.1 Adjusting lifting links of the trailer hitch.....................................339
4.8.10.2 Maintaining the automatic jaw of the wagon towing device......340
5 Faults and remedial actions...............................................................341
5.1 Handling error situations..................................................................................341
5.2 Errors indicated by the indicator lights.............................................................341
5.2.1 Cleaning the main engine air filter..................................................................342
5.2.2 Identifying a blocked transmission or hydraulic system filter..........................343
5.3 Warning symbols on the Proline instrument panel display..............................345
5.3.1 Low fuel pressure warning.............................................................................345
5.3.2 Hydraulic oil temperature warning..................................................................346
5.3.3 Hydraulic oil level low warning.......................................................................347
5.3.4 Transmission speed warning..........................................................................347
5.3.5 Transmission overload warning......................................................................348
5.3.6 Power take-off speed warning........................................................................349
5.4 Viewing service codes.....................................................................................349
5.5 Service codes..................................................................................................350
5.6 Steering system malfunctions..........................................................................352
5.7 Towing the tractor............................................................................................352
5.7.1 Towing the tractor when the engine is running..............................................352
5.7.2 Towing the tractor when the engine is not running........................................353
6 Technical specifications.....................................................................354
6.1 Dimensions......................................................................................................354
6.2 Weights............................................................................................................354
6.3 Maximum permissible axle loading..................................................................354
6.4 Tyres................................................................................................................354
6.4.1 Wheel nuts tightening torque..........................................................................355
6.4.2 Front axle tyre loadings and pressures..........................................................355
6.4.3 Rear axle tyre loadings and pressures...........................................................356
6.5 Stud dimensions and spacing for wheel discs.................................................357
6.6 Track widths.....................................................................................................358
6.6.1 Rear track widths............................................................................................358
6.6.2 Front track widths...........................................................................................358
6.7 Engine..............................................................................................................359
6.7.1 Engine lubrication system..............................................................................359
6.7.2 Fuel system....................................................................................................360
6.7.3 Air cleaner......................................................................................................360
6.7.4 Cooling system...............................................................................................360
6.8 Electrical system..............................................................................................360
6.9 Power transmission..........................................................................................361

- 11 -
Contents

6.9.1 Power shuttle..................................................................................................361

6.9.2 Clutch.............................................................................................................361
6.9.3 Gearbox..........................................................................................................361
6.9.4 Rear axle differential lock...............................................................................361
6.9.5 Rear power take-off........................................................................................362
6.9.5.1 Rear power take-off alternatives...............................................362
6.9.5.2 Rear power take-off ratios........................................................362
6.9.5.3 Rear power take-off shafts........................................................362
6.9.5.4 Lower link end distance from rear power take-off shaft............362
6.9.5.5 Proportional ground speed.......................................................363
6.9.5.6 Maximum power take-off output...............................................363
6.9.6 Front power take-off.......................................................................................363
6.9.6.1 Front power take-off ratios........................................................363
6.9.6.2 Front power take-off shafts.......................................................363
6.10 Brake system...................................................................................................363
6.11 Steering system...............................................................................................364
6.11.1 Powered front axle.........................................................................................364
6.11.2 Turning circle radius.......................................................................................365
6.12 Cab and shields...............................................................................................365
6.12.1 Cab filter capacity...........................................................................................365
6.12.2 Windscreen washer........................................................................................365
6.12.3 Air conditioning system..................................................................................366
6.13 Hydraulic system..............................................................................................366
6.13.1 Low pressure circuit.......................................................................................366
6.13.2 Steering hydraulic circuit................................................................................366
6.13.3 Working hydraulic circuit................................................................................366
6.13.3.1 Valves for auxiliary hydraulics..................................................367
6.13.3.2 Counter pressure when using the return connection for
auxiliary hydraulics...................................................................367
6.13.4 Rear linkage...................................................................................................368
6.13.4.1 Maximum lifting force on the whole lifting area.........................368
6.13.4.2 Lifting range at the end of the lower links.................................368
6.13.5 Front linkage...................................................................................................369
6.13.6 Trailer hitches and towing devices.................................................................369
Alphabetical index...................................................................................373

- 12 -
 1. Safety precautions

1 Safety precautions
Always follow the safety precautions given when working with the tractor.
The regulations given do not release the operator from statutory and other
national regulations as regards traffic safety and occupational health and safety.
In addition to the precautions given in this manual, always follow the safety
regulations applicable to different types of working sites and existing road traffic
laws.

1.1 Hazard statements

Five symbols are used in the documentation.
DANGER: Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not
avoided, results in death or very serious injury.

WARNING: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not

avoided, could result in death or serious injury.

CAUTION: Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not

avoided, may result in minor injury.

IMPORTANT: Indicates special instructions or procedures which, if not strictly

observed, could result in damage to, or destruction of the machine, process or its
surroundings.

NOTE: Indicates points of particular interest for more efficient and convenient
repair or operation.

1.2 Safety rules

1.2.1 Replacing safety and information signs
Replacement signs are available from your dealer in the event of loss or damage.
• Replace any danger, warning, caution or instruction signs that are not
readable or are missing.
WARNING: Do not remove or obscure danger, warning, caution or
instruction signs.

- 13 -
1. Safety precautions

1.2.2 Maintaining hardware safety

To ensure maximum safety for the operator, maintain tractor hardware safety.
The owner is responsible for repairing any damage or wear which might
endanger the safety of the tractor.
• Cab
Damages on the cab must be repaired without delay to ensure the cab's
protective capability.
WARNING: If damage occurs to the cab, replace all parts affected
with new ones. Do not attempt any repair work (welding, drilling,
cutting, or grinding) without first consulting the manufacturer.

• Tractor construction
Do not change the tractor construction, such as maximum driving speed or
maximum power.
The tractor is type approved to comply with construction and use regulations.
Any changes to the tractor construction may reduce safety and durability and
affect the warranty terms.
• Brakes
• Always check that the brakes are working before driving.
• Lock the brake pedals together whenever individual wheel brakes are not
required and always when driving on the road.
• Extensive repairs to the braking system should be undertaken only by an
authorised Valtra workshop.
• When implements or ballast weights are front-end mounted, the rear axle
loading is decreased:
• Check that the rear brakes are still effective.
• Use appropriate ballast weights at rear as required.
• Cleaning
Keep the tractor clean to minimise risk of fire.
• Lights
• Make sure that lights and reflectors are clean and in working order.
• Make sure that the headlights are correctly adjusted.
• Steps
Keep the steps clean. Dirty steps can lead to falls and personal injury.
• Quick couplings
DANGER: Clean the quick couplings and ball joints before
attaching an implement. There is risk that the implement is not
attached properly.

• Maintenance
• Follow the maintenance instructions and safety precautions applicable to
the tractor.
• Stop the engine and lower the implement before carrying out any
maintenance work on the tractor or implement.

- 14 -
 1. Safety precautions

1.2.3 Using tractor safety features

The tractor has several features that contribute to the operator's safety.
• Steering wheel and safety handles
WARNING: Hold on to the steering wheel or safety handles in the
cab if the tractor tips over. Never try to jump out.

• Safety belt (extra equipment)

Always use the safety belt when using the tractor.
• Emergency exits
Familiarise yourself with the four emergency exits of the tractor cab, that is,
the doors, the rear window and the roof hatch (extra equipment).
• Roof hatch (extra equipment)

GUID-E522C473-E223-48DF-BC14-03DCD1490CD2

1. Handle
2. Gas spring

• Open the hatch by pushing the handle forward and pushing the hatch
upward.
• To open the hatch fully (for emergency exit), detach the upper end of the
gas spring from its fastener and push the hatch fully open.
WARNING: When driving on ice, keep the roof hatch open.

1.2.4 Safe operation

1.2.4.1 Following safe operating practices

To operate the tractor safely, follow all the safety precautions and instructions.
• Protect yourself against motor noise.
Use hearing protectors to avoid noise injuries when you are working outside
the cab near the engine.

- 15 -
1. Safety precautions

• Avoid carbon monoxide poisoning.

WARNING: To avoid carbon monoxide poisoning, do not start the
engine or run it indoors with the doors closed unless the exhaust is
vented to the outside.

• Note the function of the auxiliary hydraulics on/off push button.

ON/OFF 2

GUID-81F9EA69-748F-4BF4-9F22-D3E06167959A

1. Auxiliary hydraulics on/off push button

2. Indicator light

Pressing the auxiliary hydraulics on/off push button turns off or on all the
functions of the auxiliary hydraulics. The button has no effect on the function
of the ON/OFF valves or the rear linkage.
When the indicator light is not lit, the auxiliary hydraulics is deactivated.
DANGER: To prevent accidental auxiliary hydraulics control
movements, always turn off the auxiliary hydraulics during road
driving and during work if you do not need it.

• Restarting after engine stop

• If the engine has stalled, for example due to too heavy loading, turn the
ignition key to the STOP position.
• Restart the engine.
Keep an eye on the indicator lights on the instrument panel.
• Do not go under the tractor.

GUID-0BB05D71-A8AC-403B-B342-FCAD981AF07C

1. Radar

WARNING: Do not go under the tractor until the ignition key has
been turned to the STOP position. The tractor is equipped with
radar which presents a hazard to your eyes.

- 16 -
 1. Safety precautions

• Front loader
WARNING: The programmable features of the joystick or other
controls MUST NOT be used to operate a loader. In order to
prevent involuntary loader motion, the loader joystick controller
must be of a self-neutralising type. When the operator releases his
grip on the joystick, the joystick must return to a non-operational
neutral position - except for float detent position in the loader lower
direction.
• Ensure that no one is in the working area when you are working with a
front loader.
• Lower the front loader to the down position before leaving the tractor.
• Observe any special instructions issued by the loader manufacturer.
WARNING: The risk of overturn increases as the loader is raised.
Be extra careful on slopes when operating the loader. Always
carry the loader as low as practical for the conditions.

• Differential lock
Use the differential lock only when running on loose or slippery ground.
• Hydraulic/fuel pressure
Do not attempt to locate a leak in the hydraulic system or attempt to close a
leak using any part of your body.
CAUTION: Oil/fuel under high pressure easily penetrates through
clothing and skin and can cause serious injury.

1.2.4.2 Driving on public roads

When driving the tractor on public roads, pay special attention to the safety issues.
• Before driving
• Check that the tractor is safe for driving on the road.
• Adjust the rear view mirrors to give the correct viewing angle.
• Lock the check links with pins when transporting implements using three-
point linkage.
• When driving the tractor on public roads
WARNING: Do not transport anything on the auxiliary hydraulic
valves while driving on the road. The load, trailer link steering and
such have to be locked (for example mechanically).
• Use the slow moving vehicle emblem on the rear end of the tractor if
allowed by law.

GUID-1CEA41C8-DCE5-4D4C-ACAD-50A81837A945

- 17 -
1. Safety precautions

1.2.4.3 Controlling the driving speed

Adjust the driving speed to suit the driving surface, visibility and load.
IMPORTANT: Do not alter the maximum driving speed of the tractor. The
maximum reverse driving speed is 20 km/h.

• Avoid any sudden increase or reduction (braking) in the driving speed.

• Avoid tight turns at high driving speed.
• When driving the tractor with an attached implement which centre of gravity
is far from the tractor, the tractor may sway considerably during cornering.
If care is not taken, the tractor may tip over or the load may be displaced.

1.2.4.4 Driving downhill

Be careful when driving downhill.
• Do not drive with the power shuttle in neutral or the clutch pedal pressed down.
• Do not press the RangeShift push button.
• Check the brakes often.
• Change to a lower gear before driving down a steep incline.
IMPORTANT: Do not brake continuously as the brakes may overheat.
IMPORTANT: Do not let the engine overrun to avoid damage to the engine.
NOTE: If the speed is too high, a speed warning is shown on the instrument
panel display and a buzzer goes off.

1.2.4.5 Operating with implements

Read and follow the instructions to avoid unnecessary risks when operating with
implements and attachments.
WARNING: Before entering between the tractor and the implement,
prevent the tractor from moving by applying the parking brake or
blocking the wheels. There is risk of accidents if the tractor or
implement should move.

WARNING: Implements attached to the linkage or the auxiliary

hydraulic system must be lowered to the ground during maintenance.

1.2.4.6 Running with power take-off driven implements or machines

Read and follow the given instructions to use power take-off (PTO) driven
implements and machines safely.
DANGER: Serious accidents may occur due to failure to use the
prescribed safety devices.

- 18 -
 1. Safety precautions

• Use the prescribed safety devices and ensure that they are in good condition.
• Follow the directions given by the implement or machine manufacturer.

1.2.4.7 Using ballast weights

Use ballast weights according to the instructions when needed.
WARNING: When driving on the road, at least 20% of the gross weight
of the tractor must be on the front axle. When lifting an implement, the
weight on the front end of the tractor is reduced, and the steering
ability of the tractor is impaired or sometimes lost.

IMPORTANT: When using salt liquid as ballast weight in the wheels, the
manufacturer does not take the responsibility for the damages caused by salt.

• Use sufficient ballast weights.

• Mount ballast weights only at the points intended for this purpose.

1.2.4.8 Towing
Read and follow the given instructions to tow a trailer or an implement safely.
WARNING: When the tractor is towing a trailer, the brake pedals must
be locked together. The brakes are not to be used individually for
steering.

WARNING: When using a trailer, make sure that the hitch latch is locked.

WARNING: When using a trailer, always use the trailer brakes if

required by law. The trailer brakes are recommended to be used in 50
km/h models also in those countries where it is not required by law.

• Couple a trailer to the drawbar using an approved trailer coupling.

• Always lower a loaded drawbar with the hydraulic lift.
• Check that trailer brakes are operating properly and observe any special
instructions issued by the trailer manufacturer.
• Secure the trailer load properly.
WARNING: On tractors with trailers, the load must be properly
secured. The load must not obstruct the operator’s vision, or cover
lights and reflectors. Loads which project more than 1 m behind
the vehicle train must be suitably marked. During daytime, this
should be done with a flag, and during darkness, with a red light
and a reflector arrangement.

- 19 -
1. Safety precautions

1.2.4.9 Ensuring personal safety of other people

Avoid hazards for other people when using the tractor.
DANGER: Do not allow children in the cab or near the tractor or an
attached implement while the engine is running.

DANGER: If the tractor engine is running, do not leave anybody in the

cab without supervision, as the push buttons are easily operated.
Always apply the parking brake.

• Stop the engine and lower the implement to the ground when leaving the tractor.
• Do not let passengers ride in the tractor unless it is provided with a special
seat.
Other personal transport, for example on front-mounted loaders, is not
permissible.
• Do not let passengers ride on the platform inside the tractor.
• Never lend the tractor to a person who is not used to driving it.
DANGER: You may be held responsible for any resulting accidents.

• Do not allow children, untrained or unqualified persons to operate your tractor.

They could injure themselves or someone else.

1.2.4.10 Fire hazards

WARNING: Open fire, smoking and sparks are prohibited near the fuel
system and batteries. Especially when charging batteries, explosive
gases are present.

1.2.4.11 Handling viton seals subjected to high temperatures

At temperatures over 300°C, the viton seals of the engine produce highly
corrosive hydrofluoric acid.
• Do not touch viton seals subjected to abnormally high temperatures with your
bare hands.
Use neoprene rubber or heavy duty gloves and safety glasses when
decontaminating.
• Wash seals and the contaminated area with 10% calcium hydroxide or other
alkali solution.
• Put all the removed material in sealed plastic bags and deliver them to the
point stated by the authorities concerned.
WARNING: Never burn viton seals.

- 20 -
 2. Instruments and controls

2 Instruments and controls

2.1 Pedals
The tractor pedals are positioned as follows:

1 2 3 4 5
GUID-B9DB5C5F-FE87-4414-8461-21CBE5754B55

1. Clutch pedal
2. Locking pedal for steering wheel inclination
3. Latch for brake pedals
4. Brake pedals
5. Driving pedal

- 21 -
2. Instruments and controls

2.2 Dashboard
1 3

7 15
2 4
8
5
9
6
10

11
12
13
14
GUID-5F1247BB-4AFE-4B0B-8FFC-60D3175EC97E

1. Power shuttle lever

2. Preprogramming push button
3. Proline instrument panel
4. Main switch (extra equipment)
5. Hazard warning flasher switch
6. Light switch
7. Proline instrument panel display change-over switch
8. Proline instrument panel display setting switch
9. Upper headlights (extra equipment)
10. Multifunctional lever
11. Ignition switch
12. Lever for adjusting steering wheel position
13. Electric centre, lower part of the dashboard
14. Steering wheel
15. A-pillar display

2.2.1 Proline instrument panel

The operator receives information from the gauges, coolant thermometer,
tachometer, speedometer and indicator lights. All this can be seen on the Proline
instrument panel.

- 22 -
 2. Instruments and controls

1 2 3 4 3 5

6 7
GUID-FC2CD6B7-89CF-4206-B450-F2A852212AB7

1. Fuel gauge
2. Coolant thermometer
3. Indicator lights for direction indicator
4. Tachometer
5. Speedometer
6. Indicator light for the main beam
7. Proline instrument panel display

The fuel gauge shows the amount of fuel left in the tank.
The coolant thermometer indicates the engine temperature. The zone between
blue (cold) and red (hot) is the normal operating temperature.

2.2.2 Symbols on the Proline instrument panel display

The Proline instrument panel display have fixed views and views that can be
selected by the operator.
Fixed view symbols
The fixed views are the two functions shown on the bottom row of the display:
Symbol Function
Operating hours (hhhh.h)

Clock (hh:mm)

Selectable view symbols

The selectable views are the functions shown on the top and centre row of the
display:
Symbol Function
Working time (h:mm)

cruise cruise Cruise control

RPM KMH

km/h/mph Driving speed (km/h/mph)

Wheel slip (%, 0-100)

Table continued on next page

- 23 -
2. Instruments and controls

Symbol Function
Rear power take-off (PTO) speed (rpm)

Front power take-off (PTO) speed (rpm)

Engine speed (rpm)

Immediate fuel consumption (ha, acre)

Average fuel consumption (ha, acre)

Immediate fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Fuel consumption

Lower link position (%, 0-100)

Lifting link position of front linkage (%, 0-100)

Gearbox temperature (C/F)

Travel distance (m/km/miles)

Square area (ha)

Periodical maintenance

2.2.3 Indicator lights on the left side of the display

GUID-2DD1EF78-31AF-457A-A2AB-4B2CAD4A6378

Indicator light Indication

Direction indicator light for second trailer (green).
If one of the bulbs on the combination has failed, this light is not lit.
GUID-32CAE5D4-C71C-4D8B-
A41F-2E1DE50F1ED4

Direction indicator light for first trailer (green).

If one of the bulbs on the combination has failed, this light is not lit.
GUID-16CF17A4-
D96E-4592-8DF3-1D4A100F090E

Engine air cleaner clogging indicator light.

GUID-06E4C986-88C7-44BA-9897-211
781955328

Engine oil pressure light

GUID-A1E9566C-86CE-4AD3-A512-
D772AE266E1E

Table continued on next page

- 24 -
 2. Instruments and controls

Indicator light Indication

The exclamation mark is lit together with other indicator lights (yellow)

GUID-8D5CD1CF-666F-46C9-9211-2B
B777A73D4E

Glow indicator light

GUID-9DD75249-0CC3-461D-84EC-
C9937C947DB9 The light (yellow) is lit when the ignition key is in position and the engine is cold.

Parking brake indicator light

The light (red) is lit to indicate that the power shuttle lever is in the parking brake position.
GUID-
F0C90BFB-3126-404D-8C49-3FA955C
C4FD2

Low fuel level indicator light

The light is lit (yellow) and a buzzer sounds once to indicate that about 50 litres of fuel
GUID-714DD8B7-ED71-4AA7-
BFAA-31C5E3693067
is left.

Battery charging indicator light

GUID-CD4C4C77-7CDB-4FB5-AF3A-
BEFDF3417EB1

2.2.4 Indicator lights on the right side of the display

S F
T
O R
P CRUISE

GUID-A05FB324-D33C-419E-8E65-DDDFBDC37FCD

Indicator light Indication

STOP indicator light (red)

Gearbox oil pressure light

GUID-9B9A9C87-
BB4C-43A1-9A88-789929
9F22D0

Gearbox oil/hydrostat temperature light

GUID-
AC890C72-21FE-4056-89
5A-DB34A4CE9357

Pressure oil filter clogging indicator light

GUID-9B16B673-
D692-4975-
A9F9-5D6DBAFC4177

Four-wheel drive (4WD) indicator light

The light is lit (yellow) to indicate that 4WD is engaged.
GUID-1E59203D-
F3B7-420D-ABC9-
F7433B7A6C19

Front power take-off (PTO) indicator light

The light (yellow) is continuously on and indicates that the front PTO (extra equipment) is
GUID-9AA1D60E-5812-4
B9F-
engaged.
BDB0-44D48BEA8941

Table continued on next page

- 25 -
2. Instruments and controls

Indicator light Indication

Rear linkage indicator light
The light is on (yellow) to indicate that the lift/stop/lower switch is in lift position.
GUID-39523C54-
CBE4-40C9-98E5-3128D0
E9D502

Cruise control indicator light

The light is on (yellow) to indicate that cruise control is engaged (constant driving speed/
GUID-4A174D51-0D8F-49
D5-A784-8C0B31037162
constant engine speed chosen).

Differential lock indicator light

The light is lit (yellow) to indicate that the differential lock is engaged.
GUID-533CED2D-
D3E0-4488-8590-
A1E859BA91C5

Rear PTO indicator light

The light blinks (yellow) when the rear PTO has been activated and is ready to operate. The
GUID-70C6E3BD-
C691-4819-BA77-
light is on continuously when the rear PTO is engaged.
BA56A2A6A231

2.3 Controls on the right-hand side

2.3.1 Tractor terminal
The tractor terminal contains the following components.

1 1 P

2
SET ON/OFF

M1 M2 M3
OK 3
esc
OFF
4
GUID-D8C8A8A8-BB48-4091-8149-C590CD122E4A

1. Tractor terminal display

2. OK button
3. Arrow buttons
4. ESC button

- 26 -
 2. Instruments and controls

2.3.2 Driving controls

123

1 2
3 4 5 6

MODE

8 9 10 11 12 13

14 15

16
17

GUID-8B86CCE5-B43A-4BF0-9A36-93335672128D

1. Change switch for A-pillar display views

2. Activation/recording switch for U-Pilot
3. Switches for engine speed cruise control
4. Switch for four-wheel drive (4WD)
5. Switch for differential lock
6. ECO/Power switch
7. RangeShift push button
8. Hand throttle
9. Speed balance control knob
10. Traction force control knob
11. Driving mode switch
12. Engine brake setting switch
13. STOP indicator light (red)
14. Buttons for driving speed cruise control
15. Transmission adjustment lever
16. Engage/pause button for U-pilot
17. Stop button for U-pilot

- 27 -
2. Instruments and controls

2.3.3 Linkage
Rear linkage

1 2 3 4 5

MODE

6 7 8 9 10

11
12

13 14
GUID-A80032B4-BB62-4F90-8026-2B4D169476B6

1. Diagnose light
2. Lowering speed selector
3. Lifting height selector
4. Draft control selector
5. Drive balance control, including slip control system
6. Lift/lower push buttons
7. Lift/lower indicator lights
8. Drive balance control light
9. Slip control light
10. Switch for trailer hitch latch hydraulic releasing (extra equipment)
11. Lift/stop/lower switch
12. Lever for trailer hitch latch releasing (extra equipment)
13. Passing switch for position control knob
14. Position control knob

Front linkage
Front linkage is extra equipment.

- 28 -
 2. Instruments and controls

2 3
GUID-85AC5FDE-0CB4-4A8D-A56E-60752039D206

1. Auxiliary hydraulics on/off push button

2. Joystick functions selector
3. Joystick (controls the front linkage when the selector switch is turned to front
position)

2.3.4 Power take-off

Rear power take-off
1 2

MODE

GUID-3D8CB57D-A32B-4DDF-BCFA-E864560C5465

1. Switch for rear PTO

The rear PTO push buttons on the mudguards are extra equipment.
2. Switch for rear PTO automatics
3. Speed control lever for the rear PTO

Front power take-off

Front power take-off (PTO) is extra equipment.

- 29 -
2. Instruments and controls

MODE

GUID-03ED7011-8468-48D9-9563-B4DB67EDE36D

1. Switch for front PTO

- 30 -
 2. Instruments and controls

2.3.5 Auxiliary hydraulics

The following instruments and controls are used to control the auxiliary hydraulics.

1
MODE

2 3 4 5

6 7 8 9 10 11 12
GUID-3D765C09-65A5-479B-8F15-A7ECDFA86966

1. Change-over switch for front linkage/front loader (extra equipment)

2. Switch for rear on/off valve 1
3. Switch for rear on/off valve 2 (extra equipment)
4. Release switch for equipment locking (extra equipment)
5. Switch for Softdrive (extra equipment)
6. Auxiliary hydraulics on/off push button
7. Selector for the predefined factory/user settings
8. Joystick functions selector
9. Joystick push buttons
10. Joystick
11. Control levers for the rear valves 3 and 4 (extra equipment)
12. Control lever for the third front valve (extra equipment)

- 31 -
2. Instruments and controls

2.3.6 Other controls

123
2
3
4 5 6

8
7
9
MODE

10

11
GUID-404153F4-989F-4CCD-B467-418ABB576B86

1. Mounting brackets (extra equipment)

2. ISOBUS bus extension connectors (behind the cover, extra equipment)
3. ISOBUS terminal connection (extra equipment)
4. Implement signal connection (extra equipment)
5. Control stop switch (extra equipment)
6. 3-pin power socket
7. Lighter/power outlet
8. 2-pin power socket (can be controlled by U-Pilot)
9. 2-pin power socket
10. Power switches for 2-pin power sockets
11. Indicator light for implement/ISOBUS signal connection

- 32 -
 2. Instruments and controls

2.4 Controls on the rear side

2.4.1 Rear window opening device
The following figure shows the rear window opening device.

1
GUID-B7032200-07B2-42CA-B684-4CFFD8A5D05E

1. Rear window opening device

- 33 -
2. Instruments and controls

2.4.2 Reverse drive system controls

The reverse drive system is extra equipment.

3
4
5

6
7
8

GUID-D6351A6D-7DF7-438F-9F6C-A252395DFAC8

1. STOP indicator light (red)

2. Power shuttle lever
3. Preprogramming push button
4. Steering wheel
5. Lever for adjusting steering wheel inclination
6. Clutch pedal
7. Brake pedal
8. Driving pedal

- 34 -
 2. Instruments and controls

2.5 Controls on the left-hand side

The following controls are positioned on the left-hand side.

GUID-D58260FC-6135-4604-A3DB-18B9B2BCF384

1. Storage compartment
2. Emergency brake, extra equipment

2.6 Controls on the front roof console

The following controls are positioned in the front roof console.

1 2 3

5 6 5 7
GUID-0B01F055-1E97-497A-9EC2-7EF32CF8F11D

1. Cab light
2. Recirculation control lever (not with automatic air conditioning)
3. Mirror heating, extra equipment
4. Mirror adjustment, extra equipment
5. Ventilation nozzles
6. Sun visor down
7. Sun visor up

- 35 -
2. Instruments and controls

2.7 Controls on the right-hand side roof console

The following figure shows the components on the right-hand side roof console.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9

GUID-8C6EF57D-4FFF-47AF-B5AC-2E6430341506

1. Radio (extra equipment)

2. Rotating warning light switch (extra equipment)
3. Front working lights switch
4. Rear working lights switch
5. Front waist working lights switch (extra equipment)
6. Rear waist working lights switch (extra equipment)
7. Trailer hitch light switch (extra equipment)
8. Rear window wiper switch (extra equipment)
9. Rear window washer switch (extra equipment)

- 36 -
 2. Instruments and controls

2.8 Controls on the forest equipment right-hand side roof

console
1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

2
1 3

0 4

GUID-95C88AA8-4355-44D4-B842-88C65570C2DA

1. Fan control knob

2. Temperature control knob
3. Floor fan switch (extra equipment)
4. Rotating warning light switch (extra equipment)
5. Front working lights switch
6. Rear working lights switch
7. Front waist working lights switch (extra equipment)
8. Rear waist working lights switch (extra equipment)
9. Trailer hitch light switch (extra equipment)
10. Rear window wiper switch (extra equipment)
11. Rear window washer switch (extra equipment)
12. Rear window heater switch (extra equipment)

2.9 Controls on the left-hand side roof console

The following figure shows the components on the left-hand side roof console.

1 2 3 4

GUID-9A5C2E2B-EA01-4E4C-B9A5-AF292AF1D1B5

1. Fan control knob

2. Temperature control knob
3. Floor fan switch (extra equipment)
4. Rear window heater switch (extra equipment)

- 37 -
2. Instruments and controls

2.10 Controls on the forest equipment left-hand side roof

console

GUID-C79687A2-5647-4F66-975D-2EC3BF1191A3

1. Radio (extra equipment)

2.11 Air conditioning controls

2.11.1 Manual air conditioning controls
The manual air conditioning system is extra equipment.

1 2 3

GUID-FC188211-EA1D-4F1F-9AE8-94E1C4CEE5C3

1. Fan control knob

2. Air conditioning control knob
3. Temperature control knob

- 38 -
 2. Instruments and controls

2.11.2 Automatic air conditioning controls

The automatic air conditioning system is extra equipment.

1 2 3

4 5 6
GUID-8EEFE0E5-2C8D-4CE0-BA9D-FE61034A548D

1. Fan control knob

2. Display
3. Temperature control knob
4. Air conditioning system on/off button
5. Defrosting button
6. Recirculation control button

- 39 -
2. Instruments and controls

2.12 Driver's seat

1
2

5
6

7 7
8

9 10
GUID-09C4AD34-233B-4AEA-A328-C128E709298D

1. Storage compartment for manuals

2. Seat heating
3. Armrest adjustment
4. Backrest inclination adjustment
5. Seat belt anchor point
6. Seat turning lock/release
7. Height adjustment
8. Forward/backward adjustment
9. Suspension adjustment
10. Operator weight display

- 40 -
 2. Instruments and controls

2.13 Air suspended driver's seat

Air suspended driver's seat is extra equipment.

2 4 off 5
on

6 7

8 9

10 11 12 13

GUID-F4AF8B6A-BF95-48FE-8238-12635155227D

1. Seat depth and cushion angle adjustment

2. Storage compartment for manuals
3. Headrest height adjustment and removal
4. Seat heating
5. Lumbar support adjustment
6. Seat turning lock/release
7. Armrest adjustment
8. Forward/backward adjustment
9. Backrest inclination adjustment
10. Longitudinal suspension adjustment
11. Height and vertical suspension adjustment
12. Suspension stiffness adjustment
13. Seat belt anchor point

- 41 -
2. Instruments and controls

2.14 Valtra Evolution driver's seat

Valtra Evolution driver's seat is extra equipment.

1 2

4
5
6

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
GUID-F0ED6020-1852-495E-9BFF-0652F1C0535C

1. Storage compartment for manuals

2. Headrest height adjustment and removal
3. Armrest adjustment
4. Seat heating and ventilation
5. Upper backrest support adjustment
6. Lower backrest support adjustment
7. Backrest inclination adjustment
8. Seat depth adjustment
9. Seat cushion angle adjustment
10. Forward/backward adjustment
11. Longitudinal suspension adjustment
12. Seat turning lock/release
13. Vertical shock absorption adjustment
14. Height and vertical suspension adjustment
15. Lateral suspension adjustment

- 42 -
 2. Instruments and controls

2.15 Controls on the rear mudguard

1
2 3
ON
/O
FF

1 1

4
GUID-1379ECEF-F861-40EB-9109-14E7C7D2BAD8

1. Lift/lower push buttons

2. Rear power take-off on/off push button (extra equipment)
3. Push buttons (extra equipment) for the on/off valve 1
4. Push buttons (extra equipment) for the rear valve 1

2.16 Controls on the bonnet

The following controls are positioned on the bonnet.

GUID-0B4D2F6C-0D5D-4C94-995A-6247BFA3641F

1. Lift/lower push buttons for the front linkage

- 43 -
2. Instruments and controls

2.17 Rear controls and connections outside the cab

1 2 3 1

STOP

4
5

6
11

7 7

8 8

9
12

10 10

13 14 15 13
GUID-130E3773-26E9-42D1-96D5-3E9356158A25

1. Inlet, remote control cables

2. Trailer socket
3. Emergency stop plug for rear power take-off (PTO)
4. Hitch ball storing bracket
5. Top link
6. Quick-action couplings, auxiliary hydraulics
7. Lifting links
8. Trailer hitch lifting links (extra equipment together with the trailer hitch)
9. Levelling gear
10. Check links
11. Auxiliary hydraulic system return coupling
12. Hydraulic levelling ram (extra equipment)
13. Lower links
14. PTO shaft
15. Trailer hitch (extra equipment)

The trailer hitch is extra equipment with many alternatives.

- 44 -
 3. Operation

3 Operation

3.1 Running the tractor in

The tractor is run in during the 50 first hours of use. Running the tractor in
correctly gives the tractor a longer service life and makes it more economical.
Before you start driving, make sure that:
• You understand all the instruments and the functions of the controls.
• You have read the safety precautions.

IMPORTANT: Check that all bolts and nuts, for example in the wheels and
exhaust system, are properly tightened.

IMPORTANT: Carry out the daily maintenance before you drive the tractor for the
first time each day.

When running the tractor in:

• Drive smoothly and vary the loading.
• Do not race the engine.
• Do not run the engine at maximum speed.
• Do not pull a heavy load at low engine speed.
• Avoid driving with the same gear engaged and at the same engine speed for
a long period at a time.
Check all instruments immediately after the engine has started. Keep an eye on
the instruments while driving.

3.2 Preparing for use

Before you start using the tractor, read this manual thoroughly.
• Make sure that the tractor is handled and maintained in the correct way to
ensure reliability and provide economical operation.
• Follow the maintenance program carefully and include the daily maintenance
in your normal routine.
• Only use genuine Valtra spare parts for optimum performance.

3.2.1 Adjusting the driver's seat

You can adjust the driver's seat according to your height and weight.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. There is an
increased risk of loss of control.

- 45 -
3. Operation

1
2

5
6

7 7
8

9 10
GUID-09C4AD34-233B-4AEA-A328-C128E709298D

1. Storage compartment for manuals

2. Seat heating
3. Armrest adjustment
4. Backrest inclination adjustment
5. Seat belt anchor point
6. Seat turning lock/release
7. Height adjustment
8. Forward/backward adjustment
9. Suspension adjustment
10. Operator weight display

• Turn the seat.

• Pull the locking lever upwards to release the lock.
• Turn the seat 180° anti-clockwise to the desired position.
The seat has set positions at intervals of 10°, to be used, for example,
when ploughing.
• Adjust the seat forwards or backwards.
• Pull up the forward/backward adjustment lever.
• Move the seat to the desired position.
• Adjust the suspension.
The operator weight display shows the settings for operators of different
weights.
• To increase the suspension, turn the suspension adjustment lever
clockwise.
• To decrease the suspension, turn the suspension adjustment lever anti-
clockwise.

- 46 -
 3. Operation

• Adjust the height of the seat.

You can lift the seat from the basic position to two higher positions.
• To lift the seat, pull it slowly upwards until you hear a click.
• To lower the seat, pull it up to the top position and then let it to drop to
the desired position.
• Fasten the seat belt to the anchor point on the seat.
• Adjust the backrest inclination.
• Pull up the backrest inclination adjustment lever.
• Set the backrest to the desired position.
• Adjust the left armrest.
• Remove the cover.
• Change the armrest position in the mounting slot.
• Turn the seat heating on or off.

3.2.2 Adjusting the air-suspended driver's seat

You can adjust the air-suspended driver's seat according to your height and
weight. The air-suspended driver's seat is extra equipment.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. There is an
increased risk of loss of control.

- 47 -
3. Operation

2 4 off 5
on

6 7

8 9

10 11 12 13

GUID-F4AF8B6A-BF95-48FE-8238-12635155227D

1. Seat depth and cushion angle adjustment

2. Storage compartment for manuals
3. Headrest height adjustment and removal
4. Seat heating
5. Lumbar support adjustment
6. Seat turning lock/release
7. Armrest adjustment
8. Forward/backward adjustment
9. Backrest inclination adjustment
10. Longitudinal suspension adjustment
11. Height and vertical suspension adjustment
12. Suspension stiffness adjustment
13. Seat belt anchor point

• Adjust the seat depth and cushion angle.

• To adjust the seat depth, pull up the right handle in the seat front.
• To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up the left handle in the seat front.
• Turn the seat.
• Release the lock by pulling the lock/release lever upwards.
• Turn the seat to the desired position.
The seat has set positions from 180° anti-clockwise to 30° clockwise at
intervals of 10°.

- 48 -
 3. Operation

• Adjust the seat forwards or backwards.

• Pull the forward/backward adjustment lever upwards.
• Move the seat forwards or backwards to the desired position.
• Turn the longitudinal suspension on or off.
• To turn on the longitudinal suspension, turn the lever to the rear position.
• To turn off the longitudinal suspension, turn the lever clockwise 180° to
the front position.
• Adjust the suspension according to the operator weight.
• Pull the suspension adjustment lever until the compressor starts.
The compressor runs and the suspension adjusts automatically
according to the operator's weight.
If the operator is lighter than the previous operator, the compressor runs
momentarily, the excess pressure is released, and the seat lowers.
The suspension setting remains stored in the seat memory even if the
tractor is switched off.
The seat suspension travel is 100 mm (± 50 mm) regardless of the
starting height. The suspension area is limited to 100 mm for safety
reasons.
• Adjust the height of the seat.
The seat has a stepless height adjustment range of 80 mm (±40 mm from the
seat middle position).
• Lift the seat by pulling the height adjustment lever upwards until the
desired height is reached (the compressor runs continuously).
When the lever is released, the compressor stops and the seat stays at
that height. If you set the seat too high so that the room for upward
movement is less than 50 mm, the seat lowers automatically to the
highest permissible position.
• Lower the seat by pressing the height adjustment lever downwards until
the desired height is reached.
If you set the seat too low so that the 50 mm downward suspension is not
possible, the seat automatically rises to the lowest limit the next time you
touch the lever.
If you sit very still on the seat during the adjustment, the seat may rise to
the previous height in the memory.
When the seat is locked at a new height, you hear a faint click.
• Adjust the stiffness of the seat suspension.
• When the lever is at the back position, the suspension is at its firmest.
• When the lever is at the front position, the suspension is at its softest.
• Fasten the seat belt to the anchor points on the seat.
• Adjust the backrest inclination.
• Pull the backrest inclination lever up.
• Set the backrest to the desired position.
• Adjust the armrest.
• Remove the cover.
• Change the armrest position in the mounting slot.

- 49 -
3. Operation

• Adjust the lumbar support.

Turn the knob clockwise or anti-clockwise to adjust the lumbar support. The
height and depth are adjusted at the same time.
• Turn the seat heating on or off.
• Adjust the headrest height by lifting or lowering it.
• Remove the headrest by pulling it upwards.

3.2.3 Adjusting the Valtra Evolution driver's seat

You can adjust the Valtra Evolution driver's seat according to your height and
weight. Valtra Evolution driver's seat is extra equipment. If the tractor is equipped
with reverse drive controls, it cannot be equipped with a seat with lateral
suspension.
CAUTION: Do not attempt to adjust the seat while driving. There is an
increased risk of loss of control.

- 50 -
 3. Operation

1 2

4
5
6

8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15
GUID-F0ED6020-1852-495E-9BFF-0652F1C0535C

1. Storage compartment for manuals

2. Headrest height adjustment and removal
3. Armrest adjustment
4. Seat heating and ventilation
5. Upper backrest support adjustment
6. Lower backrest support adjustment
7. Backrest inclination adjustment
8. Seat depth adjustment
9. Seat cushion angle adjustment
10. Forward/backward adjustment
11. Longitudinal suspension adjustment
12. Seat turning lock/release
13. Vertical shock absorption adjustment
14. Height and vertical suspension adjustment
15. Lateral suspension adjustment

• Keep the manuals in the storage compartment behind the backrest.

In models with reverse drive controls, the documents are placed in a net pocket.
• Adjust the headrest height.
• Lift the headrest by pulling it upwards.
• Lower the headrest by pushing it downwards.
• Remove the headrest by pulling it upwards.

- 51 -
3. Operation

• Adjust the height of the left side armrest.

• Remove the cover.
• Change the armrest position in the mounting slot.
• Adjust the left armrest inclination.
• To increase the armrest inclination, turn the handle outward.
• To decrease the armrest inclination, turn the handle inward.
• Adjust the seat heating and ventilation.
There are three functions for seat heating and ventilation.
• To switch on the ventilation only, press down the right side of the switch.
• To switch both functions off, place the switch in the middle position.
• To switch on the heating only, press down the left side of the switch.
• Adjust the upper backrest support.
• To increase the upper backrest support, press the + side of the switch.
NOTE: Release the + side of the switch immediately when the backrest
does not expand any more. If you continue pressing, the height of the
seat may change when the air pressure of the system lowers.
• To decrease the upper backrest support, press the - side of the switch.
• Adjust the lower backrest support.
• To increase the lower backrest support, press the + side of the switch.
NOTE: Release the + side of the switch immediately when the backrest
does not expand any more. If you continue pressing, the height of the
seat may change when the air pressure of the system lowers.
• To decrease the lower backrest support, press the - side of the switch.
• Adjust the backrest inclination.
• Pull up the backrest inclination lever.
• Set the backrest to the required position.
• Adjust the seat depth.
To adjust the seat depth, pull up the right handle in the seat front.
• Adjust the seat cushion angle.
To adjust the seat cushion angle, pull up the left handle in the seat front.
• Adjust the seat forward or backwards.
• Pull the forward/backward adjustment lever upwards.
• Move the seat in the desired direction.
• Turn the longitudinal suspension on or off.
• To turn on the longitudinal suspension, turn the lever to the forward
position.
• To turn off the longitudinal suspension, turn the lever to the backward
position.
• Turn the seat.
• Release the lock by pulling the locking lever upwards.
• Turn the seat to the desired position.
You can turn the seat up to 180° left or 30° right from the normal position.
The seat has set positions at 10° intervals.

- 52 -
 3. Operation

• Adjust the vertical shock absorption.

The adjusting knob has five positions.
• To decrease the level of damping, turn the knob backwards.
• To increase the level of damping, turn the knob forward.
• Adjust the seat height and vertical suspension.
IMPORTANT: Lifting or lowering the seat over a minute at a time can
damage the compressor.
The seat has pneumatic height adjustment. The seat adjusts the vertical
suspension automatically according to the operator's weight.
• To lift the seat, pull the height adjustment lever upwards. Release the
lever when required height is reached.
• To lower the seat, push the height adjustment lever downwards. Release
the lever when required height is reached.
If you set the seat too high or low, the seat adjusts automatically to the
nearest permissible position to maintain the required margin for upward or
downward suspension.
• Adjust the seat lateral suspension.
Lateral suspension is not in use if the tractor is equipped with reverse drive
controls.
The lateral suspension is either on or off.
• To turn on the lateral suspension, pull the handle to the upper position.
• To turn off the lateral suspension, push the handle to the lower position.

- 53 -
3. Operation

3.2.4 Adjusting the right-side armrest

You can adjust the horizontal and sideways position as well as the inclination of
the armrest.

2
GUID-29839218-6C96-48B1-BE14-C37020893B5C

1. Sideways adjustment
2. Horizontal position adjustment
3. Armrest inclination adjustment

• Adjust the horizontal position of the armrest by moving the bracket to other
mounting holes.
• Adjust the armrest sideways with the sideways adjustment lever.
• Pull the lever upwards.
• Turn the armrest into the desired position.
You can turn the armrest to both directions from the middle position.
• Adjust the armrest inclination.
• Lift up the front edge of the armrest.
• Set the armrest to the desired position.

- 54 -
 3. Operation

3.2.5 Adjusting the steering wheel

You can adjust the steering wheel position with the lever and the locking pedal.
CAUTION: Do not adjust the steering wheel position while driving.

GUID-D702F6C1-5668-46E9-B84A-6175FC7A0A9D

1. Lever for adjusting steering wheel position

2. Locking pedal for steering wheel inclination

• Adjust the steering wheel position.

• Push the lever downwards.
• Move the steering wheel up or down to the wanted position.
• Pull the lever up to lock the steering wheel position.
• Set the steering wheel inclination.
• Press the locking pedal down.
• Adjust the steering wheel inclination.
You can move the steering wheel to 9 different positions.
• Release the pedal after adjusting.

- 55 -
3. Operation

3.2.6 Adjusting standard mirrors

You can adjust the position of the standard mirrors manually.

GUID-94073A8E-5075-4F2D-A9E9-581B1312B9E4

1. Locking device of the mirror support

To adjust standard mirrors:

1. Loosen the locking device of the mirror support.
2. Adjust the mirror position.
3. Tighten the locking device.

3.2.7 Adjusting optional mirrors

You can adjust the position of the optional mirrors electrically.

GUID-8BA97365-1C8D-43C9-96A2-10A4AA230C0F

1. Mirror adjustment

• To adjust the left mirror, turn the knob to the left and push the knob in the
direction of the arrows.
• To adjust the right mirror, turn the knob to the right and push the knob in the
direction of the arrows.

- 56 -
 3. Operation

3.2.8 Heating mirrors

Mirror heating is extra equipment.

GUID-F15F3525-F6B6-4020-A3C1-387FE9F0497F

1. Mirror heating switch

• To switch the mirror heating on, press down the symbol side of the switch.
• To switch the mirror heating off, press down the side of the switch opposite to
the symbol.

3.2.9 Using the windscreen wiper and washer

GUID-67100B24-DF6C-4F9B-9EA7-D9B8AEFB23C9

1. Multifunctional lever

• To use the windscreen wiper, turn the multifunctional lever.

The wiper has a drizzle position and two speeds.
• To use the windscreen washer, push the control lever inwards.

- 57 -
3. Operation

3.2.10 Using the rear window wiper

The rear window wiper is extra equipment.

GUID-62DA5F9E-6427-4CD2-B800-3EF2B7F49346

1. Switch for the rear window wiper

The wiper switch has three positions:

• To turn on the rear window wiper, press down the symbol side of the of the
rear window wiper switch.
• To turn on the drizzle function, press the rear window wiper switch to the
centre position.
• To turn off the rear window wiper, press down the side opposite to the
symbol of the of the rear window wiper switch.

3.2.11 Using the rear window washer

The rear window washer is extra equipment.

GUID-02281C37-69A5-4001-B126-F0C7196D7262

1. Switch for the rear window washer

- 58 -
 3. Operation

• To turn on the rear window washer, press down the symbol side of the switch.
The switch for the rear window washer is spring returned.
• To turn off the washer, press down the side of the switch opposite to the symbol.

3.2.12 Power shuttle lever

With the power shuttle lever you can change the driving direction and apply the
parking brake.

GUID-85975454-7178-48B4-A4A3-344CB5D07905

1. Power shuttle lever

• F (front position) = forward driving direction
• N (centre position) = neutral
• R (rear position) = reverse driving direction
• P = parking brake position

With the power shuttle, you can change the driving direction without using the
clutch pedal. However, traditional use of the clutch pedal is still possible when
changing direction, just make sure that you press the pedal fully down before
moving the power shuttle lever.
• With the power shuttle lever in the centre position, the parking brake can be
applied.
• When applying the parking brake, the four-wheel drive (4WD) is engaged and
all wheels brake.
• When the power is turned off, the parking brake is automatically applied
independently of the power shuttle lever position.

3.2.13 Using the main switch

The main switch is extra equipment.

IMPORTANT: Do not switch off the main power before you have turned the
ignition key to the STOP position.

- 59 -
3. Operation

GUID-80ABD553-4F90-46C9-B3FA-D951E7ADBB67

1. Main switch, extra equipment

The main switch is spring returned.

• To switch on the main power, press the symbol side of the main switch.
When the main power is switched on, the indicator light of the main switch
flashes.
• To switch off the main power, press the side of the main switch opposite to
the symbol.
When the main power is switched off, power is supplied only to the radio and
clock.

3.2.14 Control stop

The control stop is used when the tractor is running an implement in stationary
mode (for example a compressor or pump) and the operator is not in the cab.
Using the control stop reduces the risk of more serious damage to the engine or
in the transmission. The control stop is extra equipment.

NOTE: When starting the engine, the control stop must be disengaged.
Otherwise the engine does not start.

NOTE: Do not use the control stop when driving. The control stop automatically
stops the engine if the stop light is lit.

IMPORTANT: If the control stop stops the engine, the fault must be found and
repaired before the engine is started again.

- 60 -
 3. Operation

3.2.15 Using the control stop

GUID-EA9C3C0C-9961-45AF-86EF-CEEEBF78460F

1. Control stop switch

• To activate the control stop, press down the symbol side of the control stop
switch.
Release the locking device by pushing it towards the middle of the switch.
• To deactivate the control stop, press down the side of the control stop switch
opposite to the symbol.

3.2.16 Using the ignition switch

WARNING: Do not turn the ignition key to the STOP position when
driving. When the power is off, the parking brake applies and all
wheels lock.

WARNING: If the engine stops while the tractor is moving (for

example, the fuel has run out), do not press the clutch pedal down.
When the tractor is moving and the transmission is engaged, the
engine is running and there is pressure in the system.

WARNING: Do not keep extra keys on the same bunch with the
ignition key. It is possible that your knee touches them and turns the
power off.

The ignition switch has three positions: stop, power on and start.

- 61 -
3. Operation

1 2 3

GUID-9B02020C-3389-4113-AFA0-CC49C784DA08

1. STOP position
2. Power on position
3. Start position
4. Ignition switch
5. Ignition key

• To turn on the power, turn the ignition key from the STOP position to the
power on position.
In cold conditions, when the engine is cold, the glow indicator light on the
Proline instrument panel is lit. When the ignition key is in this position,
electrical equipment can be used.
• To start the engine, turn the ignition key from the power on position to the
start position after the glow indicator light on the Proline instrument panel has
gone out.
• To turn off the power, turn the ignition key to the STOP position.

STOP position
• The STOP position of the ignition switch can be used as an emergency
stop. The tractor and several movements of the implements can be
stopped if a fault occurs by turning the ignition key to the STOP position.
This will make the engine stop, all the wheels lock, the transmission
disengage and the movement of the linkage stop.
WARNING: Do not turn off the power when the tractor is moving.
Turning off the power engages the parking brake immediately.
There is danger of skidding and loss of control.

- 62 -
 3. Operation

3.3 Starting the tractor

3.3.1 Starting under normal conditions
WARNING: Never run the tractor in an enclosed building except with
the exhaust vented to the outside.

WARNING: Never start the engine unless you are seated on the
driver's seat.

CAUTION: Do not use starting aerosols. Due to the automatic glowing,

there is a risk of explosion.

IMPORTANT: If the engine fails to start on the first try, wait until the engine has
stopped completely before trying again.

When the power is turned on, all indicator lights in use are lit momentarily. The
following indicator lights remain on until the engine is started and the systems
operate normally:

1 2 3 4

5 6

GUID-436251D4-B48E-4EEF-A554-E4C85B3B11BA

1. Engine oil pressure

2. Stop light (is flashing)
3. Gearbox oil pressure
4. Four-wheel drive
5. Parking brake
6. Battery charging

1. Check that the power shuttle lever is in the parking brake position.
2. Turn the hand throttle knob to the low idling position.
3. If the tractor has a main switch (extra equipment), switch it on.

- 63 -
3. Operation

4. Ensure that the control stop (extra equipment) is deactivated.

5. Turn the ignition key to the power on position .

6. Wait until the glow indicator light on the instrument panel has gone out.

7. Turn the ignition key to the starting position .

• When the engine starts to fire up, keep the ignition key in the starting
position until the engine has started.
• If the engine fails to start within 10 seconds, stop starting and try again.
8. Release the ignition key when the engine starts.
When the engine starts, the following indicator lights go out:
• Engine oil pressure
• Gearbox oil pressure
• Stop light
• Battery charging
NOTE: The hydrostat is bled automatically when the engine is started. During
the bleeding process, the hourglass symbol is displayed on the tractor
terminal display. The bleeding process takes about 10 seconds.
IMPORTANT: Do not move the power shuttle lever away from the parking
brake position during the bleeding process. Moving the power shuttle
interrupts the bleeding and disengages the parking brake. This may cause
jerkiness when starting to drive and also damage the transmission.

9. Use the driving pedal to control the engine speed.

After starting a cold engine, the glow indicator light can light up again. The
afterglow reduces white smoke and keeps the cold engine running smoothly.

3.3.2 Starting under cold conditions

To ensure a successful start under cold conditions, use the engine heater and
follow the instructions given.
IMPORTANT: If you start the engine when it is very cold, the indicator light for
blocked hydraulic filters can be lit. This indicates that the oil is going through the
by-pass valve unfiltered.

IMPORTANT: Avoid using hydraulics until the oil has warmed up and the
indicator light is no longer lit.

IMPORTANT: Always use the engine heater when the temperature is below 0°C.

IMPORTANT: If you are driving the tractor for a short distance only, make sure
that the battery is charged enough to ensure starting.

- 64 -
 3. Operation

NOTE: Use of the engine heater reduces the wear on the engine.

• When cold starting the engine, turn off all unnecessary equipment that uses
electrical power.
• Keep the battery in a warm place when it is not in use.
Starting the tractor under very cold conditions is easier if the battery is kept in
a warm place when it is not in use.
• Use the engine heater to ensure a successful start under cold conditions.
Warming up the engine for 2–3 hours before starting is sufficient.
When the engine heater is activated, you can hear a hissing sound.
• If you start the engine under very cold conditions, keep the ignition key in the
starting position until the engine has started.
IMPORTANT: Do not keep the ignition key in the starting position for more
than 30 seconds at a time.

• If the temperature is below 0°C, first, warm up the engine and hydraulics oil
for a while at low engine speed.
Allow the engine to run for a few minutes before starting to drive or engaging
the power take-off. When first starting to use hydraulic functions, use the
predefined factory setting M2 to set the maximum flow to 50% for the first few
minutes.
• Never race a cold engine.
Run the engine with a light load until it has reached its normal operating
temperature.

3.3.3 Starting with an auxiliary battery

You can start the engine with an auxiliary battery (jump starting).
WARNING: A fully charged battery connected directly to a dead
battery can cause a current surge capable of causing the batteries to
explode.

IMPORTANT: Never try to start the engine by short-circuiting leads.

1. Check that the auxiliary battery has the same voltage as the standard battery.
2. Open the battery plugs to avoid risk of explosion.
3. Connect the (+) terminal of the auxiliary battery to the (+) terminal on the
tractor battery.
4. Connect the other jump lead from the (-) terminal of the auxiliary battery to
the attaching bolt of the battery ground wire or some other convenient ground
(not to the battery terminal).
5. Start the engine.

- 65 -
3. Operation

6. When the engine has started, disconnect the jump leads in the following order:
• Disconnect the jump lead between the ground and the (-) terminal of the
auxiliary battery.
• Remove the jump lead between the (+) terminals.

3.4 Using lights

3.4.1 Using headlights

GUID-1272AE0F-D762-4BA3-B93D-720193D6D7C1

1. Light switch
2. Multifunctional lever

• To switch on the parking lights, turn the light switch to the centre position.
When the switch is in this position, the working lights can also be switched on.
• To switch on the headlights, press down the symbol side of the light switch.
When the light switch is in this position, the main beams can be switched on
by the multifunctional lever.
NOTE: If the power is turned off when the headlights or parking lights are on,
the buzzer goes off. If lights are turned on when the power is off, the buzzer
does not go off.

• To turn on the main beams, pull the multifunctional lever towards yourself.
• To use the headlight flasher, move the multifunctional lever towards yourself
when the headlights are on.
• To switch off the headlights, press down the side of the light switch opposite
to the symbol.

- 66 -
 3. Operation

3.4.2 Using upper headlights

The upper headlights are extra equipment.

GUID-ED83F79D-FD85-401B-B18F-ED3FA876289B

1. Upper headlight switch

1. Press the symbol side of the switch to switch on the upper headlights.
When the upper headlights are on, the front lower headlights are off, and vice
versa.
2. Press the side of the switch opposite to the symbol to switch off the upper
headlights.

3.4.3 Using working lights

The parking lights must be switched on before the rear or front working lights
work.
• The switches for the front working lights have two positions: on/off.
• The switches for the rear working lights have three positions: on/automatic/off.

IMPORTANT: If the tractor is equipped with the Infolight Xenon package, always
turn off all the working lights before turning the power on. It is recommended to
turn on Xenon working lights one by one because they need a lot of power when
ignited.

IMPORTANT: If the tractor is equipped with the Infolight Xenon package, do not
turn the lights more than 10 degrees up or down. If the lights are turned more
than 10 degrees, the Xenon bulbs operating time is significantly shorter.

- 67 -
3. Operation

1 2 3 4

GUID-55F65146-5180-4614-B3E1-5BD528BF9101

1. Switch for front working lights

2. Switch for rear working lights
3. Switch for front waist working lights (extra equipment)
4. Switch for rear waist working lights (extra equipment)

• To use the lights manually, press down the symbol side of the switch.
• To use the rear working lights automatically, press the switch to the centre
position.
The rear working lights switch on when the reverse drive is engaged. The
lights switch off when the reverse drive is disengaged.
NOTE: The automatic function does not work when reverse drive controls
(extra equipment) are used.

• To turn off the lights, press down the side of the switch opposite to the symbol.

3.4.4 Using the trailer hitch light

The trailer hitch light is extra equipment.
The trailer hitch light is positioned in the power take-off (PTO) cover.

- 68 -
 3. Operation

GUID-4D868FA9-F1B0-4425-BB25-D0563F887D2F

1. Trailer hitch light switch

• To switch on the trailer hitch light, press the symbol side of the switch.
• To switch off the trailer hitch light, press the side of the switch opposite to the
symbol.

3.4.5 Using the cab light

The tractor is equipped with a cab light which can be used manually or set to
work automatically.

GUID-C1CDD864-BF32-49E7-98C6-5B0088609271

1. Cab light switch

The cab light switch has three positions: on/automatic/off.

• To turn on the cab lights, push the switch to the on position.
• To activate the automatic mode, push the switch to the centre position.
• When the door is opened, both the step and cab lights are lit.
• When the door is closed, the lights go out within 10 seconds.
• If the door is left open, the lights go out within 10 minutes.
• When the parking light or headlights are on, the right side panel is
illuminated with the LED light in the roof.
• To turn off the cab lights, push the switch to the off position.

- 69 -
3. Operation

3.5 Using notification devices

3.5.1 Using the direction indicators

GUID-DF421284-07B1-4607-8475-FCEA88AE8216

1. Multifunctional lever

• To switch on the left-hand side direction indicators, move the multifunctional

lever to the front position.
• To switch on the right-hand side direction indicators, move the multifunctional
lever to the rear position.

3.5.2 Using the horn

GUID-1BA9D6CF-239D-47B8-A277-1997D0E58EFF

1. Horn button

• To sound the horn, push the horn button.

- 70 -
 3. Operation

3.5.3 Using the rotating warning light

Rotating warning light is an extra equipment.

GUID-9D85D11B-FA5C-4AF0-91E6-243CAE24D02F

1. Rotating warning light switch

• To switch on the rotating warning light, press the symbol side of the switch.
• To switch off the rotating warning light, press the side of the switch opposite
to the symbol.

3.5.4 Using hazard warning flashers

All four direction indicators can be switched on to warn of a hazardous situation.

GUID-0E74230D-0EA4-4757-9999-8CF603CD6B7D

1. Switch for hazard warning flashers

1. To make all four direction indicators blink, press down the symbol side of the
switch.
2. To stop the blinking of the direction indicators, press down the side of the
switch opposite to the symbol.

- 71 -
3. Operation

3.6 Heating and ventilation

3.6.1 Using the heater
You can regulate the temperature and the fan on the roof console.

1 2
3

GUID-B526B6FF-61F8-4B33-B185-EA29BCAE240D

1. Roof fan control knob

2. Temperature control knob
3. Switch for floor fan (extra equipment)

• To regulate the speed of the roof fan, turn the roof fan control knob.
The roof fan has four speeds. It blows air through the ventilation nozzles on
the roof console.
• To increase the temperature, turn the temperature control knob clockwise.
• To blow air into the lower part of the cab, use the floor fan switch.
• To turn on the floor fan, press the switch to the centre position (speed 1).
• To increase the speed of the floor fan, press down the symbol side of the
switch (speed 2).
• To turn off the floor fan, press down the side of the switch opposite to the
symbol.

- 72 -
 3. Operation

3.6.2 Controlling ventilation nozzles and air recirculation

You can control the ventilation nozzles and air recirculation with the controls in
the front roof console.

2 3 2 4
GUID-1B68E635-D426-4357-870C-A04720A068FA

1. Recirculation control lever

2. Ventilation nozzles
3. Sun visor
4. Sun visor raising string

• Adjust the air ventilation nozzles.

• To change the air flow direction, turn the ventilation nozzles to the
desired direction.
• To clear the window surfaces of ice or condensation, turn the nozzles
towards the window.
• Adjust the sun visor.
• To lower the sun visor, pull it down.
• To raise the sun visor, pull the raising string.
• Adjust the air recirculation.
• To open the recirculation fully, push the recirculation control lever to the
left.
When you open the recirculation:
• The outside air channel is partially closed.
• The cab heats up faster.
• The heating capacity is higher.
• The cooling capacity is higher if the tractor has air conditioning.
• To close the recirculation, push the recirculation control lever to the right.
When you close the recirculation, the windows demist faster.

- 73 -
3. Operation

3.6.3 Using the manual air conditioning

You can adjust the manual air conditioning with three control knobs.
The manual air conditioning system is extra equipment.

IMPORTANT: Use the air conditioning regularly to prevent seizing of the

compressor.

NOTE: Use the air conditioning for a few minutes at least once a month.

NOTE: When the air conditioning system is in use, the cab doors and windows
must be closed.

1 2 3

GUID-36336747-9DCD-4DD2-A039-04A5EE6EB22F

1. Fan control knob

2. Air conditioning control knob
3. Temperature control knob

1. Turn the temperature control knob anti-clockwise to the extreme position.

2. When the engine is running, turn the air conditioning control knob clockwise
towards cold to the extreme position.
3. Turn the fan control knob to position 4.
4. When the desired cab temperature has been reached, adjust the air
conditioning control knob to maintain a comfortable temperature.

- 74 -
 3. Operation

5. Reduce the fan speed to obtain a comfortable temperature.

NOTE: To increase the efficiency of the air conditioning, keep the air
recirculation open.

GUID-302B33B9-04F4-44FF-B2DE-D6416FA987A7

1. Recirculation control lever

3.6.4 Automatic air conditioning

3.6.4.1 Air conditioning control panel

The automatic air conditioning system is extra equipment.
The control panel backlighting is white in daytime and green in the dark.
The graduation marks of the temperature control knob are always lit in blue or
red. The air conditioning on/off button and the defrosting button have an amber
indicator LED. The LED is lit only when the function is active.

1 2 3

4 5 6
GUID-8EEFE0E5-2C8D-4CE0-BA9D-FE61034A548D

1. Fan control knob

2. Display
3. Temperature control knob
4. Air conditioning system on/off button
5. Defrosting button
6. Recirculation control button

The operating temperature is -40°C...+80°C. The display decelerates in -30°C

and degrades in -40°C.

- 75 -
3. Operation

3.6.4.2 Activating air conditioning when the battery has been disconnected
When the battery has been disconnected, you must calibrate the air conditioning
system.
• Turn the fan control knob to AUTO position.
The automatic air conditioning starts the calibration.
NOTE: During calibration, the air conditioning system cannot be used.

3.6.4.3 Air conditioning control

Different air conditioning control situations are described in the following.
Starting
When you start the tractor, the air conditioning automatically defaults to the last
selected adjustment, apart from the defrosting.
Temporary start mode
When you start the tractor in freezing weather, the air conditioning stays in the
starting mode until the temperature of the engine coolant reaches the preset value.
During the starting mode:
• The fan speed is at the minimum.
• The fresh air intake is on.
The starting mode ends when the engine coolant has reached the preset value or
if:
• The defrosting is connected.
• The LO setting mode is connected.
• A different speed is selected for the fan manually.
Priority of functions
The function with a higher priority controls the operations. The priority order of the
functions is as follows.

Defrosting High priority

OFF mode .
Compressor, recirculation, fan speed .
HI setting mode, LO setting mode Low priority

For example, if you have selected the OFF mode with the fan control knob, the
defrosting function cancels the OFF mode and activates the defrosting functions.

IMPORTANT: Use the air conditioning regularly to prevent seizing of the

compressor.

NOTE: Use the air conditioning for a few minutes at least once a month.

You can activate the air conditioning using the air conditioning system on/off
button also in cold weather.

- 76 -
 3. Operation

ECO mode
Switching off the air conditioning with the air conditioning system on/off button
activates the ECO mode. The air cooling compressor is turned off and the system
tries to achieve the target temperature by other available means, such as fresh
air intake and fan speed.

3.6.4.4 Controlling the fan

1 2

3
4
5
GUID-10CA7AA6-0D35-400C-8844-C7ACAF2351BC

1. Fan control knob

2. Display
3. AUTO position
4. OFF position
5. Air conditioning system on/off button

• Activate the air conditioning system to increase the fan speed by pressing the
air conditioning system on/off button.
The efficiency of the fan speed can vary when the system tries to maintain
the adjusted cab temperature. An increase in the sun heat radiation
increases the fan speed.
• Activate the automatic fan speed mode.
• To activate the automatic mode, turn the fan control knob to the AUTO
position.
• To activate the ECO mode, press the air conditioning system on/off
button when the fan control knob is in the AUTO mode.
If the selected cab temperature is lower than the outdoor temperature, the
numerical value of the temperature flashes on the display.
The fan speed changes gradually.
• Adjust the fan speed manually.
To change the fan speed from the default value of the AUTO position, turn
the fan control knob to the desired position.
The fan speed changes immediately.
• To deactivate the air conditioning system, turn the fan control knob to the
OFF position.
• The fan turns off.
• The recirculation of the indoor air is on, as indicated by the symbol
on the display.

- 77 -
3. Operation

3.6.4.5 Automatic air conditioning system on/off button

1
GUID-D5681DD7-43B5-446A-8201-86C087D10D1D

1. Automatic air conditioning system on/off button

• When the automatic air conditioning is on, the amber indicator LED is lit.
• When the automatic air conditioning is off, the compressor and the indicator
LED are off.
• When the indoor-air recirculation is activated, the automatic air conditioning
is normally on. Switching off the air conditioning by pressing the automatic air
conditioning system on/off button turns off the compressor and activates the
ECO mode.

3.6.4.6 Temperature view

The selected temperature is displayed on the display.
• Within the range of 20-24°C, the temperature is displayed with an accuracy
of 0.5°C.
• Outside the range of 20–24°C, the temperature is displayed with an accuracy
of 1°C.
• If adjusted below 18°C, LO is displayed.
• If adjusted over 28°C, HI is displayed.
When the recirculation of the indoor air is active, the display shows HI, LO or the
tractor symbol depending on the situation.

3.6.4.7 Temperature control

You can adjust the cab temperature with the temperature control knob.

1 2

GUID-2E45CB01-D5C2-46B9-8BE2-20E32B3D338D

1. Display
2. Temperature control knob

Adjust the cab temperature with the temperature control knob. The selected
target temperature is shown on the display. Note that the selected temperature is
a target value that may not be reached in extreme cold/heat conditions.

- 78 -
 3. Operation

Setting mode HI

GUID-7D8E86DD-57B8-4BE1-B0BE-51E4FBF8BBAD

The maximum heating effect is reached by setting the cab temperature above
+28°C. When the HI mode is active:
• The air conditioning indicator LED is lit.
• The fan speed is 75% of the maximum (if operating automatically).
• The recirculation of the indoor air is off.
• The text HI is displayed.
Setting mode LO

GUID-56389D9F-BD9D-4DEF-96F7-0413544B75CF

The maximum cooling effect is reached by setting the cab temperature below
+18°C. When the LO mode is active:
• The air conditioning indicator LED is lit.
• The fan speed is at the maximum (if operating automatically).
• The recirculation of the indoor air is on.
• The text LO is displayed.

3.6.4.8 Defrosting
You can activate defrosting with the defrosting button.

1
GUID-17536714-B907-4F15-8F76-BA95846D2122

1. Defrosting button

The maximum time of continuous defrosting is three minutes. When the

defrosting is active:

- 79 -
3. Operation

• The air conditioning indicator LED is lit.

• The defrosting button indicator LED is lit.
• The fan speed is 75% of the maximum.
• The fresh air intake is active.
• The text HI is displayed.
You can deactivate the defrosting by pressing the defrosting button again. The
former display mode is restored and the defrosting button indicator LED goes off.

3.6.4.9 Selecting air recirculation

You can select between fresh air intake, recirculation of indoor air, or the
automatic recirculation. With the automatic recirculation, the selection between
fresh air intake and indoor air recirculation is done automatically based on the
outdoor temperature.

1
GUID-C41534B7-AF68-47EC-AFE3-A1EDDE31F1DC

1. Recirculation control button

1. To switch on the cab indoor air recirculation, press the recirculation control
button once.
The symbol is displayed.

2. Press the recirculation control button again to switch to the fresh air intake.
The symbol is displayed.

3. Press the recirculation control button for the third time to switch to the
automatic recirculation.
The symbol is displayed.

NOTE: When the air conditioning system is restarted, you have to wait two
minutes to ventilate the cab before activating the recirculation again.

After 25 minutes of continuous use, the system deactivates the air recirculation
for one minute.
It is recommended to use the fresh air intake with high outdoor temperatures.
Fresh air intake is automatically set if the automatic function is selected.

- 80 -
 3. Operation

3.7 Power outlets

3.7.1 Lighter
The tractor is equipped with a lighter. The lighter socket can be used also as an
electric power output.

GUID-2CF80CCA-C78C-4F40-BB4C-488AFA53388B

1. Lighter

3.7.2 Using the two-pin power socket and power switch

Use the two-pin power socket for electrical equipment.

GUID-37E6FBD9-ED7F-40E7-8BBD-7D7716F509C9

1. Power switch, can be controlled by U-Pilot

2. Power switch
3. Two-pin power socket

The socket provides an output of 12 V DC; 8 A at a maximum.

The power switch controls the power socket next to it.

- 81 -
3. Operation

• To activate the upper power socket, press down the symbol side of the upper
switch (spring returned).
The light on the switch is lit.
The U-Pilot can control the upper power socket when it is activated.
• To disconnect the upper power socket, press down the side of the upper
switch opposite to the symbol.
The light on the switch goes out.
• To activate the lower power socket, press down the symbol side of the lower
switch.
The light on the switch is lit.
• To disconnect the lower power socket, press down the side of the lower
switch opposite to the symbol.
The light on the switch goes out.

3.7.3 Three-pin power socket

1 2

3 4
GUID-E928B3C6-70E5-4EDB-BF9C-35D74C60485D

1. Three-pin power socket

2. 5A
3. 25 A
4. Ground

The direct current is supplied through the power socket for different regulating
elements, implements etc. 5 A is available through the ignition switch and 25 A
direct from the battery. The current supply of the 25 A pin can be switched off
only in tractors equipped with a main switch (extra equipment).

- 82 -
 3. Operation

3.7.4 Trailer socket

Current from the tractor to the trailer is supplied through the trailer socket.

2
3
4
5
6
7
GUID-148BC744-BF50-4F98-8A87-331CC78ED56D

1. Direction indicator left (yellow)

2. Brake light (red)
3. Parking light right (brown)
4. Direction indicator right (green)
5. Ground (white)
6. Continuous current, max. 15 A. The current supply can be switched off only in
tractors equipped with a main switch (extra equipment).
7. Parking light left (black)

- 83 -
3. Operation

3.7.5 Two-pin power socket on the bonnet

GUID-A5B54E44-9063-4602-9513-DA7B2A615CAE

1. Two-pin power socket

The socket provides an output of 12 V DC; 8 A at a maximum. The power socket

is activated when the parking lights are on.

3.8 Driving the tractor

3.8.1 Steering
NOTE: When the engine is not running, the steering is not power assisted.

CAUTION: If a malfunction occurs in the steering system, stop the

tractor and correct the malfunction before restarting.

3.8.2 Power shuttle

You can change the driving direction smoothly with the power shuttle lever. The
engagement of the power shuttle is automatic.
When driving with manual driving mode:
You can request a driving direction change with the power shuttle lever at any
driving speed, but the transmission starts to engage the new driving direction only
when the speed is below 10 km/h. If the driving speed is higher, the transmission
brakes until the speed is low enough. The new direction arrow starts to flash to
indicate that the driving direction change has been requested, and is lit constantly
when the new direction is engaged. If you return the power shuttle lever to the
original direction when the driving speed is still over 10 km/h, the traction
engages immediately.
When driving with automatic or semiautomatic driving mode, the tractor does not
move unless you press the driving pedal.
The operator detector prevents the shuttle engagement if you are not on the seat.
If the direction is selected, the arrow of the selected direction flashes on the
display panel. The selected direction does not engage until you sit on the seat

- 84 -
 3. Operation

and move the power shuttle lever through the parking brake position (P) to the
desired direction, and then press the driving pedal.
• When the driving speed is below 5 km/h:
If you leave the seat for more than two seconds and the clutch pedal is not
pressed down more than 10%, the shuttle disengages and the direction
arrow flashes. The direction stays selected but the tractor does not move
until you sit on the seat and move the power shuttle lever through the parking
brake position (P) to the desired direction, and then press the driving pedal.
• When the driving speed is over 5 km/h:
If you leave the seat, the shuttle stays engaged.
DANGER: Do not leave the seat when the tractor is moving.

3.8.3 Using the power shuttle lever

GUID-85975454-7178-48B4-A4A3-344CB5D07905

1. Power shuttle lever

• F (front position) = forward driving direction
• N (centre position) = neutral
• R (rear position) = reverse driving direction
• P = parking brake position

IMPORTANT: Always apply the parking brake when parking the tractor. Using the
standstill function for idling is not recommended.

NOTE: When the tractor is stationary, lifting the power shuttle lever slightly
upwards from the F or R position activates the standstill function.

• Disengage or engage the parking brake.

• To disengage the parking brake, pull out the collar round the power
shuttle lever and move the power shuttle lever to the neutral (N) position.
• To engage the parking brake, pull out the collar round the power shuttle
lever and move the power shuttle lever to the parking brake (P) position.

- 85 -
3. Operation

• Select the desired driving direction.

Move the power shuttle lever to the forward (F) or reverse (R) driving
direction. Change the driving direction at lower driving speeds with high load
so that there is less stress on the power transmission.
When driving with automatic or semiautomatic driving mode, the tractor does
not move before you press the driving pedal.
• Use the standstill function.
• To activate the standstill function, lift the power shuttle lever slightly
upwards from its current position.
• To continue driving after standstill, let the power shuttle back down.
When driving with automatic or semiautomatic driving mode, the tractor
does not move before you press the driving pedal.

3.8.4 Adjusting the power shuttle engagement speed

You can adjust the power shuttle engagement speed through the tractor terminal
transmission settings.
The index determines how quickly the torque of the power shuttle increases to
the maximum value when the clutch is engaged. The index affects both the F
(forward) and R (rearward) clutch engagements. The value ranges from 1...10,
where:
• 1 = very slow engagement
• 10 = very quick engagement

5
F/R
5 1
2
GUID-98ADED0F-1971-4771-94DF-92F9F3213DFC

1. Power shuttle engagement speed setting

1. Return to the main menu by pressing ESC as many times as needed.

2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.
3. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.
NOTE: When the power shuttle lever is in parking brake position (P) you can
enter the transmission settings view by pressing the preprogramming button.
F/R
4. Move the navigation box to the power shuttle engagement speed setting
with the arrow buttons.
5. Press the right arrow button.
6. Set the value for the power shuttle engagement speed by pressing the up or
down arrow button.

- 86 -
 3. Operation

7. Press the left arrow button two times to return to the transmission settings
view main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.

3.8.5 Using the parking brake

You can use the parking brake by changing the position of the power shuttle lever.
CAUTION: Do not use the parking brake when driving because it locks
all the wheels. The parking brake engagement speed is limited to 2 km/
h.

WARNING: Always apply the parking brake when parking the tractor.

WARNING: If you must leave the cab with the engine running, move
the power shuttle lever to the parking brake position.

WARNING: Do not go between the tractor and the implement when

the standstill function is on. Always apply the parking brake before you
start attaching implements to the tractor.

WARNING: Before entering between the tractor and the implement,

prevent the tractor from moving by applying the parking brake or
blocking the wheels. There is risk of accidents if the tractor or
implement should move.

WARNING: The STOP indicator light starts flashing if the parking

brake cable breaks or the adjustment is wrong. Repair the fault or
adjust the cable before continuing driving.

WARNING: The parking brake does not engage at driving speeds over
2 km/h. If you move the power shuttle lever to the P position at higher
driving speeds, the parking brake indicator light on the instrument
panel and the P symbols on the A-pillar and tractor terminal displays
flash and the buzzer alarms intermittently until the speed drops below
the limit. Always ensure that the parking brake is actually engaged
before leaving the tractor.

1. Stop the tractor completely.

- 87 -
3. Operation

2. Pull up the collar round the power shuttle lever, and move the lever to the
parking brake (P) position.
Keep the clutch and brake pedals pressed down when applying the parking
brake. If you move the power shuttle lever to centre position (N) when the
tractor is on standstill mode, it can start moving if you are on inclined ground.

GUID-28B1703E-60BB-469D-AB73-6C9211A740A7

When the parking brake is on, four-wheel drive (4WD) is engaged and all
wheels brake.
3. To release the parking brake, pull up the collar, and move the power shuttle
lever away from the parking brake (P) position.

3.8.6 Standstill function

DANGER: If you press down the clutch pedal with the standstill on, the
transmission disengages. There is a danger of the tractor starting to
move if you are on sloping ground.

WARNING: Do not go between the tractor and the implement when

the standstill function is on. Always apply the parking brake before you
start attaching implements to the tractor.

F1 1

A Cruise
0.0km/h
cruise
13.0 2 1310 2
GUID-28DDCFCF-2247-4DCF-813B-AEB6DAF99F0A

1. Standstill symbol

In the automatic or semiautomatic driving mode, when you release the driving
pedal to the upper position, the transmission gets locked and the tractor remains
in standstill. In the manual driving mode, the tractor remains in standstill when
you pull the transmission adjustment lever to the backwards position. The
standstill symbol is shown on the tractor terminal display. When you press the
driving pedal, the locking of the transmission is released and the tractor starts to

- 88 -
 3. Operation

move to the (pre)selected driving direction. In the manual driving mode, the
tractor starts to move when you push the transmission adjustment lever forward.
The standstill function is active for one minute at a time. As long as the standstill
symbol is visible on the tractor terminal, you can prolong the duration of standstill
function by one minute at a time by pressing the brake pedal. If the standstill is
not prolonged, the parking brake engages automatically and the symbol on the
display changes to P.
When the parking brake is engaged and the symbol P is shown, you have to
disengage the parking brake by moving the power shuttle lever to the parking
brake position and back to the desired driving direction. After this you can start
driving by pressing the driving pedal.In the manual driving mode, the tractor starts
to move when you push the transmission adjustment lever forward.

3.8.7 Using the clutch pedal

1
GUID-0FDC0EEE-E513-40D2-B148-7C426A433C57

1. Clutch pedal

1. Press the clutch pedal to release the traction.

Pressing the clutch pedal releases the traction immediately. This is useful in
case of emergency, for example.
DANGER: If you press down the clutch pedal with the standstill on,
the transmission disengages. There is a danger of the tractor
starting to move if you are on sloping ground.

2. Let the clutch pedal up gradually.

IMPORTANT: Never rest your foot on the clutch pedal while driving.
IMPORTANT: Do not allow the clutch to slip more than necessary when
moving off.

WARNING: Do not descend slopes with the clutch pedal pressed down.

- 89 -
3. Operation

3.8.8 Adjusting the clutch pedal engagement position

You can adjust the clutch pedal's engagement position and clutch slipping
properties according to your preferences through the tractor terminal
transmission settings.
There are four alternative values for the clutch pedal engagement position setting:
Value Clutch pedal engagement position (%) 1)
1 approx. 5%
2 approx. 10%
3 approx. 15%
4 approx. 20%

1) The clutch pedal raised by approximately x% of the full pedal travel.

40

4
START

880
2 1
GUID-DAFCDE6E-DF92-41A6-BCA6-EA90BA3D95E4

1. Clutch pedal engagement position setting

1. Return to the main menu by pressing ESC as many times as needed.

2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.
3. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.
NOTE: When the power shuttle lever is in parking brake position (P) you can
enter the transmission settings view by pressing the preprogramming button.

4. Move the navigation box to the clutch pedal engagement position setting
with the arrow buttons.
5. Press the right arrow button.
6. Select one of the four values for the clutch pedal engagement position by
pressing the up or down arrow button.
7. Press the left arrow button two times to return to the transmission settings
view main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.

- 90 -
 3. Operation

3.8.9 Braking
You can use the brake pedals differently in various working situations.

1 2
GUID-6295F787-9808-4BE4-BDB6-EA7943B8DF78

1. Brake pedals
2. Latch for brake pedals

The tractor has two brake pedals which apply separately to the right and to the
left side rear wheels. All four wheels are braking when pressing both brake
pedals. The pedals can be locked together with a latch to brake evenly with all
four wheels.
WARNING: The brake pedals must always be latched together when
driving on the road.

CAUTION: If functional problems occur in the braking system, stop the

tractor and rectify the fault before continuing.

• To brake evenly with four wheels, press down the both brake pedals.
DANGER: The brake action is weaker if the gearbox oil pressure
warning light is lit and the STOP indicator light begins to flash.
Stop the tractor and correct the fault before continuing.

GUID-6E20D973-F8F1-45E7-A113-8532047A28F0

• To intensify steering by braking when turning on the field, press down the
brake pedal on the inner curve side.

3.8.10 Using the emergency brake

If the brakes fail while driving, you can control braking with the emergency brake
lever.
The emergency brake is extra equipment.
The emergency brake is applied to the rear wheels.

- 91 -
3. Operation

1
GUID-CEE3F5AE-C363-416E-8D95-B195A8527D24

1. Emergency brake lever

1. Pull up the emergency brake lever.

You have to pull it constantly as it does not stay locked.
2. Release the lever when the tractor has stopped.

3.8.11 Starting to drive

1. Start the engine.

2. Press down the brake pedals to keep the tractor stationary.
3. Select the speed range.
Select a speed range which:
• gives the optimum fuel consumption without overloading the engine and
the transmission.
• allows the engine to operate comfortably at about 75% of its maximum
power.
IMPORTANT: When operating with heavy loads, it is recommended that you
start with the speed range C to ensure better acceleration and economical
fuel consumption.

4. Move the power shuttle lever either to drive forward or reverse.

5. Release the brake pedals.
6. Adjust the driving speed with the driving pedal.
Keep an eye on the indicator lamps and gauges while driving.

WARNING: Do not turn the ignition key to the STOP position when
driving. When the power is off, the parking brake applies and all
wheels lock.

- 92 -
 3. Operation

NOTE: If the engine stops when driving, for example due to overload, you must
turn the ignition key to the STOP position before starting again.

3.8.12 Speed ranges

The tractor transmission system has four speed ranges: A, B, C and D. The
following table shows the nominal speeds within the different speed ranges. The
maximum driving speed of each speed range depends on the tyres used.
Speed range Driving speed (40 km/h models) Driving speed (50 km/h models)
A 0-6.5 km/h 0-8 km/h
B 0-13.5 km/h 0-17 km/h
C 0-21 km/h 0-26 km/h
D 0-40 km/h 0-50 km/h

3.8.12.1 Selecting the speed range

NOTE: The clutch pedal does not have an influence on the speed range changing.

IMPORTANT: When driving with manual driving mode, changing the speed range
is allowed only with the parking brake engaged.

NOTE: When driving with manual driving mode, only the speed ranges A and B
are available.

1
GUID-69FDDDA1-8F27-47E5-971C-4F99D2943C16

1. RangeShift push button

2. Driving speed cruise control increasing and decreasing push buttons

• Shift the speed range up.

• Press the RangeShift push button and keep it pressed down.
• Press the driving speed cruise control increasing (+) push button.
You can change the speed range more than one step at a time, directly from
A to D for example. A pop-up window indicating the speed range change
shows on the tractor terminal display until the requested speed range is
engaged.

- 93 -
3. Operation

• Shift the speed range down.

• Press the RangeShift push button and keep it pressed down.
• Press the driving speed cruise control decreasing (-) push button.
You can change the speed range downwards by more than one step at a
time, directly from D to A for example. The change is implemented if the
driving speed at the time of the request is within the defined limits for speed
range changing. The request does not stay in the memory but has to be
repeated when the driving speed has been reduced below the limit.
The driving speed limits for changing speed ranges given in the following
table are approximate and depend on the tyre size:
Speed range change Maximum driving speed (40 km/h Maximum driving speed (50 km/h
models) models)
Changing from D to C 17.5 km/h 22 km/h
Changing from C to B 9 km/h 11 km/h
Changing from B to A 5.5 km/h 7 km/h

A pop-up window indicating the speed range change shows on the tractor
terminal display until the requested gear is engaged.

3.8.12.2 Changing the speed range while driving

IMPORTANT: When driving with manual driving mode, changing the speed range
is allowed only with the parking brake engaged.

1
GUID-69FDDDA1-8F27-47E5-971C-4F99D2943C16

1. RangeShift push button

2. Driving speed cruise control increasing and decreasing push buttons

1. Press the RangeShift push button and keep it pressed down.

If the driving speed is less than 2 km/h, you can change the speed range only
after the tractor has stopped.
If the driving speed is more than 2 km/h, pressing the RangeShift push button
releases the traction and you can change the speed range immediately.
DANGER: Pressing the RangeShift push button releases the
traction immediately. Press down the brake pedals to prevent the
tractor from moving if you are on sloping ground.

- 94 -
 3. Operation

2. Shift the speed range by pressing the driving speed cruise control increasing
(+) or decreasing (-) push buttons.
The traction is re-engaged immediately after you release the RangeShift
push button. You can continue driving by pressing the driving pedal.

3.8.12.3 Programming automatic shifting between speed ranges C and D

You can program the shifting automatics to change the speed range
automatically between the speed ranges C and D through the tractor terminal
transmission settings. In this case the speed range changes automatically
according to the driving situation.
1. Return to the main menu by pressing ESC as many times as needed.
2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.
3. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.
4. Move the navigation box to the speed range C-D shifting automatics position
C D
AUTO with the arrow buttons.

5. Press the right arrow button.

6. Select the speed range C-D shifting automatics by pressing the up or down
arrow button.

1800
cruise

ON
C D
AUTO 1
GUID-434E3A0A-2DAF-4D60-A720-FD4540635878

1. Speed range C-D shifting automatics setting

• When the box is checked, the automatic shifting between speed ranges
C and D is activated.
• When the box is unchecked, the automatic shifting between speed
ranges C and D is deactivated.
7. Press the left arrow button two times to return to the transmission settings
view main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.

3.8.13 Driving modes

You can choose between three different driving modes for driving the tractor.

Automatic driving mode (default driving mode) You control driving speed and acceleration.
Semiautomatic driving mode (mode 1) You control engine speed.
Manual driving mode (mode 2) You control engine speed and the transmission ratio.

- 95 -
3. Operation

The automatic driving mode is the default driving mode that is activated every
time power is turned on.
In case the semiautomatic or manual driving mode is activated, either the
semiautomatic driving mode (mode 1) or manual driving mode (mode 2) symbol
appears on the A-pillar and tractor terminal displays. If the automatic driving
mode is activated, there is no symbol displayed.

3.8.13.1 Automatic driving mode

The automatic driving mode is the default driving mode that is activated every
time power is turned on.
When the automatic driving mode is active, you can control the driving speed and
acceleration using the driving pedal. The transmission system automatically
determines the optimal transmission ratio and engine speed according to the
selected speed and acceleration while maintaining optimal fuel efficiency.
The position of the transmission adjustment lever determines the maximum
driving speed within the selected speed range. The maximum driving speed is
shown on the A-pillar display as a number. The same information is displayed on
the tractor terminal display as bars. The actual driving speed is shown as a
number on both displays and also as bars on the tractor terminal display.

F1

1
A 8.0 km/h
Cruise Cruise
13.0 2 1310 2
GUID-D31DEFD9-8B1B-4E02-840C-FB647CF70FDB

1. Maximum driving speed

2. Actual driving speed

When using the automatic driving mode, the position of the hand throttle
determines the minimum engine speed, but has no effect on driving speed.

3.8.13.2 Activating the automatic driving mode

The automatic driving mode is the default driving mode that is activated every
time power is turned on. Thus, if you have just started the tractor, there is no
need to activate the automatic driving mode.

- 96 -
 3. Operation

NOTE: If the manual driving mode is currently activated, you have to engage the
parking brake before you can change the driving mode.

GUID-C63F6785-DD67-42AC-BFEA-C81B4355FCF5

1. Driving mode switch

• Press the symbol side of the driving mode switch to activate the automatic
driving mode.
The driving mode switch is spring returned.
When the automatic driving mode is active, there is no symbol displayed on
the tractor terminal or A-pillar display.

3.8.13.3 Driving with the automatic driving mode

2
GUID-5D7FB3EB-EC3A-448A-9F60-7931CAA68141

1. Driving pedal
2. Transmission adjustment lever

1. Select the driving direction with the power shuttle lever.

The tractor will not move until the driving pedal is pressed.

- 97 -
3. Operation

2. Set the maximum driving speed with the transmission adjustment lever.
When the transmission adjustment lever is in the rear position, the tractor will
move at minimum speed even if the driving pedal is fully pressed down.
When the transmission adjustment lever is in the forward position, the driving
pedal can be used to accelerate the tractor to the maximum speed
determined by the selected speed range. The transmission adjustment lever
cannot be used for stopping the tractor.
3. Set the driving speed and acceleration by pressing the driving pedal.
When the driving pedal is not being pressed, driving speed is always 0.
NOTE: The position of the hand throttle determines the minimum engine
speed, but has no effect on driving speed.

3.8.13.4 Semiautomatic driving mode

The semiautomatic driving mode allows you more control and feel over the
engine speed compared to using the automatic driving mode. If the tractor load is
increased, the control system does not automatically compensate for the speed
change. This way you can get more feedback on engine load by observing
engine speed. This is a practical feature during heavy pulling work such as
ploughing, for example.
When the semiautomatic driving mode is active, you can control engine speed
with the driving pedal. The transmission system automatically adjusts the
transmission ratio according to the selected engine speed and allows the driving
speed to change accordingly. The transmission system prevents the engine from
stalling by reducing the transmission ratio, if necessary.
The transmission adjustment lever controls how the engine speed affects the
transmission ratio. When the driving pedal is pressed, the transmission ratio is
determined by the position of the transmission adjustment lever and current
engine speed. The higher the engine speed is, the more the transmission ratio is
increased. Increased transmission ratio also increases the driving speed and vice
versa.
The following table describes how the transmission functions according to the
transmission adjustment lever position.
Lever position Description
Forward position The maximum transmission ratio is reached at the maximum driving speed. This
means that the maximum driving speed is reached when the engine speed is about
1600 rpm.
From forward position When the transmission adjustment lever is pulled backwards from the forward
to 70% of the forward position, the maximum transmission ratio is reached with increased engine speed.
position When the lever is in about 70% of the forward position the maximum transmission
ratio is reached at the maximum engine speed.
From the 70% of the If the transmission adjustment lever is pulled backwards from the 70% position, the
forward position to maximum transmission ratio is reduced according to the position of the lever. In
rear position. other words, a lower and lower transmission ratio and driving speed can be reached
by pressing the drive pedal.
Rear position The transmission ratio is at its minimum and the tractor will move slowly even if the
engine speed is high.

- 98 -
 3. Operation

1
2

F1

1 1
4 A 8.0 km/h
Cruise Cruise
13.0 2 1310 2
5
GUID-B1F5B2BD-CF4A-45EF-9F4F-AF0338801D6C

1. Semiautomatic driving mode symbol

2. Maximum driving speed
3. Actual driving speed
4. Maximum transmission ratio
5. Current transmission ratio

3.8.13.5 Activating the semiautomatic driving mode

Automatic driving mode is the default driving mode that is activated every time
the power is turned on. You therefore have to activate the semiautomatic driving
mode with the driving mode switch every time you wish to use it.

NOTE: If the manual driving mode is currently activated, you have to engage the
parking brake before you can change the driving mode.

GUID-C63F6785-DD67-42AC-BFEA-C81B4355FCF5

1. Driving mode switch

• Press the side of the driving mode switch opposite to the symbol.
The driving mode switch is spring returned.
When the semiautomatic driving mode is active the semiautomatic driving
mode symbol is displayed on the tractor terminal and A-pillar display.

- 99 -
3. Operation

3.8.13.6 Driving with the semiautomatic driving mode

When the semiautomatic driving mode is active, semiautomatic driving mode
symbol is displayed on the tractor terminal and A-pillar display.
1. Select the driving direction with the power shuttle lever.
The tractor will not move until the driving pedal is pressed.
2. Control the position of the transmission adjustment lever.
How the transmission system scales the transmission ratio in relation to
engine speed is determined by the position of the transmission adjustment
lever. The transmission adjustment lever cannot be used for stopping the
tractor.
3. Set the engine speed and driving speed by pressing the driving pedal.
When the driving pedal is not being pressed, both the transmission ratio and
driving speed are 0.
NOTE: The position of the hand throttle determines the minimum engine
speed, but has no effect on driving speed.

3.8.13.7 Manual driving mode

The manual driving mode is an optional driving mode that has to be activated
every time you wish to use it.
NOTE: When driving with manual driving mode, only the speed ranges A and B
are available.

When the manual driving mode is active, you control the engine speed with the
driving pedal and adjust the transmission ratio with the transmission adjustment
lever. The transmission ratio is solely determined by the position of the
transmission adjustment lever. When the lever is in the rear position, the tractor
does not move. When the lever is in the forward position, the transmission ratio is
at its maximum.
The driving pedal adjusts the engine running speed and functions like a normal
accelerator pedal. Thus, driving speed is determined by the combination of the
driving pedal and transmission adjustment lever positions.

WARNING: If the transmission adjustment lever is not in the rear

position and the driving pedal is released, the tractor does not stop.
The lever must be pushed to the rear position.

WARNING: Do not move the transmission adjustment lever without

careful consideration. Exercising great caution when using the lever is
important as abrupt movements of the lever may cause sudden
changes in tractor speed.

- 100 -
 3. Operation

1
2

F1

1 2
2 A 8.0 km/h 3
Cruise Cruise
13.0 2 1310 2
GUID-C23B050A-7ED4-4270-BD35-280982D22433

1. Manual driving mode symbol

2. Maximum transmission ratio
3. Actual driving speed

The transmission ratio is shown on the A-pillar display as a percentage (0-100%)

and on the tractor terminal display as bars. If the transmission adjustment lever is
in the rear position, the transmission ratio is 0%. If the transmission adjustment
lever is in the forward position, the transmission ratio is 100%. The actual driving
speed in relation to the position of the driving pedal is shown as numbers on both
displays.

3.8.13.8 Activating the manual driving mode

Automatic driving mode is the default driving mode that is activated every time
the power is switched on. You therefore have to activate the manual driving mode
through the tractor terminal transmission settings every time you wish to use it.
1. Engage the parking brake by moving the power shuttle lever to the parking
brake position (P).
2. Push the transmission adjustment lever to the rear position.
3. If the tractor terminal main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times
as needed.
4. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.
5. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.
NOTE: When the power shuttle lever is in parking brake position (P) you can
enter the transmission settings view by pressing the preprogramming button.

6. Move the navigation box to the manual driving mode setting position 2 with
the arrow buttons.
7. Press the right arrow button.

- 101 -
3. Operation

8. Select the desired status of the manual driving mode by pressing the up or
down arrow button.

2 1
5

1800
GUID-FCD2FFA8-160C-4564-95B6-7135C9F6BBF5

1. Manual driving mode setting

• When the box is checked the manual driving mode is activated.

• When the box is not checked the manual driving mode is deactivated.
When you remove the check mark from the check box, the previously active
driving mode will be automatically activated.
9. Press the left arrow button two times to return the transmission settings view
main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
The manual driving mode symbol appears on the A-pillar and tractor terminal
displays.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.

3.8.13.9 Driving with the manual driving mode

When the manual driving mode is active the manual driving mode symbol is
displayed on the tractor terminal and A-pillar display.
IMPORTANT: When driving with manual driving mode, changing the speed range
is allowed only with the parking brake engaged.

- 102 -
 3. Operation

2
GUID-5D7FB3EB-EC3A-448A-9F60-7931CAA68141

1. Driving pedal
2. Transmission adjustment lever

1. Select the driving direction with the power shuttle lever.

The tractor will not move until the driving pedal is pressed.
If the power shuttle lever has been in the parking brake position, you must
first push the transmission adjustment lever to the rear position. Otherwise
the tractor will not move.
2. Set the transmission ratio with the transmission adjustment lever.
3. Set the engine speed and driving speed by pressing the driving pedal.
The driving speed is determined by the combination of the driving pedal and
transmission adjustment lever positions. You can control the driving speed by
selecting an appropriate engine speed and then adjusting the transmission
ratio with the transmission adjustment lever position.
You can use the driving pedal in parallel with the hand throttle. The one
giving the larger value controls the engine speed.

3.8.14 Adjusting the transmission droop

The transmission droop setting determines how much the engine speed can drop
before the automatic system reduces the transmission ratio. In other words, the
transmission droop setting determines how sensitive the transmission system is
to changes in engine load. The transmission droop can be adjusted through the
tractor terminal menu.

- 103 -
3. Operation

5 1
2

1800
GUID-B0101343-DF77-43F0-8F03-9D9ABC7668AB

1. Transmission droop setting

The transmission droop setting is in use when the automatic driving mode is active.

1. If the tractor terminal main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times
as needed.
2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.
3. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.
NOTE: When the power shuttle lever is in parking brake position (P) you can
enter the transmission settings view by pressing the preprogramming button.

4. Move the navigation box to the transmission droop setting position with
the arrow buttons.
5. Press the right arrow button.
6. Set the desired value for the setting using the up and down arrow buttons.
The value can be between 1 and 10.
1 = The engine speed drops the least before the transmission ratio is
reduced. This setting value improves the sensitivity and transmitted force of
the tractor.
10 = The engine speed drops the most before the transmission ratio is
reduced. This setting value improves the economy of the tractor.
7. Press the left arrow button two times to return the transmission settings view
main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.

- 104 -
 3. Operation

3.8.15 Adjusting the speed balance

With the speed balance function the maximum forward driving speed can be
reduced while the maximum reverse driving speed is kept the same and vice
versa.

1
2

F1 R1 4
( ( ( (

A 8.0 km/h A 8.0 km/h

Cruise Cruise Cruise Cruise
13.0 2 1310 2 13.0 2 1310 2
GUID-EF8FCD5C-0770-4678-BD16-AB12B16B8FA4

1. Speed balance control knob

2. Speed balance symbol
3. Speed balance indication for relatively lower forward driving speed
4. Speed balance indication for relatively lower reverse driving speed

The speed balance symbol only appears on the A-pillar display if the control knob
is not in the middle position.
You can adjust the speed balance by using the speed balance control knob. The
more you turn the control knob, the more the maximum driving speed is reduced.
The relationship between forward and reverse driving speed is indicated on the
tractor terminal display.
Only the symbol of the direction with relatively lower maximum speed is shown
on the tractor terminal display.

- 105 -
3. Operation

• To reduce the driving speed in relation to the opposite driving speed, turn the
speed balance control knob.
• To reduce the forward driving speed, turn the control knob anti-clockwise.
The balance number of the forward driving increases accordingly on the
tractor terminal display (F1, F2, ..., FMAX). With value F1 the maximum
forward driving speed is 10% smaller than the maximum reverse driving
speed. With value FMAX the maximum forward driving speed is 90%
smaller than the maximum reverse driving speed.
• To reduce the reverse driving speed, turn the control knob clockwise.
The balance number of the reverse driving increases accordingly on the
tractor terminal display (R1, R2, ..., RMAX). With value R1 the maximum
reverse driving speed is 10% smaller than the maximum forward driving
speed. With value RMAX the maximum reverse driving speed is 90%
smaller than the maximum forward driving speed.
• To keep the maximum driving speed of both directions the same, turn the
control knob to the middle position.

3.8.16 Using the ECO/Power function

With the ECO/Power function you can choose whether the transmission system
is optimized for fuel economy or power.
• ECO mode reduces fuel consumption, but makes the transmission system
less responsive.
• Power mode makes the transmission system more responsive, but reduces
fuel economy.

GUID-007C2A41-F482-4075-81C4-2A781BA042A2

1. ECO/Power switch

• To activate the ECO mode, press the symbol side of the ECO/Power switch.
• To activate the Power mode, press the side of the ECO/Power switch
opposite to the symbol.

3.8.17 Engine brake setting

In the automatic driving mode you can select one of three engine brake settings.
The default engine brake setting that is activated at tractor start-up is selected
using the tractor terminal menu. The default engine brake setting can always be
overridden by selecting another setting.

- 106 -
 3. Operation

NOTE: If the maximum engine speed has been set from the tractor terminal
menu, engine brake force may be reduced.

F1
1

A Cruise
0.0 km/h
cruise
13.0 2 1310 2
GUID-9534F61B-7D2E-4AF9-86C5-B4B91C58A674

1 The symbol is lit when the engine brake setting is on maximum engine braking mode.
When maximum engine braking mode is enabled, maximum engine braking is applied
when the driving pedal is released. The transmission ratio is automatically adjusted so
that the engine does not exceed the maximum engine speed.
The symbol is lit when the engine brake setting is on rolling mode.
When the rolling mode is enabled, the engine does not brake when the driving pedal is
released. This is a practical function in slippery conditions, for example.
The field is empty when the engine brake setting is on normal engine braking mode.

3.8.17.1 Selecting the engine brake setting

NOTE: If the maximum engine speed has been set from the tractor terminal
menu, engine brake force may be reduced.

F1

A Cruise
0.0 km/h
cruise
13.0 2 1310 2
GUID-735A3E63-B645-4136-A36B-C674D8E12BDC

1. Engine brake setting switch

2. Engine brake setting symbol

- 107 -
3. Operation

• Press either side of the engine brake setting switch until the symbol of the
wanted engine brake setting is shown on the tractor terminal display.
The engine brake setting switch is spring returned.
Engine brake setting symbols:

Maximum engine braking mode.

Rolling mode.

Normal engine braking mode (empty field).

3.8.17.2 Selecting the default engine brake setting

You select which one of the three engine brake settings is enabled by default
when the power is switched on.

2
5

(
( 2 1
1800
GUID-BCED7D7B-E582-424A-8160-7DBD25DEEBD4

1. Default engine brake setting

1. If the tractor terminal main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times
as needed.
2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.
3. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.
NOTE: When the power shuttle lever is in parking brake position (P) you can
enter the transmission settings view by pressing the preprogramming button.

4. Move the navigation box to the engine brake setting position with the
arrow buttons.
5. Press the right arrow button.
6. Select one of the three engine brake functions using the up and down arrow
buttons.
• 1 = Rolling mode
• 2 = Normal engine braking mode
• 3 = Maximum engine braking mode
7. Press the left arrow button two times to return the transmission settings view
main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
The symbol corresponding to the selected engine brake setting is displayed
on the tractor terminal display.

- 108 -
 3. Operation

A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.

3.8.18 Parking the tractor

1. Stop the tractor.
2. Apply the parking brake.
3. Lower the implements.
In cold conditions, lower the links without implements as well.
4. Reduce the engine speed to idling.
IMPORTANT: Before stopping the engine, allow the engine temperature to
stabilise for about one minute.

5. Shut down the engine by turning the ignition key to the STOP position.
6. Fill up the fuel tank.
In order to minimise water condensation, fill up the tank when finishing work
for the day.

3.8.19 Cruise control

With the cruise control function the operator can choose either a constant driving
speed or a constant engine speed.
When cruise control is on, the indicator light is lit on the instrument panel and the
tractor terminal display shows the status of cruise control.
There are two memory slots for both engine speed and driving speed settings.
When either automatic or semiautomatic driving mode is activated both driving
speed cruise control and engine speed cruise control can be activated at the
same time. When manual driving mode is activated either the engine speed
cruise control or driving speed cruise control can be activated, but not both at the
same time.
In addition, there is the power take-off (PTO) cruise control function. The PTO
cruise control function saves the engine speed corresponding to the current
nominal PTO speed when the PTO speed is selected. The function uses the
previously used engine speed cruise control memory slot.

- 109 -
3. Operation

3.8.19.1 Cruise control switches

1 2

4
3 5

6
GUID-DDA668D7-8517-40A5-950C-C21541EC5950

1. Engine speed cruise control off button

2. Engine speed cruise control setting switch
3. Engine speed cruise control increasing/decreasing switch
4. Driving speed cruise control increasing/decreasing buttons
5. Driving speed cruise control setting buttons
6. Driving speed cruise control off button

Engine speed cruise control off button

With the engine speed cruise control off button you can disengage the engine
speed cruise control.
Driving speed cruise control off button
With the driving speed cruise control off button you can disengage the driving
speed cruise control.
Driving speed cruise control setting buttons
With driving speed cruise control setting buttons you can set or activate the
constant driving speed.
When the cruise control is on, the indicator light is lit on the instrument panel.
Cruise information can be displayed on the tractor terminal display and on the
Proline instrument panel display.
Driving speed cruise control increasing/decreasing buttons
With driving speed cruise control increasing/decreasing buttons, the constant
driving speed can be increased or decreased.
Engine speed cruise control setting switch
The engine speed cruise control setting switch has three positions. The switch is
spring returned.

- 110 -
 3. Operation

With the engine speed cruise control setting switch you can set or activate the
constant engine speed.
When the cruise control is on, the indicator light is lit on the instrument panel.
Engine speed cruise control increasing/decreasing switch
The engine speed cruise control increasing/decreasing switch has three
positions. The switch is spring returned.
With engine speed cruise control increasing/decreasing switch, the constant
engine speed can be increased or decreased.

3.8.19.2 Programming the driving speed cruise control

2
GUID-04335B4A-E7C5-405D-91FD-C4598805C71A

1. Driving speed cruise control setting button 1

2. Driving speed cruise control setting button 2

1. Set the driving speed.

Use the driving pedal to set the wanted speed value.
2. Press the button of the wanted memory slot for more than two seconds.
• To use the memory slot 1, press the driving speed cruise control setting
button 1.
• To use the memory slot 2, press the driving speed cruise control setting
button 2.
3. Release the button.
The setting is activated and is stored in the memory.

3.8.19.3 Activating and deactivating the driving speed cruise control

2
3
GUID-8B375BDD-3D69-46B2-AE56-333F8A24CF9A

1. Driving speed cruise control setting button 1

2. Driving speed cruise control setting button 2
3. Driving speed cruise control off button

- 111 -
3. Operation

• Activate the driving speed cruise control.

• To use the setting stored to memory slot 1, press the driving speed
cruise control setting button 1 shortly (under 2 seconds).
• To use the setting stored to memory slot 2, press the driving speed
cruise control setting button 2 shortly (under 2 seconds).
NOTE: To activate the driving speed cruise control driving speed must be
over 0.03 km/h.
The last setting stored to the requested memory slot comes into effect. The
tractor maintains the selected constant driving speed if possible.
• To deactivate the driving speed cruise control, press/move one of the following:
• Cruise control driving speed off button.
• Clutch pedal
• Brake pedal
• RangeShift switch; when releasing the switch you can return to the used
value.
• Shuttle lever (if the driving speed cruise control setting value is higher
than 5 km/h).

3.8.19.4 Decreasing the driving speed cruise control setting

GUID-D49BC67B-E269-4949-AD67-706F6B5397C3

1. Driving speed cruise control decreasing button

1. Press the driving speed cruise control decreasing button to lower the driving
speed.
The driving speed cruise control setting decreases according to the following
table.

Driving speed Short press (under 2 seconds) Continuous press (over 2

seconds)
0.03…0.05 km/h 0.01 km/h 0.01 km/h
0.05…0.3 km/h 0.05 km/h 0.05 km/h
0.3…10.0 km/h 0,1 km/h
10...15 km/h 0.2 km/h 0.1 km/h
Over 15 km/h 1 km/h

2. Release the button.

The new setting is activated and is stored in the memory.

- 112 -
 3. Operation

3.8.19.5 Increasing the driving speed cruise control setting

GUID-F0661A86-79B8-48F9-8B6A-4911FE7D081F

1. Driving speed cruise control increasing button

1. Press the driving speed cruise control increasing button to increase the
driving speed.
The cruise control setting increases according to the following table.

Driving speed Short press (under 2 seconds) Continuous press (over 2

seconds)
0.03…0.05 km/h 0.01 km/h 0.01 km/h
0.05…0.3 km/h 0.05 km/h 0.05 km/h
0.3…10.0 km/h 0,1 km/h
10...15 km/h 0.2 km/h 0.1 km/h
Over 15 km/h 1 km/h

2. Release the button.

The new setting is activated and is stored in the memory.

3.8.19.6 Programming the engine speed cruise control

1 2

3
GUID-B472D1AA-3BFE-4D7C-B6AE-51371D9E3202

1. Engine speed cruise control off button

2. Engine speed cruise control setting switch
3. Hand throttle

1. Set the engine speed.

Use the driving pedal or the hand throttle to set the wanted engine speed value.

- 113 -
3. Operation

2. Select the memory slot to be used.

• To use memory slot 1, press down the symbol side of the engine speed
cruise control setting switch for more than two seconds.
• To use memory slot 2, press down the side opposite to the symbol of the
engine speed cruise control setting switch for more than two seconds.
3. Release the switch.
The setting is activated and is stored in the memory.

3.8.19.7 Activating and deactivating the engine speed cruise control

NOTE: Control the position of the hand throttle knob before disengaging the
cruise control.

1 2

3
GUID-B472D1AA-3BFE-4D7C-B6AE-51371D9E3202

1. Engine speed cruise control off button

2. Engine speed cruise control setting switch
3. Hand throttle

• Activate the engine speed cruise control.

• To use the setting stored to memory slot 1, press the engine speed
cruise control setting switch symbol side shortly (under 2 seconds).
• To use the setting stored to memory slot 2, press the engine speed
cruise control setting switch side opposite to the symbol shortly (under 2
seconds).
• To deactivate the engine speed cruise control, press engine speed cruise
control off button.
When the engine speed cruise control function has been turned off, the
engine speed returns to the speed set by the hand throttle if it is greater than
the one set with the driving pedal.

- 114 -
 3. Operation

3.8.19.8 Decreasing the engine speed cruise control setting

GUID-ED517022-104A-40D5-A0FD-B7FF728B3FBD

1. Engine speed cruise control increasing/decreasing switch

1. Press the side opposite to the symbol on the engine speed cruise control
increasing/decreasing switch to lower the engine speed.
The cruise control setting decreases according to the following table.

Short press (under 2 seconds) Continuous press (over 2

seconds)
Engine speed cruise control 50 rpm 10 rpm

2. Release the switch.

The new setting is activated and is stored in the memory.

3.8.19.9 Increasing the engine speed cruise control setting

GUID-ED517022-104A-40D5-A0FD-B7FF728B3FBD

1. Engine speed cruise control increasing/decreasing switch

1. Press the symbol side of the engine speed cruise control increasing/
decreasing switch to increase the engine speed.
The cruise control setting increases according to the following table.

Short press (under 2 seconds) Continuous press (over 2

seconds)
Engine speed cruise control 50 rpm 10 rpm

2. Release the switch.

The new setting is activated and is stored in the memory.

- 115 -
3. Operation

3.8.20 Using the traction force control setting

You can use the traction force control setting knob to adjust the traction force of
the tractor at very low speeds.
The traction force control setting is only available in the automatic and
semiautomatic driving modes.
The traction force control setting affects how the transmission system is
controlled at low speeds and when the tractor is stationary. You can use the
setting to allow the transmission to be more sensitive to load in case you wish to
control the traction force with the driving pedal (front loader work).
Even if the setting is in use, the traction force always increases with engine
speed. As the driving speed increases, the traction force is eventually maximized.

F1 2

A Cruise
0.0 km/h
cruise
13.0 2 1310 2

GUID-2744AF3F-DA25-4736-846D-4C5847EF8D1C

1. Traction force control setting knob

2. Traction force control symbol

1. To decrease the traction force and allow traction to be controlled more

accurately, turn the traction force control setting knob clockwise.
The more you turn the knob clockwise, the smaller the traction force and the
higher the sensitivity to tractor load.
The traction force control symbol is shown on the tractor terminal display.
Note that the symbol may also be displayed if the driving speed is above 5 km/
h and brakes are applied heavily. In this case, the symbol indicates that drive
is being disengaged to enhance the braking power.
IMPORTANT: In case of overload the traction force control symbol starts
blinking and drive is disengaged. Reset the function by moving the power
shuttle lever to the N position.

- 116 -
 3. Operation

2. To increase the traction force and allow more accurate speed control, turn
the traction force control setting knob anti-clockwise.
The more you turn the knob anti-clockwise, the greater the traction force.
If you turn the knob anti-clockwise to the extreme position, the traction force
symbol disappears from the tractor terminal display.

3.8.21 Limiting the engine speed

With the engine speed limiting function, you can limit the maximum engine speed.
The function limits the maximum engine speed in all conditions, also when using
the cruise control.
NOTE: If the maximum engine speed has been set from the tractor terminal
menu, engine brake force may be reduced.

The engine speed limiting function is useful when using the power take-off (PTO)
working equipment. The adjustment is done through the tractor terminal.
1. If the tractor terminal main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times
as needed.
2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.
3. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.
NOTE: When the power shuttle lever is in parking brake position (P) you can
enter the transmission settings view by pressing the preprogramming button.

4. Move the navigation box to the maximum engine speed position with the
arrow buttons.
5. Press the right arrow button.
6. Select the desired status of the maximum engine speed limitation by pressing
the up or down arrow button.

2
5

1800 1
GUID-A2791789-7A25-42CE-A326-644F640C9FD1

1. Setting for the maximum engine speed

• When the box is checked the maximum engine speed limitation is engaged.
• When the box is not checked the maximum engine speed limitation is
disengaged.
7. Press the right arrow button.
8. Select the maximum engine speed by pressing the up or down arrow button.
The maximum engine speed can be selected between 1 000-2 250 rpm with
50 rpm intervals.

- 117 -
3. Operation

9. Press the left arrow button two times to return to the transmission settings
view main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.
When the maximum engine speed is achieved, the limit symbol for the maximum
engine speed starts blinking under the tractor figure on the tractor terminal display.

3.8.22 Limiting the maximum driving speed

With the maximum driving speed function, you can limit the maximum driving
speed of the tractor. The function limits the driving speed in all conditions, also
when using the Cruise control.
The adjustment of the maximum driving speed is done on the tractor terminal.
1. If the tractor terminal main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times
as needed.
2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.
3. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.

4. Move the navigation box to the maximum driving speed position with
the arrow buttons.
5. Press the right arrow button.
6. Select the desired status of the driving speed limitation by pressing the up or
down arrow button.

C D
AUTO

F R
10

40 1
GUID-1EB68B5C-C1FF-4F07-8C6E-2160D1BFC960

1. Setting for the maximum driving speed

• When the box is checked the maximum driving speed limitation is engaged.
• When the box is not checked the maximum driving speed limitation is
disengaged.
7. Press the right arrow button.
8. Select the maximum driving speed in km/h by pressing the up or down arrow
button.
The maximum driving speed can be selected between 5–40 km/h (on 50 km/
h models 5–50 km/h) with 1 km/h intervals.

- 118 -
 3. Operation

9. Press the left arrow button two times to return to the transmission settings
view main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.
When the maximum driving speed is achieved, the limit symbol for the maximum
driving speed starts flashing under the tractor figure on the tractor terminal display.

3.8.23 Using the hydraulic front suspension

The hydraulic front suspension is alternative equipment.

GUID-94A0ADDF-3B61-46C5-8A4D-D76E6B2835D6

1. Switch for hydraulic front suspension

The switch has three positions:

• Calibrating position
• Centre position
• Locked position
• To activate the suspension, push the switch to the centre position.
The indicator light on the switch comes on.
When the switch is in the centre position the automatics keeps the tractor
front level in the middle of the suspension area, regardless of the loading and
gives a smooth ride.
When the driving speed is below 3 km/h the automatic disengages and the
suspension operates with the pressure remaining in the system. When the
speed increases over 3 km/h the automatic engages again. With this it is
possible to prevent undesired change of height, for example when coupling
implements and other front linkage operations where precise movements are
needed.
• To lock the suspension, press down the switch side opposite to the symbol.
The tractor front is in the lower position and locked.
• If the indicator light on the switch begins to flash, contact a Valtra authorised
workshop.

- 119 -
3. Operation

3.8.24 Calibrating the hydraulic front suspension

Calibrating has to be carried out if the position sensor has been changed or the
front axle is not in the middle of the suspension area.

GUID-94A0ADDF-3B61-46C5-8A4D-D76E6B2835D6

1. Switch for hydraulic front suspension (alternative equipment)

1. Keep the tractor stationary with the engine running when calibrating.
2. Check that there is no load on the front linkage or front loader.
3. Check that the four-wheel drive (4WD) and parking brake are not engaged.
4. Keep the symbol side of the switch pressed down for approximately 10
seconds and do not release it until the indicator light of the switch begins to
flash and the calibrating starts.
When the calibrating is done, the light goes off.
5. If the flashing does not stop in two minutes, start the calibrating again.

3.8.25 Differential lock

The differential lock is used to ensure an even grip for the wheels. The differential
lock can be engaged while driving.
The differential lock has three positions: ON, AUTO and OFF.
Position Description
ON The differential lock is always engaged except when:

• One or both brake pedals are pressed (the lock re-engages when one or both pedals are
released).
• When engaging the parking brake.
AUTO The differential lock engages when the following conditions are fulfilled:

• The speed difference between the right and left rear wheel is sufficient.
• The driving speed is over 0.3 km/h and under 15 km/h.
• The wheels are in the middle position.

The differential lock disengages:

• When the wheel slip is less than 6%. The disengaging delay is 5 seconds.
• When the driving speed rises to over 15 km/h.
• When the wheels are turned more than 20% from the middle position.
• When pressing the clutch pedal or RangeShift push button.
• When pressing one of the brake pedals or both.
• When pressing the lift/stop/lower switch to the lift position.
OFF The differential lock is continuously disengaged.

- 120 -
 3. Operation

When the differential lock is engaged, the indicator light is lit on the
instrument panel.
If the indicator light on the instrument panel flashes in the automatic position,
there is an error, and the differential lock disengages for safety reasons. The
reason for the error may be one of the following:
• The speed sensors are not calibrated.
• The turning angle sensor is not calibrated (contact an authorised Valtra
workshop).
• There is a fault in the switch (the service code is displayed).
• There is a fault in the speed sensors (the service code is displayed).

3.8.26 Engaging and disengaging the differential lock

You can control the engagement of the differential lock with the differential lock
switch. The switch has three positions (ON, AUTO, OFF).
If a wheel starts to slip, engage the differential lock. If a wheel is slipping heavily,
reduce the engine speed before engaging the lock. If possible, disengage the
lock while driving on public roads.

NOTE: For optimum performance, engage the differential lock before a wheel slips.

GUID-1A5BAC2F-666F-4A89-BA74-5E586E95AA51

1. Differential lock switch

• To engage the differential lock, press down the symbol side of the differential
lock switch (ON).
• To use the automatic function of the differential lock, turn the differential lock
switch to the middle position (AUTO).
• To disengage the differential lock, press down the side of the differential lock
switch opposite to the symbol (OFF).

- 121 -
3. Operation

3.8.27 Four-wheel drive

The four-wheel drive (4WD) has three positions: ON, AUTO or OFF. The 4WD
can be engaged while driving.
Position Description
ON The 4WD is always engaged.
AUTO The 4WD engages:

• When the speed difference between the front and rear axle is sufficient. The driving speed
has to be over 0.3 km/h.
• When starting to drive (also when in standstill and pressing the drive pedal) or using the
power shuttle. Driving start automatics must be activated. The automatics disengage the
4WD after a defined delay after starting to drive or using the power shuttle. You can define
the disengagement delay in the driving start automatics user settings.

The 4WD disengages:

• When the wheel slip is less than 6%. The disengagement delay is 3 seconds.
• When pressing clutch pedal or RangeShift push button.
OFF 4WD is disengaged except:

• When pressing both brake pedals.

• When engaging the parking brake.
• When starting to drive or using the power shuttle. Driving start automatics must be activated
(activated as default). The automatics disengage the 4WD after a defined delay after starting
to drive or using the power shuttle. You can define the disengagement delay in the driving
start automatics user settings.
• When using the RangeShift push button if the driving speed is under 10 km/h. Driving start
automatics must be activated (activated as default). The automatics disengage the 4WD
after a defined delay after using the RangeShift push button. You can define the
disengagement delay in the driving start automatics user settings.

When the 4WD is engaged, the indicator light on the instrument panel is lit.

If the indicator light on the instrument panel flashes in the automatic position,
there is an error and the 4WD engages. The reason for the error may be one of
the following:
• The speed sensors are not calibrated.
• A switch fault has occurred (the service code is displayed).

- 122 -
 3. Operation

3.8.28 Engaging and disengaging the four-wheel drive

You can control the engagement of the four-wheel drive (4WD) with the 4WD
switch. The switch has three positions (ON, AUTO, OFF).
Keep the 4WD disengaged while driving on the road if it is not required. Using the
4WD is not allowed at driving speeds of over 15 km/h if road conditions are good.

GUID-55F01DF5-426F-4EA4-B1EB-F9F0E90FA0D1

1. 4WD switch

• To engage the 4WD, press down the symbol side of the 4WD switch (ON).
• To use the automatic function of the 4WD, turn the 4WD switch to the middle
position (AUTO).
• To disengage the 4WD, press down the side of the 4WD switch opposite to
the symbol (OFF).

3.8.29 Driving start automatics

Driving start automatics can be used to prevent the rear wheels from slipping
when starting to drive, when using the power shuttle and when the speed range
is changed.
NOTE: Driving start automatics operates only when the driving speed is under 10
km/h.

When the driving start automatics has been activated from the tractor terminal the
automatics engages four-wheel drive for a set time when starting to drive or when
the driving direction is changed. If the driving speed exeeds 10 km/h and wheel
slip is more than 6% when starting to drive, the driving start automatics
disengages the four-wheel drive when the slip falls below 6%.
When the speed range is changed the driving start automatics engages the four-
wheel drive if the wheel slip is more than 6%. The four-wheel drive disengages
when the wheel slip is less than 6%.
If the clutch pedal or RangeShift push button has been pressed while driving the
driving start automatics engages when releasing the clutch pedal or RangeShift
push button.

- 123 -
3. Operation

3.8.30 Setting the driving start automatics

You can set the driving start automatics through the tractor terminal transmission
settings.
1. If the tractor terminal main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times
as needed.
2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.
3. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.
NOTE: When the power shuttle lever is in parking brake position (P) you can
enter the transmission settings view by pressing the preprogramming button.

4. Move the navigation box to the four-wheel drive (4WD) automatics position
F R with the arrow buttons.

5. Press the right arrow button.

6. Select the desired status of the 4WD for driving start automatics by pressing
the up or down arrow button.

Cruise

C D
AUTO

F R
10 1
GUID-3EC5F897-F603-4A1A-BF26-9C6E4F4E7750

1. Setting for the 4WD for driving start automatics

• When the box is checked the 4WD for driving start automatics is engaged.
• When the box is not checked the 4WD for driving start automatics is
disengaged.
7. Press the right arrow.
8. Change the 4WD engagement time value with the up or down arrow button.
The value can be chosen between 0 and 20 seconds.
When the value is set to 0 seconds the 4WD for driving start automatics is
disengaged.
9. Press the left arrow button two times to return to the transmission settings
view main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.

- 124 -
 3. Operation

3.8.31 Reverse drive system

You can use the rear and front controls in the reverse drive system.
WARNING: Using the rear controls: Before turning the seat to the
backward position, move the front power shuttle lever to the parking
brake position (position P). After this, you can turn the seat and
activate the rear controls using the rear power shuttle lever by moving
the parking brake on and off.

WARNING: Using the front controls: Before turning the seat to the
forward position, move the rear power shuttle lever to the parking
brake position (position P). After this, you can turn the seat and
activate the front controls using the front power shuttle lever by moving
the parking brake on and off.

WARNING: Do not drive on the road with the reverse drive controls.

WARNING: Keep the driving speed below 10 km/h when using the
reverse drive controls.

DANGER: If the front power shuttle lever is not in the P position, the
parking brake cannot be engaged with the rear power shuttle lever.

NOTE: When moving the rear power shuttle lever to the N position the drive does
not disengage, but the tractor stops (tractor goes to standstill).

The reverse drive control does not operate when driving forward, because the
tractor has a reverse drive preventing valve. If the lockout does not work, check
the fuse. If the fuse is broken, contact an authorised Valtra workshop.
The brake pedal for reverse drive control also controls the trailer brakes (extra
equipment).

3.8.32 Permitted driving inclinations for driving the tractor on a slope

To ensure sufficient lubrication for the transmission and engine, it is essential to
follow the maximum driving angles when driving the tractor on a slope.
WARNING: Angles for safe driving should be smaller than stated to
avoid the tractor from tipping over.

Up and down slope with either front of rear end up 30°

Sideways with slope to right or left 35°
Combined slope angles; left or right /up or down slope 25°/20°
Up slope, with front end up 30°
Down slope to right or left 35°

- 125 -
3. Operation

Combined slope angles; right /up slope 30°/25°

Combined slope angles; right /down slope 30°/20°
Combined slope angles; left /up slope 30°/20°
Combined slope angles; left /down slope 25°/20°

3.9 Proline instrument panel display

The Proline instrument panel display shows information about different tractor
functions.

GUID-55505B1C-DA65-4A70-9635-9D97C12CE044

The display has three rows with either fixed or selectable views:
• The bottom row view is fixed.
• The operator can select the top and middle row views.

3.9.1 Fixed views

Fixed views show the operating hours and the time.
Fixed views have two functions displayed on the bottom row, the operating hours
and the clock .

1 2
GUID-7B5434D5-0FA3-4C91-9872-50CB49B6C364

1. Operating hours
2. Clock

Operating hours
Operating hours are displayed with an accuracy of one decimal place when the
power is on.
Clock
The clock is displayed on the bottom row, either in 12-hour or 24-hour mode.
You can change the time if it is not correct.

- 126 -
 3. Operation

3.9.2 Selecting a view

You can change the display view. The middle row has the same functions as the
top row. You can select different functions to be displayed on the top and middle
rows at the same time.

1
2

GUID-282EB42A-C95A-41B7-A765-BBF5A9F4D27B

1. Top row
2. Middle row
3. Proline instrument panel display change-over switch
1. Select the row for which you want to change the view.
To jump between the rows, press the side of the display change-over switch
opposite to the symbol.
2. Change the view by pressing the symbol side of the display change-over switch.

3.9.3 Top and middle row views

The Proline instrument panel display functions are seen on the top or the middle
row.
The top row and the middle row have the same functions. Different functions can
be displayed at the same time on both rows.
When the power is turned on, the view that was selected last is shown on the
display.
The following functions can be displayed on the top and middle rows of the display:
Symbol Function
Working time (h:mm)

cruise cruise Cruise control

RPM KMH

km/h/mph Driving speed (km/h/mph)

Wheel slip (%, 0-100)

Rear power take-off (PTO) speed (rpm)

Front power take-off (PTO) speed (rpm)

Engine speed (rpm)

Table continued on next page

- 127 -
3. Operation

Symbol Function
Immediate fuel consumption (ha, acre)

Average fuel consumption (ha, acre)

Immediate fuel consumption

Average fuel consumption

Fuel consumption

Lower link position (%, 0-100)

Lifting link position of front linkage (%, 0-100)

Gearbox temperature (C/F)

Travel distance (m/km/miles)

Square area (ha)

Periodical maintenance

3.9.3.1 Working time view

The working time view shows how much time the tractor has spent on a special
task.
The working time is shown on the top or middle row of the display.

GUID-9BF33969-7879-4BB2-93D4-CCA6AD7C4E80

1. Working time

Working time can, for example, show the time spent on ploughing a certain area.
The working time is stored in the memory when the power is turned off.
You can reset the working time counter.

3.9.3.2 Cruise control view

The cruise control controls the rate of motion of the tractor.
cruise cruise
The cruise control RPM KMH is shown on the top or middle row of the display.

- 128 -
 3. Operation

1
2

GUID-E4E14AF0-5F8F-47F5-B69A-7C673B149CA0

1. RPM = constant engine speed

2. KMH = constant driving speed (engaged)

The numerical value in front of the symbol stands for the value of the
programmed constant engine speed or driving speed.
When the constant engine speed or driving speed is engaged, the corresponding
text shows in white on a dark background, and the cruise indicator light is lit
on the instrument panel.

3.9.3.3 Driving speed view

The driving speed is displayed in km/h or miles/h.
The driving speed is shown on the top or middle row of the display.

GUID-B7C1AF1F-3046-4DE6-B897-30B2A6E6B002

1. Driving speed

The driving speed is displayed as follows:

• The letter L shows that the driving speed is under 3 km/h (2 mph).
• Driving speeds of 0–10 km/h (0-10 mph) are shown with an accuracy of one
decimal place.
• Driving speeds of 10–15 km/h (10-15 mph) are shown with an accuracy of
one decimal place in steps of 0.2 units.
• Driving speeds of over 15 km/h (15 mph) are shown without decimals.
You can change the driving speed unit by changing the unit of length.

3.9.3.4 Wheel slip view

The wheel slip of the tractor is shown as a percentage.
The wheel slip is shown on the top or middle row of the display.

- 129 -
3. Operation

GUID-B4E896EB-E695-46C0-825D-EF6061BA353E

1. Wheel slip

The wheel slip display shows the wheel slip percentage.

The wheel slip percentage is attained by comparing the speed information of the
radar to the rotation speed of the wheels.
The radar starts to operate at a driving speed of 0.3 km/h (0.2 mph). For driving
speeds below 0.3 km/h (0.2 mph), zero is displayed.

3.9.3.5 Rear power take-off speed view

The rear power take-off (PTO) speed is shown in revolutions per minute (rpm).

The rear PTO speed is shown on the top or middle row of the display.

GUID-F32C777A-A48D-48B2-BBD4-858DE35A95F6

1. Rear power take-off speed

The PTO rotation speed is shown beside the symbol with an accuracy of 10 rpm.

3.9.3.6 Front power take-off speed view

The front power take-off (PTO) speed is shown in revolutions per minute (rpm).

The front PTO speed is shown on the top or middle row of the display.

F
1

GUID-E1036BD6-BD06-43A1-81C1-BD4E4F418106

1. Front power take-off speed

The PTO rotation speed is shown beside the symbol with an accuracy of 10 rpm.

3.9.3.7 Engine speed view

The engine speed is displayed in revolutions per minute (rpm).
The engine speed is shown on the top or middle row of the display.

- 130 -
 3. Operation

GUID-511B2E41-FE90-48DA-93FB-FA4FEB77A712

1. Engine speed

The view shows the engine speed with an accuracy of 10 rpm.

3.9.3.8 Fuel consumption views

The display shows different kinds of fuel consumption: immediate and average
fuel consumption on the area worked, immediate and average fuel consumption
in an hour and total fuel consumption.
The fuel consumption is shown on the top or middle row of the display.
You can change the unit of area (ha, acre) by changing the unit of length.
You can select litre, gallon UK or gallon US as the unit of volume.
Immediate fuel consumption on the area worked

GUID-4C587ACB-4D06-47F4-A10F-271E303A9254

1. Immediate fuel consumption on the area worked

Average fuel consumption on the area worked

GUID-48E86CB1-9B96-4BAE-8911-4C1EC4213843

1. Average fuel consumption on the area worked

You can reset the fuel consumption information.

Immediate fuel consumption in an hour

GUID-70439AD2-56FC-44FB-BE46-30BC0964CA86

1. Immediate fuel consumption in an hour

- 131 -
3. Operation

Average fuel consumption in an hour

GUID-9D3CEFAE-6535-4099-897B-9C7B6BCF15E1

1. Average fuel consumption in an hour

You can reset the fuel consumption information.

Total fuel consumption

GUID-76A27D52-203F-441A-84F5-A13E181255EE

1. Total fuel consumption

You can reset the fuel consumption information.

3.9.3.9 Rear lower links' position view

The view shows the position of the rear lower links.
The position of the rear lower links is shown on the top or middle row of the
display.

GUID-7A8E1C12-57FC-4E23-8630-E3F2E5A54115

1. Position of the rear lower links

The display shows the symbol and the position of the rear lower links on a
percentage scale 0-100:
• 0 = The lower links are in the lowest position.
• 50 = The lower links are in the middle position.
• 100 = The lower links are in the top position.

NOTE: The percentage value may not achieve the limit values (0 or 100) even if
the linkage is functioning correctly.

- 132 -
 3. Operation

3.9.3.10 Front lower links' position view

The view shows the position of the front linkage (extra equipment) lower links on
a percentage scale.
Even if the display is activated, the percentage is not changing as the function is
not available.
The lower link position of the front linkage is shown on the top or middle
row of the display.

GUID-395E0FBB-ECB4-4C78-83B3-59B4375385BC

1. Lower links' position of the front linkage

3.9.3.11 Gearbox temperature view

The gearbox temperature is shown on the top or middle row of the display.

GUID-15ED75B0-390B-447E-9DB7-B66BD066538C

1. Gearbox temperature

The gearbox temperature is displayed as follows:

• When the temperature is below +40°C (+104°F), the text "lo" is displayed.
• When the temperature is above +40°C (+104°F), the actual temperature is
displayed.
• When the temperature is above +119°C (+246°F), the text "high" is displayed.

NOTE: If the gearbox temperature is continuously above +90°C (+194°F), clean

the radiator and check the oil level.

3.9.3.12 Travel distance view

The view shows the travel distance in metres, kilometres, yards or miles. You can
also reset the distance reading.
The travel distance is shown on the top or middle row of the display.

- 133 -
3. Operation

GUID-BD044C69-C74E-4C35-823C-949161AD20D7

1. Travel distance

The travel distance is displayed as follows:

• For distances <1 km (mile), the m (yard) symbol is displayed and the
distance is displayed with an accuracy of ±1 m (yard).
• For distances >1 km (mile), but ≤100 km (miles), the display symbol changes
to km (miles) and the distance is displayed with an accuracy of ±2 decimals.
• Distances >100 km (miles) are displayed with an accuracy of ±1 decimal.
• The maximum distance displayed is 999.9 km (miles).
You can change the unit of distance (km, miles) by changing the unit of length.

3.9.3.13 Surface area view

The view shows the surface area in hectares or acres.
The surface area is shown on the top or middle row of the display.

GUID-5A57FACA-86D7-4487-9A9C-1E736C212D2F

1. Surface area

The surface area view shows the amount of area worked. The area reading
increases only when the implement is used to work the soil (the linkage is not in
the transport position).
The worked area is stored in the memory when the power is turned off.
To change the unit of area (ha, acre), you must change the unit of length.
You can also reset the area reading.

3.9.4 Periodical maintenance view

GUID-968ACB50-FF2F-40B0-A756-D4D914337E1D

1. Periodical maintenance view

- 134 -
 3. Operation

When the tool symbol and periodical maintenance hour number are lit on the
display, the appropriate service work has to be carried out by an authorised
Valtra workshop.
If this work is not carried out, the tool symbol and periodical maintenance hour
number are displayed for 10 seconds whenever the power is turned on.

3.9.5 Resetting views

You can reset the travel distance, fuel consumption, working time and worked
area views. All the readings are reset at the same time.

GUID-3C6D2464-49AA-45F1-B8E7-BFE48EDF8C30

1. Travel distance
2. Proline instrument panel display change-over switch
3. Proline instrument panel display setting switch

1. Select the travel distance, fuel consumption, working time or worked area to
the Proline instrument panel display.
Press the symbol side of the display change-over switch.
2. Press and hold down the side of the display setting switch opposite to the
symbol until the display is reset.

- 135 -
3. Operation

3.9.6 Enlarging the middle row

You can enlarge any middle row to a height of two rows.

GUID-11072F25-A39D-47D7-9F52-A7A4DE01047B

1. Proline instrument panel display setting switch

1. To enlarge the middle row, press the side of the display setting switch
opposite to the symbol.
The top row vanishes, and the middle row enlarges to a height of two rows.
2. Press the switch again to return to the normal view.

3.9.7 Changing parameters

3.9.7.1 Activating and exiting the setting mode

You must activate the setting mode to change the different settings.

GUID-C874386F-E735-4621-84F4-F4F1F682265B

1. Proline instrument panel display setting switch

1. Activate the setting mode.

Press and hold down the symbol side of the display setting switch for more
than three seconds.

- 136 -
 3. Operation

2. Display the available parameters.

Press the side of the display setting switch opposite to the symbol. The
available parameters are presented in the following table.
Parameter Parameter value
Display backlight level 1–7
Implement width 0–6 500
Hour display Hours
Minute display Minutes
Clock mode 12–hour or 24–hour
Speed ratio ppm Not in use
Direction indicator buzzer status On or off
Temperature unit Celsius or Fahrenheit
Length unit Metric or imperial
Volume unit Litre or UK gallon or US gallon
Front power take-off speed view On or off
Front lower links' position view On or off
Display contrast 80–120

3. Exit the setting mode.

Press and hold down the symbol side of the display setting switch for more
than three seconds.

3.9.7.2 Changing the parameter value

GUID-B759AF1A-A481-4FED-AB49-1559B2E918C7

1. Proline instrument panel display change-over switch

2. Proline instrument panel display setting switch

• Increase a parameter value.

• Press the symbol side of the display change-over switch.
The parameter value increases one step at a time.
• Press and hold down the symbol side of the display change-over switch.
The parameter value increases continuously.

- 137 -
3. Operation

• Decrease a parameter value.

• Press the side of the display change-over switch opposite to the symbol.
The parameter decreases one step at a time.
• Press and hold down the side of the display change-over switch opposite
to the symbol.
The parameter value decreases continuously.
• Select the next parameter to be changed.
Press the side of the display setting switch opposite to the symbol.

3.9.7.3 Setting the display backlight level

1
GUID-66C25D78-3CEF-412F-B8C8-E71CA6B093C1

1. Backlight level

1. Activate the backlight level in the setting mode.

2. Change the value.

3.9.7.4 Setting the implement width

1
GUID-962D81DE-047B-41F0-92F0-5F75B1B7600C

1. Implement width

1. Activate the implement width in the setting mode.

2. Change the value.

3.9.7.5 Changing the hour display

1
GUID-990D5FA6-9017-48A5-AD61-2D78C7B81B90

1. Hour display

1. Activate the hour display in the setting mode.

When the hour display is blinking, you can set the hours.

- 138 -
 3. Operation

2. Change the value.

3.9.7.6 Changing the minute display

1
GUID-84EFC7C0-AF26-4691-AFC7-538C2792B4D5

1. Minute display

1. Activate the minute display in the setting mode.

When the minute display is blinking, you can set the minutes.
2. Change the value.

3.9.7.7 Changing the clock mode

1
GUID-01B25A24-0446-49F5-A021-D899DB38D179

1. Clock mode

1. Activate the clock mode in the setting mode.

2. Change the display to either 12-hour or 24-hour mode.

3.9.7.8 Activating the direction indicator buzzer

1 2
GUID-6B0E5488-5692-4954-9D32-BB39283CD799

1. Direction indicator buzzer on

2. Direction indicator buzzer off

1. Activate the direction indicator buzzer in the setting mode.

2. Change the direction indicator buzzer to either on or off.
When the function is on (no cross), the buzzer is activated together with the
direction indicator or the hazard warning.

- 139 -
3. Operation

3.9.7.9 Changing the temperature unit

You can change the unit of temperature to be shown in either Celsius (C) or
Fahrenheit (F).
NOTE: The units have to be changed separately for the tractor terminal display.

1
GUID-BBC57E92-1577-4B87-9BBB-5A5A183BC34A

1. Temperature unit

1. Activate the unit of temperature in the setting mode.

2. Change the unit to C or F.

3.9.7.10 Changing the length unit

You can change the unit of length to be shown in either metric or imperial mode.
NOTE: The units have to be changed separately for the tractor terminal display.

1 2
GUID-6288B788-27E9-419D-8020-5A74A2447123

1. Metric units
2. Imperial units

1. Activate the unit of length in the setting mode.

2. Change the unit to either metric or imperial mode.
When the unit of length is changed between metric and imperial, the
following units also change:
Unit Metric Imperial
Driving speed km/h mph
Distance km, m miles, yard
Surface area ha acre
Implement width cm inch

- 140 -
 3. Operation

3.9.7.11 Changing the volume unit

You can change the unit of volume to be shown in either litre, gallon UK or gallon
US mode.

1 2 3
GUID-ACC3B440-D896-4ADD-BC27-C61CC0DADD94

1. Litre
2. Gallon UK
3. Gallon US

1. Activate the unit of volume in the setting mode.

2. Change the unit to either litre, gallon UK or gallon US.

3.9.7.12 Activating and deactivating the front power take-off speed view

1 2
GUID-BCF2C3E6-1E08-4FDE-A0E8-42CE42ABA3CD

1. Front PTO speed view on

2. Front PTO speed view off

1. Activate the front PTO speed view in the setting mode.

2. Activate or deactivate the front PTO speed view.
This function activates the front PTO speed view if the tractor is retrofit with
front PTO.

3.9.7.13 Activating and deactivating the front lower links' position view

1 2
GUID-5F839694-DE43-4922-91A6-726AC27F6368

1. Front lower links' position view activated

2. Front lower links' position view deactivated

1. Activate the front lower links' position view setting in the setting mode.

- 141 -
3. Operation

2. Activate or deactivate the view.

This function activates the front lower links' position view if the tractor is
retrofit with front linkage.

3.9.7.14 Adjusting the display contrast

1
GUID-F9264B65-2FAE-4086-A690-EDB309D5E920

1. Display contrast

1. Activate the display contrast in the setting mode.

2. Adjust the display contrast.
The minimum contrast value is 80 and the maximum value is 120.

3.10 A-pillar display

A separate display is located on the right-hand side front pillar. It gives
information on the power shuttle, driving speed, outdoor temperature, and
transmission.

MODE 1

GUID-9E0D97FE-8CB1-440D-8A06-0D9244FA9570

The display has a backlight to facilitate work in the dark.

The display is divided into a power shuttle section, a transmission section, and a
general information section.

- 142 -
 3. Operation

3.10.1 Power shuttle section

2 3

5 6
GUID-5A5135DA-445E-4BE3-9940-4E8A145AAC2B

1. Tractor symbol
2. Forward direction arrow
3. Reverse direction arrow
4. Speed balance symbol
5. Transmission neutral symbol
6. Parking brake symbol

Tractor symbol
The tractor symbol is shown continuously when the power is on.
Forward direction arrow
The forward driving direction arrow is shown when forward driving direction is
engaged. The arrow flashes if the power shuttle has been operated at a driving
speed over 10 km/h.
Speed balance symbol
Speed balance symbol only shows if the speed balance control knob has been
turned to either direction. When the speed balance control knob is in the middle
position, that is, driving speed to either direction is not reduced by using the knob,
this part of the display is empty.
Reverse direction arrow
The backward driving direction arrow is shown when reverse driving direction is
engaged. The arrow flashes if the power shuttle has been operated at a driving
speed over 10 km/h.
Transmission neutral symbol
The neutral (N) symbol is shown when the power shuttle lever is in the centre
position (N).
Parking brake symbol
The parking brake (P) symbol is shown when the parking brake is on.

- 143 -
3. Operation

3.10.2 Transmission section

The transmission information is shown in one of the A-pillar display sections.

MODE 12
1
AB
2
CD
3
2
GUID-1BB9BC54-867B-4523-822E-D7D58ED476F9

1. Transmission mode symbol

2. Speed range symbol
3. Maximum driving speed limitation / Transmission ratio

Transmission mode
The gear wheel symbol and the text MODE1 or MODE2 show which mode of
transmission is in use. MODE1 indicates that the semiautomatic driving mode is
in use, and MODE2 indicates manual driving mode is in use.When the automatic
drive mode is active (default), this part of the display is empty.
Speed range symbol
The speed range (A, B, C, D) is shown with a coloured bar and a letter:

Speed range A
GUID-9F4FE99E-49C3-4C36-AF97-A5B1D5E1F490
When activated, the letter A is shown and the first bar is filled.

Speed range B
GUID-FCE3B097-AEE5-4C9F-AC0C-4D51C0970BDC
When activated, the letter B is shown and the second bar is
filled.
Speed range C
GUID-3328913E-513F-4272-A07A-BA99C710E9D2
When activated, the letter C is shown and the third bar is filled.

Speed range D
GUID-46AECF83-C594-4C1F-AFEE-7A9098C51F9B
When activated, the letter D is shown and the fourth bar is
filled.

When changing the speed range, the letter and bar for the requested speed
range are flashing until the selected speed range becomes active.
Maximum driving speed limitation / Transmission ratio
In semiautomatic (MODE1) or automatic (no symbol indication) driving modes,
the number field in the middle of the display shows the maximum driving speed
as determined by the position of the transmission adjustment lever, or by the
maximum driving speed limitation defined in the tractor terminal transmission
settings.

- 144 -
 3. Operation

In the manual mode (MODE2), this field displays the transmission ratio in
percentage (0-100%) as determined by the position of the transmission
adjustment lever.

3.10.3 General information section

The general information section on the A-pillar display shows the basic mode
view. The information shown in the basic mode view changes according to the
driving situation. You can also select one of the views as fixed.

1 4

GUID-6D57EBE7-536E-4504-8606-3C67BE002E51

1. Rear Power take-off (PTO) symbol

2. Driving speed tractor symbol
3. The value of the selected property
4. Thermometer symbol

• In the basic mode view, the symbol for the rear PTO is shown only if the PTO
is rotating. If rear PTO is selected as fixed, also the rotating speed is shown
on the bottom line. The accuracy of the speed view is 10 rpm.
• In the basic mode view, the thermometer symbol and the current outside
temperature are shown when the tractor is stationary. In the fixed view, they
are shown continuously. The accuracy of the temperature view is one
degree. The outside temperature sensor is placed in the front part of the
tractor. The engine temperature can falsely affect the thermometer,
especially when the tractor is stationary.
• In the basic mode view, the tractor symbol and the current driving speed are
shown if the tractor is moving. In the fixed view, they are shown continuously.
The accuracy of the driving speed view is described in the following table.
Driving speed Accuracy
0.0-9.9 0.1
10.0-14.8 0.2
15 and above 1 (no decimals)

- 145 -
3. Operation

3.10.4 Changing general information section views

You can change the general information section view by pressing the view
selection switch.

GUID-38149417-A00B-43B9-A575-2AB0813CC183

1. View selection switch

1. Select a view by pressing the view selection switch.

The views are organised in the following order: basic mode (the general
information section is empty), rear power take-off (PTO), outdoor
temperature, driving speed.
• To scroll through the functions in this order, press down the symbol side
of the switch.
• To scroll through the functions in reverse order, press down the side of
the switch opposite to the symbol.
The basic mode shows the outdoor temperature when the tractor does not
move. When the driving speed is greater than 0.3 km/h, the speed is shown
instead of the temperature.
2. The last used display mode is saved when turning off the power.

3.11 Tractor terminal

The tractor terminal display and keypad are placed on the right-hand side armrest.
In the tractor terminal application views, you can view and/or adjust the following,
for example:
• Information related to various tractor functions and working situations in the
large drive view and split drive view.
• The settings of the tractor terminal display, such as display brightness and
measurement units.
• The settings for auxiliary hydraulics functions.
• The settings for transmission parameters.
• The settings of the tractor terminal parameters.
• The active service codes.

- 146 -
 3. Operation

3.11.1 Tractor terminal control button functions

With the tractor terminal keypad buttons you can navigate in the different display
fields, activate and deactivate the functions and adjust the values.

1 1 P

2
SET ON/OFF

M1 M2 M3
OK 3
esc
OFF
4
GUID-D8C8A8A8-BB48-4091-8149-C590CD122E4A

1. Tractor terminal display

2. OK button
3. Arrow buttons
4. ESC button

Button Function
• A short press moves you from the present field in the selected direction.
• A longer press moves you continuously in the selected direction.

• A short press increases the activated value with one unit.

• A longer press increases the value, for example, with ten units (depending on the point
selected).
• Pressing continuously, the value increases until the upper limit is reached.
• A short press decreases the activated value with one unit.
• A longer press decreases the value, for example, with ten units (depending on the point
selected).
• Pressing continuously, the value decreases until the lower limit is reached.
OK • A short press activates the selected field for changing the data. Another press of the OK
button saves the value in the field and deactivates the field.
• A longer press returns to the drive view last selected.
• In the transmission settings view, the OK button is used only for starting the speed sensor
calibration.
esc • When a field is activated, a press of the ESC button deactivates the field.
• A short press returns to the previous display.
• A longer press returns to the drive view last selected.

3.11.2 Entering menus

You can enter several setting and information views through the main menu.
The power has to be turned on before you can enter the menus.

- 147 -
3. Operation

4 3

5 7

C D
AUTO

F R
10

40

6 8

GUID-2E161A2C-8351-489B-B541-EC9B06017DF4

1. Main menu
2. Set menu
3. Large drive view
4. Implement width and resetting counters view
5. Split drive view
6. Changing units and adjusting display brightness view
7. Hydraulics settings view
8. Transmission settings view
9. Service code view

1. If the main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times as needed.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Press an arrow button in the desired direction of the menu.
3. Press an arrow button again to access different views.

3.11.3 Power shuttle related drive view symbols

The power shuttle related symbols in both the large and split drive views:

- 148 -
 3. Operation

1 2 3 4

F1 R10

B 13.0 c
Cruise
Cruise
13.0 2 1310 2
GUID-F00A9382-B7D3-4E86-9E20-B980F049F51F

1 2 3 4

F1 R10
1

B 13.0
c n min
50 1500
GUID-6433BE55-0F66-4E04-B8B0-CAFC91A02ECB

1 F1 The driving direction forward (F) and the relative maximum speed limitation are shown
when the speed balance function is activated for forward driving direction.
2 The driving direction forward arrow is lit when forward driving direction is engaged. The
arrow flashes if the power shuttle has been operated at a driving speed over 10 km/h.

3 The driving direction backward arrow is lit when reverse driving direction is engaged.
The arrow flashes if the power shuttle has been operated at a driving speed of over 10 km/
h.
4 R10 The driving direction backwards (R) and the relative maximum speed limitation are
shown when the speed balance function is activated for backward driving direction.

3.11.4 Transmission related drive view symbols

The transmission related symbols in both the large and split drive views:

F1 R10
1
2 1 5
3 B 13.0 c
Cruise
6
Cruise
4 13.0 2 1310 2
GUID-C7000DAA-AEC3-4E26-B780-E7C297E98D94

1
F1 R10
2 1

3 B 13.0 5
4 c n min 6
50 1500
GUID-B6087454-86F5-4D62-AC38-49F55E5F4139

- 149 -
3. Operation

1 The symbol is lit when the engine brake setting is on maximum engine braking mode.

The symbol is lit when the engine brake setting is on rolling mode (the engine does not
brake).

The field is empty when the engine brake setting is on normal engine braking mode.
2 The field is empty when the automatic driving mode is active (default).

1 The gearbox symbols with number 1 is lit when the semiautomatic driving mode is
selected.

2 The gearbox symbols with number 2 is lit when the manual driving mode is selected.

3 The bar graph shows the current transmission ratio as determined by the transmission
adjustment lever and the driving pedal.

4 B This field shows the selected speed range (A, B, C or D). A pop-up window indicating the
speed range change shows on the display until the requested speed range is engaged.
5 The traction force control symbol is lit when the traction force control function is being
used. The symbol blinks when traction force control is enabled during driving. The
symbol is also displayed if the speed is above 5 km/h and brakes are applied heavily
(drive is disengaged).
6 P When the parking brake is on, the symbol (P) is lit. If the parking brake is engaged while
running, the symbol P flashes until the driving speed is below the engaging limit speed
(factory adjusted 3 km/h).
N The symbol (N) is lit when the power shuttle lever is in the centre position (N).
The standstill symbol is lit when the standstill function is active.

The driving speed limit symbol flashes when the driving speed limit is reached.

The engine running speed limit symbol flashes when the engine speed limit is reached.

3.11.5 General information drive view symbols

The general information symbols in both the large and split drive views:

F1 R10
2
1

B 13.0 c
Cruise
3
Cruise
13.0 2 1310 2
4 5 6
GUID-7290CD72-22EA-4B0B-AB4F-AA41622FE240

F1 R10
1 2
B 13.0
c n min
50 1500
GUID-BB116BC9-7062-43B9-BF9B-DF9E4BAC7E30

- 150 -
 3. Operation

1 The tractor symbol is lit when the power is on.

The hourglass symbol is displayed when the hydrostat is automatically bled after starting
the engine. The bleeding process takes about 10 seconds.
The warning symbol is displayed at the same time with the warning symbol of the
instrument panel when one of the warning lights on the instrument panel is lit.

The STOP symbol light starts flashing (the engine must be running) at the same time
with the STOP light on the instrument panel when there is a serious fault.
IMPORTANT: If the STOP light starts flashing, stop the tractor and engine immediately.
You can continue driving only in an emergency, for example to move the tractor to the
roadside.

When the system detects an error in its own operation, the book symbol flashes on the
tractor symbol. If the STOP light on the instrument panel does not flash, you can
continue driving.
IMPORTANT: If the engine does not run over 1500 rpm, there is a serious fault (for
example air in the fuel). To avoid serious damages, driving is only allowed to move the
tractor to a safe place.

The driver's seat symbol flashes on the display if the driving direction is selected with the
power shuttle lever and the operator is not seated.

2 The hydraulic cylinder symbol flashes when there is pressure requested at least from
one valve.
The floating state symbol flashes on the display when there is at least one valve in
floating state.
The symbols flash in turns if there is at least one valve in floating state, and pressure is
requested at least from one valve.

3 In normal situations, with the power on and the tractor standing still, the thermometer
and the outside temperature are displayed. The temperature is displayed with an
accuracy of plus or minus one degree. The outside temperature sensor is located at the
front part of the tractor. The heat of the tractor engine may raise the temperature reading.
km/h or The driving speed is displayed when the tractor is moving. The driving speed is
mph displayed with an accuracy of:

• 0-10: 0.1
• 10-15: 0.2
• > 15: 1

When the driving speed is under 1km/h the speed is shown in m/h
4 The U-Pilot symbol is lit when the U-Pilot is active.

5 cruise The driving speed cruise symbol for the memory slot 1 with the programmed driving
speed are shown on the display. The inverted icon indicates the active cruise mode.
1
cruise The driving speed cruise symbol for the memory slot 2 with the programmed driving
speed are shown on the display. The inverted icon indicates the active cruise mode.
2
6 cruise The engine speed cruise symbol for the memory slot 1 with the programmed engine
speed are shown on the display. The inverted icon indicates the active cruise mode.
1
cruise The engine speed cruise symbol for the memory slot 2 with the programmed engine
speed are shown on the display. The inverted icon indicates the active cruise mode.
2

- 151 -
3. Operation

3.11.6 Pop-up views

A >> B
10 c cruise
Cruise
13.0 2 1310 2
GUID-4062A2A0-F579-4E28-BB09-7BC0E2B426F1

1
1

A
A >> B2.8
1/9 12.5m

GUID-A52674E4-9A4D-44B0-8614-C0D55C66BA22

1 A >> B The speed range change pop-up view is shown when the speed range is being changed.
Both the old and the new speed range are displayed on the pop-up view.

105 c The hydrostat temperature pop-up view is shown when the hydrostat temperature rises
to 105 °C (or over it).
HST

110 c The hydrostat temperature pop-up view is shown when the hydrostat temperature rises
to 110 °C.
HST

3.11.7 Entering the large drive view

You can enter the large drive view from the main menu.

GUID-2A1009BB-E96D-4A13-880A-20DE2738871C

1. Large drive view

1. If the main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times as needed.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Press the up arrow button.
The large drive view is displayed.

- 152 -
 3. Operation

3.11.8 Split drive view

The split drive view is divided into three fields.

A P 0.0
Km
01 40 2.18
GUID-25F9BAF0-F058-48E0-B8F6-B4003CA1B7A8

The upper part of the small drive view shows the same functions as the large
drive view except for the following functions:
• Outside temperature
• Cruise control
For the lower two fields of the view, you can select the functions.

3.11.9 Entering the split drive view

You can enter the split drive view from the main menu.

GUID-654CE944-ACA4-456A-B0F6-FD4A3864EA1B

1. Split drive view

1. If the main menu is not shown on the display, press ESC as many times as
needed.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Press the left arrow button.
The split drive view is displayed.

3.11.10 Changing the lower field views

You can select the views shown in the lower fields of the split drive view. The
same view cannot be seen in both the fields at the same time.
You have to select the split drive view to change the lower field views.

- 153 -
3. Operation

1. Press OK.
The lower left field is activated, and a rectangle is displayed around it.

A P 0.0
Km
1
01 40 2.18
GUID-CEB77F11-14EF-4148-BD4D-2E8FD654F791

1. The activated field.

2. Activate either the left or the right field with the left and right arrow buttons.
3. Select the desired view in the field with the up and down arrow buttons.
4. Press OK.
The selected field stays on the screen.

3.11.11 Lower field views

Several views can be displayed in the lower fields of the split drive view.
The functions selected for the lower fields are shown in the following order:
Symbol Function

F Front power-take-off (PTO) speed (rpm)

R Rear power-take-off (PTO) speed (rpm)

Engine speed (rpm)

Settings for the auxiliary hydraulics valves

M1 Memory locations for auxiliary hydraulics valve settings
M2
M3
1 Settings for the rear hydraulic valves 1-4 of the memory locations M1, M2 and M3.
2
3
4
F1 Settings for the front hydraulic valves F1, F2 and F3. of the memory locations M1,
F2 M2 and M3.
F3
Gearbox temperature (°C/°F)

Hydrostat temperature (°C/°F)

HST

Hydraulic oil temperature (°C/°F)

Outside temperature (°C/°F)

Engine temperature (°C/°F)

Table continued on next page

- 154 -
 3. Operation

Symbol Function

ACR Position of lower links, rear (%, 0-100)

Wheel slip (%)

Working time (hh:mm)

Travel distance (m/km/miles)

Surface area (ha/acre)

Fuel consumption views, displaying the following information:

• Total fuel consumption (l)

• Average fuel consumption in an hour (avg l/h)
• Immediate fuel consumption in an hour (l/h)
• Average fuel consumption on the area worked (avg l/ha/acre)
• Immediate fuel consumption on the area worked (l/ha/acre)
Cruise control views, displaying the following information:
cruise Constant engine speed 1 (rpm)
1
cruise Constant engine speed 2 (rpm)
2
cruise Constant driving speed 1 (km/mph)

1
cruise Constant driving speed 2 (km/mph)

3.11.11.1 Power take-off speed views

Front PTO speed

GUID-2FA1DEA9-9AF0-42AA-9632-21C7F1747E7D

Rear PTO speed

GUID-EAFAEADE-435A-41B4-8C32-9B1DB0E2E67A

The PTO rotation speed is shown with an accuracy of 10 rpm.

- 155 -
3. Operation

3.11.11.2 Engine speed view

GUID-5247AB23-2EF0-43C0-B029-8B0C3154B38B

The view shows the engine speed with an accuracy of 10 rpm.

3.11.11.3 Rear hydraulic valve settings view

GUID-10C2E32A-FAD6-47FB-A318-BBB672DACAFF

The hydraulic settings of the memory location (M1, M2 or M3) in use are
displayed. If one of the factory settings is in use, the settings of memory location
M1 are displayed.

3.11.11.4 Front hydraulic valve settings view

GUID-D8F927D1-8D42-4A2D-8E6C-4835D4EB7430

This view is available in a tractor with front valves. The hydraulic settings of the
memory location (M1, M2 or M3) in use are shown on the display. If one of the
factory settings is in use, the settings of memory location M1 are shown on the
display.

3.11.11.5 Gearbox temperature view

GUID-2656EDFA-2021-4F08-988D-C1B56386AB3F

The gearbox temperature is displayed as follows:

- 156 -
 3. Operation

• When the temperature is below +30°C, the text "lo" is displayed.

• When the temperature is above +30°C, the actual temperature is displayed.
• When the temperature is above +119°C, the text "high" is displayed.

3.11.11.6 Hydrostat temperature view

A P 0.0
c Km
HST
Lo 2.18
GUID-EF12E8E4-AA02-46C6-8A91-4DA59796C7B4

The hydrostat temperature is displayed as follows:

• When the temperature is below +30°C, the text "lo" is displayed.
• When the temperature is above +30°C, the actual temperature is displayed.

3.11.11.7 Working hydraulics oil temperature view

GUID-D2D01AD4-D15A-4D9C-B01A-7B4B975746B2

The hydraulic temperature is displayed as follows:

• When the temperature is below +30°C, the text "lo" is displayed.
• When the temperature is above +30°C, the actual temperature is displayed.
• When the temperature is above +119°C, the text "high" is displayed.

3.11.11.8 Rear lower links' position view

GUID-B4DDE869-7D49-4FDF-A5F7-044B23E090A8

The display shows the symbol and the position of the rear lower links on a
percentage scale 0–100.
• 0 = The lower links are in the lowest position.
• 50 = The lower links are in the middle position.
• 100 = The lower links are in the top position.

NOTE: The percentage value may not achieve the limit values (0 or 100) even if
the linkage is functioning correctly.

- 157 -
3. Operation

3.11.11.9 Wheel slip view

GUID-7C6CADF1-4FAA-4AAB-914A-A58AC95339B7

The wheel slip percentage is attained by comparing the speed information of the
radar to the rotation speed of the back wheels.
For driving speeds lower than 0.3 km/h, zero is displayed.

3.11.11.10 Working time view

Working time can, for example, show the time spent on ploughing a certain area.

A P 0.0
Km
01 40 2.18
GUID-25F9BAF0-F058-48E0-B8F6-B4003CA1B7A8

The working time is stored in the memory when the power is turned off.
You can reset the working time counter.

3.11.11.11 Travel distance view

You can change the travel distance unit (km, miles) by changing the unit of
length.

GUID-9EEFC706-5796-4220-8F9F-5A80DBEBFCCE

The travel distance is displayed as follows:

• For distances <1 km (mile), the m (yard) symbol is displayed and the
distance is displayed with an accuracy of ±1 m (yard).
• For distances >1 km (mile), but ≤100 km (miles), the display symbol changes
to km (miles) and the distance is displayed with an accuracy of ±2 decimals.
• Distances >100 km (miles) are displayed with an accuracy of ±1 decimal.
• The maximum distance displayed is 999.9 km (miles).
You can reset the distance reading.

- 158 -
 3. Operation

3.11.11.12 Surface area view

You can change the unit of area (ha, acre) by changing the unit of length.

GUID-8C3B8988-5C52-4E58-B3FD-79E8F0C640CB

The surface area view shows the amount of area worked. The area reading
increases only when the implement is used to work the soil (the linkage is not in
the transport position).
The worked area is stored in the memory when the power is turned off from the
tractor.
You can reset the area reading.

3.11.11.13 Fuel consumption views

There are five different fuel consumption settings that can be displayed in the
lower fields of the split drive view.
You can select litre, gallon UK or gallon US as the unit of volume.
Total fuel consumption

GUID-69053190-D619-4C9C-AD49-989C4B8E8864

Average fuel consumption in an hour

GUID-D5FF1A4A-230E-4756-839F-78BB6590C830

- 159 -
3. Operation

Immediate fuel consumption in an hour

GUID-BCCCC2EB-56F6-4F31-8BEF-B35BACC07C3F

Average fuel consumption on the area worked

GUID-282340E6-F6DA-4BCE-ACC0-2D2F7FFA0520

You can change the unit of area (ha, acre) by changing the unit of length.
Immediate fuel consumption on the area worked

GUID-284A5AA9-5A72-4931-85E1-9F0EAF04D750

You can change the unit of area (ha, acre) by changing the unit of length.
You can reset the fuel consumption information.

3.11.11.14 Cruise control view

GUID-CCA16A82-F345-4EC1-8F6F-3821BF4846E1

There are two memory slots for constant engine speed and constant driving speed.
The cruise control status indications are:

- 160 -
 3. Operation

cruise Constant engine speed 1

1
cruise Constant engine speed 2
2
cruise Constant driving speed 1

1
cruise Constant driving speed 2

The numerical value in front of the symbol stands for the value of the
programmed constant engine speed or driving speed.

3.11.12 Entering the hydraulics settings view

1
GUID-4B801A01-55BB-4FE9-847D-221BD22DE0BD

1. Auxiliary hydraulics settings view

1. If the main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times as needed.
The main menu is displayed.
2. Press the right arrow button.
The auxiliary hydraulics settings are displayed.

3.11.13 Hydraulics view symbols

1 2 3 4 6 3 5 6

M1 % + % -
1 40 50
2 50 4 60
3 100
4
1F 100 100
2F 100 100
GUID-40FF20FD-F33A-4907-B187-637400F94DE4

1. The number of the valve

2. Valve state
3. The set flow rate per port, as a percentage of the maximum flow
4. + port
5. – port
6. Duration of the functions per port

- 161 -
3. Operation

The number of the valve

• Front valves are indicated by “F” after the number.
• A small arrow in the upper or the lower corner indicates that there are more
than six valves. If there are more than six valves, you can scroll up or down
to view the ones that do not fit on the screen with the up or down arrow button.
• Memory position M1, M2 or M3 is selected with the selection switch, and the
position of the selection switch can be seen in the upper corner.
Valve state
• = active, the valve settings are shown
• = not active
• = not in use, error situation

The set flow rate per port, as a percentage of the maximum flow
• The corresponding flow rate is displayed beside the percentage as a bar.
• The valve can be used for single action when the implement is engaged to
only one of the quick couplings.
Duration of the functions per port
• 0–60 s timed duration of the position lock
• = the position lock continuously on
• = floating position (only in the – port)
• empty = no function active

3.11.14 Adjusting the display brightness

1. In the main menu, press the down arrow.
2. Press the left arrow.
The view for adjusting the display brightness and changing the units is
displayed.

GUID-A1F25752-3674-4042-A49B-E766E9784E7B

3. Select adjusting display contrast with the arrow keys.

4. Press OK.
The display brightness value is activated and the line below the value starts
flashing. The indication of the brightness is 1-10.
5. Adjust the brightness with the up and down arrow buttons.
6. Activate the new value or restore the old value.
• To deactivate the field and store the new value for brightness, press OK.
• To deactivate the field and restore the old value for brightness, press ESC.

- 162 -
 3. Operation

3.11.15 Changing units

NOTE: The units have to be changed separately for the Proline instrument panel
display.

1. In the main menu, press the down arrow.

2. Press the left arrow.
The view for adjusting the display brightness and changing the units is
displayed.

GUID-7CFA5E53-45F8-4C26-8EB1-B9D0EE906E37

3. Select the unit with the arrow buttons.

4. Press OK to activate the unit.
When the unit of length is changed between metric/imperial, the following units
also change:
Unit Metric Imperial
Driving speed km/h mph
Distance km, m miles, yard
Surface, area ha acre
Implement width cm inch

3.11.16 Changing parameters

3.11.16.1 Setting the implement width

1. Select the split drive view on the display.
2. Press OK until the view for setting the implement width and resetting the
counters is displayed.

1
GUID-689A55D5-CF70-4AFA-A353-B547E06CEAAD

1. Implement width

3. Select the implement width with the arrow buttons.

- 163 -
3. Operation

4. Press OK.
5. Select the digit to be changed with the left and right arrow buttons.
You can change the value digit by digit.
The cursor below the activated digit starts flashing.
6. Set the value with the arrow buttons.
• To increase the value, press the up arrow button.
• To decrease the value, press the down arrow button.
7. Confirm or cancel the setting.
• To deactivate the field and store the new value, press OK.
• To deactivate the field and restore the old value, press ESC.

3.11.16.2 Resetting counters

1. Select the split drive view.
2. Press OK until the view for setting the implement width and resetting the
counters is displayed.

GUID-BDC77CD4-B8B3-4D68-8563-65B43FC89BF2

1. Reset all counters

3. Select the counter to be reset using the arrow buttons.

You can reset one counter or all counters.
4. To reset the counter/s, press OK until "000" is displayed.

3.11.17 Transmission settings view

In the transmission settings view, you can adjust transmission parameters.

C D
AUTO

F R
10

40

4
START
GUID-ED4937AC-402E-4258-8F5E-6688577A114E

The following adjustments can be made in this view:

- 164 -
 3. Operation

2 Manual driving mode selection

Transmission droop setting

F/R Power shuttle engagement speed setting

Engine brake setting

Engine speed limit adjustment

cruise Power take-off (PTO) cruise setting

Hydraulics assistant setting

C D Automatic speed range change C<->D.

AUTO

Four-wheel drive automatics adjustment

F R

Driving speed limit adjustment

Rear power take-off engagement adjustment

START

Tyre parameter setting

Clutch pedal engagement position setting

Speed sensors calibration

- 165 -
3. Operation

3.12 Rear linkage

1 2 3 4 5

7 8 9

10 11 12

6
GUID-EA459774-F9D7-4067-8384-507D3C56A4F9

1. Diagnose light
2. Lowering speed selector
3. Lifting height selector
4. Draft control selector
5. Drive balance control, including slip control system
6. Lift/lower push buttons
7. Lift/lower indicator lights
8. Drive balance control light
9. Slip control light
10. Lift/stop/lower switch
11. Passing switch for position control knob
12. Position control knob

3.12.1 Diagnose light

When the tractor power is turned on, the diagnose light is lit for a moment, goes
out and is lit again. The lit diagnose light indicates that the linkage has not been
activated.

GUID-8ED8CACC-5A0E-4D8A-B8DD-53A626B51D78

1. Diagnose light

- 166 -
 3. Operation

IMPORTANT: Contact your dealer if the diagnostic light is flashing (the service
code is displayed on the tractor terminal). This means that there is a system
failure.

3.12.2 Activating the linkage

You can activate the linkage with the lift/stop/lower switch.
The linkage has to be activated every time the power has been turned on or
when the lift/lower push buttons have been used.

GUID-C4CEBD8D-B741-48B3-9870-CB8BBA10C6A9

1. Lift/stop/lower switch

1. Change the position of the lift/stop/lower switch.

The diagnose light goes out and the lower links move to the preset position.
The first movement is done by reduced speed.
The change to stop position just turns off the diagnose light.
NOTE: The linkage movement can be stopped by pressing the lift/stop/lower
switch to the centre position.

2. To increase the speed to normal, change the position of the lift/stop/lower

switch again.

- 167 -
3. Operation

3.12.3 Using the lift/stop/lower switch

The lift/stop/lower switch has three positions.

2
GUID-183FEAAE-CC61-458D-A334-E1BD7F459B85

1. Lift/stop/lower switch
2. Position control knob

• Press down the symbol side of the lift/stop/lower switch.

The lower links are moved to the height set by the position control knob. This
is called the Autocontrol position.
NOTE: When the draft control is in use, the linkage movements can be large
and undeterminable.

• Press down the side of the lift/stop/lower switch opposite to the symbol.
The lower links are moved to the height set by the lifting height selector. This
is called the transport position.
• To stop the lower links, set the lift/stop/lower switch to the centre position.

3.12.4 Using the position control knob

You can use the position control knob to lift or lower the lower links. The knob
allows continuous control of the lower links position. It sets the position of the
lower links when the lift/stop/lower switch is in the lower position.
NOTE: The position of the lower links can be displayed on the instrument panel
display or tractor terminal display in the rear lower links' position view.

- 168 -
 3. Operation

2
GUID-183FEAAE-CC61-458D-A334-E1BD7F459B85

1. Lift/stop/lower switch
2. Position control knob

• To lift the lower links, turn the knob clockwise.

• To lower the lower links, turn the knob anti-clockwise.

3.12.5 Using the linkage floating position

You can use the floating position when working with certain types of implements
which have to follow the ground surface. Such implements are, for example,
sowing machines and rollers.

GUID-3540698C-D420-48AA-8B58-256F89A20B52

1. Lower indicator light

2. Position control knob

IMPORTANT: Use the floating position when working with implements following
the ground surface, otherwise the implement may be damaged.

• To activate the floating position, turn the position control knob anti-clockwise
to its extreme position (0).
The lower links can now move freely up and down following the movements
of the implement. The lower indicator light is lit continuously.

- 169 -
3. Operation

• To deactivate the floating position, turn the position control knob clockwise.
The floating stops when the position control knob is moved approximately to
position 1.

3.12.6 Using the lift/lower push buttons

Using the lift/lower push buttons is the safest way of operating the linkage. The
lifting/lowering continues as long as you keep pushing the respective button.
Thus, you have steady control over the linkage movements.

GUID-15D314D8-BD49-4E64-AE13-9D69F14580E6

1. Lift push button

2. Lower push button

• To lift the linkage, press the lift push button.

The longer the lift button is pressed the faster the linkage lifts.
• To lower the linkage, press the lower push button.
The longer the lower button is pressed the faster the linkage lowers.

3.12.7 Lift/lower indicator lights

The indicator lights indicate when the lower links are moving.

2
GUID-94D74969-E3AA-43B7-B02B-1108A9374ABA

1. Lift indicator light

2. Lower indicator light

- 170 -
 3. Operation

Lit indicator light indicates that the rear linkage is being used.
• The lift indicator (red) is lit when the lower links are lifting.
• The lower indicator (green) is lit when the links are lowering. The lower
indicator light is lit also when rear linkage is set to floating position.

3.12.8 Setting the lowering speed

The needed lowering speed depends on the type of implement used. A slow
lowering speed must be used with heavy and sensitive implements. The setting
does not affect the raising speed.
The lowering speed is independent of the load.

GUID-F0BAA781-A424-4EC9-A245-F2B37C72F3CF

1. Lowering speed selector

• To increase the lowering speed, turn the knob clockwise.

Nine different levels are available.
• To decrease the lowering speed, turn the knob anti-clockwise.

3.12.9 Limiting the lifting height

The height limit is a useful feature, for example, when there is a risk that the
implement could hit the cab or when using the power take-off (PTO) driven
implements to prevent the PTO shaft from being damaged.
IMPORTANT: The lifting height limitation must be used when using power take-
off (PTO) powered implements to prevent the PTO shaft from being damaged.

GUID-E61B2551-F281-4F90-91EF-51925AE45979

1. Lifting height selector

- 171 -
3. Operation

• Use the lifting height selector to limit the lower links lifting height.
The lifting height can be limited to 9 different positions with the lifting height
selector. The Max position is the uppermost position to which the lower links
can be lifted.
The lifting height selector limits the lifting height when either the position
control knob or the lift/stop/lower switch is used.
CAUTION: The lifting height selector does not limit the lifting
height when the lift/lower push buttons are used.

3.12.10 Draft control

You can use the draft control when working with implements that operate below
the surface of the ground. Such implements are, for example, ploughs and
cultivators.

NOTE: Adjust the ploughing depth with the position control knob.

NOTE: It is recommended to keep the draft control disengaged (in position P) if it

is not needed.

The draft control has eight levels which define to what extent the draft force
affects the working depth, where
• 1 = small influence
• 8 = very large influence
Position 5 is normally used for ploughing. If larger draft control is required,
position 6 can be used instead, and the ploughing depth is not significantly
affected.
When the draft control is operating, the rear linkage tries to maintain the position
set by the position control knob. If the pulling resistance increases, the rear
linkage raises the implement and some of the weight is transferred to the rear
wheels. Thus, the driving wheels maintain the maximum traction.

NOTE: The position of the lower links can be displayed on the instrument panel
display or tractor terminal display in the rear lower links' position view.

- 172 -
 3. Operation

3.12.11 Activating and deactivating the draft control

2
GUID-7090DA95-8D95-485C-B6B8-8CE7902B51DB

1. Draft control selector

2. Lift/lower indicator lights

• To activate the draft control, turn the draft control selector from position P to
one of the eight levels.
• To deactivate the draft control, turn the selector to position P.
Turning the selector to the base position P ensures that the linkage is
controlled accurately by the position control knob.

3.12.12 Passing the position set by the position control knob

Use the passing switch for the position control knob when you temporarily need
the lower links to pass the lower limit set by the control knob. This feature is
useful for example when ploughing.
The passing switch for the position control knob allows a quicker entry of the
plough to the correct depth in the beginning and a better maintenance of the
depth at the end.
The passing switch for position control knob is spring returned and operates
when the lift/stop/lower switch is in the lowering position (Autocontrol position).
When using the passing switch for position control knob, the lowering speed set
by the lowering speed selector is used.

- 173 -
3. Operation

3 4
GUID-3CE78B60-54C7-4D95-BC1C-CE058C73575A

1. Lowering speed selector

2. Lift/stop/lower switch
3. Passing switch for position control knob
4. Position control knob

1. Press down the symbol side of the lift/stop/lower switch.

2. Press down the passing switch for position control knob.
The lower links pass the limit set by the position control knob.
3. Release the passing switch for position control knob.
The lower links return to the value set by the position control knob.

3.12.13 Passing the height set by the lifting height selector

Use the passing switch for the position control knob when you temporarily need
the lower links to pass the MAX position set by the lifting height selector. This
feature is useful, for example, when disconnecting the trailer hitch or to make
sure that the trailer hitch latches when connecting a trailer to the tractor.
The passing switch for the position control knob is spring returned and operates
when the lift/stop/lower switch is in the lifting position and the lifting selector is in
the MAX position.

- 174 -
 3. Operation

3
GUID-31C4C528-B650-4ADB-9316-E1823AB172B9

1. Lifting height selector

2. Lift/stop/lower switch
3. Passing switch for position control knob

1. Turn the lifting height selector to the MAX position.

2. Press down the side of the lift/stop/lower switch opposite to the symbol.
3. Press down the passing switch for position control knob.
The lower links pass the limit set by the lifting height selector.
4. Release the passing switch for position control knob.
The lower links return to the value set by the lifting height selector.

3.12.14 Using the drive balance control

The control system makes driving the tractor more even and stable. The drive
balance control can also be used in the field.
The drive balance control system is used for balancing the tractor when
transporting heavy implements on the linkage. The linkage lowers and lifts
slightly, if needed. When the drive balance control is in use the transport height is
a bit lower than the one set by the lifting height selector and can vary a bit.
The drive balance control operates only with the transport mode, that is, when the
lift/stop/lower switch is in the lifting position.

- 175 -
3. Operation

1 2

3
GUID-6BC63F72-BC13-47C1-8CA5-DABD80260617

1. Drive balance position

2. Drive balance control selector
3. Drive balance control light

1. To activate the drive balance control, turn the drive balance control selector
to the drive balance position.
The drive balance control light is lit when the balance control is activated.
2. Set the lift/stop/lower switch to the transport position.
3. To deactivate the drive balance control, turn the drive balance control
selector to the Off or Slip position.

3.12.15 Slip control

You can use the slip control when working with implements that operate below
the surface of the ground and are connected to the three-point linkage.
NOTE: The slip control operates only when the draft control is activated.

The slip control function lifts the linkage a little when the wheels exceed the slip
limit. It lowers the implement back to the set depth when the wheel slip is below
the slip limit again.
Tractors are equipped with radar under the right side of the cab. When all wheels
slip, the real driving speed can only be measured with the radar.

WARNING: Do not go under the tractor until the ignition key has been
turned to the STOP position. The tractor is equipped with radar which
presents a hazard to your eyes.

- 176 -
 3. Operation

3.12.16 Using the slip control

You can use the slip control when the draft control selector is in the draft control
area.

1 2 3 4

5 6
GUID-D419F217-BEA0-4176-B9D1-523C953C4A49

1. Draft control selector

2. Drive balance control and slip control position
3. Slip limit position
4. Drive balance control selector
5. Drive balance control light
6. Slip control light

• Turn the drive balance control selector to the drive balance control and slip
control position.
Both the drive balance control and slip control are activated.
The slip control is activated when the lift/stop/lower switch is in the lower
position and the draft control selector is in the draft control area (position 1-8).
The slip control light is lit when the slip control is activated and driving speed
is more than 1 km/h.
• Turn the drive balance control selector to the slip control position.
Only the slip control is activated.
The draft control selector must be in the draft control area (position 1-8).
The slip control light is lit when the slip control is activated and driving speed
is more than 1 km/h.

- 177 -
3. Operation

3.13 Three-point linkage

STOP

1
2

2
5

4 4

6
GUID-D7CF3511-90A4-4E9E-A66F-E32B47113736

1. Top link
2. Lifting link
3. Levelling gear
4. Check links
5. Hydraulic levelling ram (extra equipment)
6. Lower links

WARNING: Ensure that the hooks latch correctly.

The tractors are supplied with category 3 ball hitch lower links.
The top link has three different attaching holes on the tractor. Thus, it is possible
to get different lifting geometry for different implements. When the top link is in
the lowest hole, the implement inclines forward. The uppermost hole gives almost
horizontal lifting movement.
NOTE: Usually it is recommended to use the middle hole.

- 178 -
 3. Operation

3.13.1 Attaching implements

DANGER: Always use the lift/lower push buttons when attaching or
releasing implements.

WARNING: When attaching or releasing an implement, support the

implement to prevent it from falling.

IMPORTANT: When using the hydraulic top link, ensure that it operates normally
when you are attaching an implement. Do not use the hydraulic top link in the
lowest hole in the mounting bracket as this may damage the top link or the
bracket.

2 3

1
GUID-625A2836-CE83-4D2F-A0F4-130361E41D0B

1. Lift/lower push buttons

2. Lift/lower indicator lights
3. Draft control selector

1. Turn the draft control selector to position P.

DANGER: Before attaching or releasing an implement, turn the
draft control selector to position P. In sensitive positions, even a
small turn of the position control knob may cause an unexpected
linkage movement.

2. Press the lift/lower push buttons to lift or lower the lower links.
You can use the corresponding push buttons on the mudguards also.
The lower links lift or lower as long as you press the corresponding button.
DANGER: When attaching or releasing implements, always stand
outside the implement and beside the tractor. Never stand on the
implement or between the implement and the tractor.
CAUTION: The lifting height selector does not limit the lifting
height when the lift/lower push buttons are used.

- 179 -
3. Operation

3. Connect the implement.

DANGER: The implement has to be mechanically connected to
the tractor (the lower links and the top link) before connecting the
quick-action couplings.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the implement is correctly attached and that it
does not hit the the other parts of the tractor when lifted to the selected
transport height.
Check links must be locked with pins when transporting implements that are
carried by the three-point linkage.
Make sure that at least 20% of the total combination weight rests on the front
wheels. When needed, use a sufficient number of front ballast weights.
4. Follow the implement manufacturer’s instructions.
Correct adjustment of harrows, ploughs and cultivators reduces the required
tractor power. An incorrectly adjusted plough, for instance, creates a badly
shaped furrow, tends to twist the tractor away from the travelling direction,
increases fuel consumption and wastes power due to wheel slip.
5. Activate the control system with the lift/stop/lower switch.
After using the lift/lower push buttons, you have to activate the position
control system again.

3.13.2 Adjusting lifting links

IMPORTANT: When adjusting the lifting links, make sure that they do not hit the
tractor.

GUID-DDA838C1-6B23-40E7-A263-B6EB1216A494

1. Adjust the linkage in to the position that there is no load on the lifting links.
2. Lift up the levelling screws and turn them in the required direction to adjust
the length of the lifting links.
3. Lower the levelling screws back to the locked position after adjustment.

- 180 -
 3. Operation

3.13.3 Adjusting lower links

1 2

GUID-D7DB9949-AD41-4137-B710-8AE300E55DAD

1. Carrier pin position providing fixed position of lower links

2. Carrier pin position allowing slight vertical movement of lower links

1. Remove the lock pin and pull out the carrier pin.
2. Attach the lifting links to the lower links in one of the four holes.
Different holes give different lifting ranges and lifting power for the lower links.
You can attach the carrier pin to the lower links in two different positions. One
provides a fixed position and the other allows a slight vertical movement of
the lower links.

3.13.4 Adjusting check links

3.13.4.1 Adjusting the check links' lenght

Use check links to limit the distance between the lower links.

- 181 -
3. Operation

GUID-2A50FEF4-EB2C-44B2-839A-2C02C9D5AEC9

1. Attaching pin
2. Limiter sleeves

1. To obtain different lateral distances between the lower links, change the
position of the check link attaching pin.
If the pins are fitted in the long holes, the lower links have a floating position
in the lateral direction.
2. If necessary, detach the limiter sleeves.
Check that links with wide tyres and narrow track widths are equipped with
limiter sleeves so that the lower links do not come into contact with the tyres.

3.13.4.2 Adjusting the check links' support

You can adjust the check links' support to two different positions.

GUID-483E0119-D7B1-46B1-BD12-B8C10832EC05

1. Screw

- 182 -
 3. Operation

1. Unscrew the screws.

2. Change the position of the check links' support.
The position should be the same on both sides of the tractor.
3. Tighten all screws.

3.13.5 Automatic check links

The automatic check links are used to limit the distance between the lower links.
The automatic check links are extra equipment.
There are two types of automatic check links available, one adjusted with thread
and another adjusted with a locking pin.

NOTE: Adjust the check links so that they do not come into contact with the rear
wheels.

3.13.5.1 Adjusting thread-adjustable check links

1. Unfasten the closure pin.

GUID-53123B07-BC4B-4579-987D-A82A2E125F10

1. Closure pin

2. Turn up the link.

GUID-5544ECF6-E0D3-494E-ABB3-4801D2E7C410

1. Link

- 183 -
3. Operation

3. Lift up the turning handle.

1
GUID-27DAF850-6E21-4D33-8448-AB0744D008C5

1. Turning handle

4. Adjust the length of the check link by turning the handle.

IMPORTANT: If you shorten the right lifting link, check that the side limiter
does not hit the tractor when the lifting link is raised to maximum height.

GUID-9FD97BA9-F391-4D73-A222-E5B0C4A5092F

1. Turning handle

5. After completing the adjustment, perform the steps in the reverse order.
6. Lock the check link adjustment with the closure pin.

3.13.5.2 Adjusting pin-adjustable check links

GUID-E4F4874B-2E1E-4964-A436-5A9582FC62A9

1. Locking pin

1. Pull out the locking pin.

2. Adjust the length of the check link.

- 184 -
 3. Operation

3. Put the locking pin back to lock the length of the link.

3.13.5.3 Using the floating position of automatic check links

GUID-0F9605D1-A348-47F5-8DFC-73A0939162EE

1. Holding chain
2. Link

• Adjust the length of the link’s holding chain.

Adjustment is done by changing the attachment point of the holding chain.
This adjustment defines the height of the lower links where the check links lock.
• Adjust the length of the check links to get the right amount of float.
• Lower the implement to working position to allow floating.
• Lift the implement to transport position to lock the check links.

3.13.6 Using quick couplings for lower links

1. Pull the lever to release the implement.

GUID-B34D35B4-E0CE-4463-B721-C6B3DB17C240

- 185 -
3. Operation

2. You can leave the lock open by pulling the lever backwards (for example
when demounting an implement).

GUID-56C9DF34-89D5-4D27-9623-1EDC391238A8

3. Release the lock by pulling the lever forward.

GUID-6BE1B613-7FB8-4BED-8071-6BBBAEFF057C

The ball joints lock automatically when attaching the implement.

In the locked position the clamp is in view and the lever is in the lower
position.

1
2

GUID-7C6C6026-FF87-4620-A22D-6D406A2FF39E

1. Lever
2. Clamp

DANGER: Clean the quick couplings and ball joints before

attaching an implement. There is risk that the implement is not
attached properly.
The quick couplings can be controlled in the cab using a release cable.

3.13.6.1 Setting the release cable for lower link quick couplings
Release cable for lower link quick couplings is extra equipment. To be able to
unlatch the hook type ends from the cab, the release cable must be attached via
the holes on the three-point linkage unit.

- 186 -
 3. Operation

2 2
1

3 3

4 4

GUID-12DD1F53-CCDB-44B1-BE5F-F3C6DD58B55F

1. Release cable
2. Socket bracket
3. Loop on the lifting link
4. Quick coupling lock

1. Fasten the release cable to the socket bracket on the cab rear wall.
2. Pass the release cable through the loop on the lifting link.
3. Fasten the release cable to the quick coupling lock.

- 187 -
3. Operation

3.14 Auxiliary hydraulics

GUID-0417C87D-F561-4876-ABD9-FB758B3A8E3B

1. Return coupling
2. Standard on/off valve
3. Standard rear valves 1 and 2
4. Rear valves 3 and 4 (extra equipment)
5. Power Beyond couplings (extra equipment)

All the auxiliary hydraulics standard and extra equipment valves are electrically
controlled.
Standard valves on the rear side:
• One on/off valve
• Two valves with joystick control
Return coupling
The tractor is equipped with an auxiliary hydraulic return coupling (1/2 inch). If the
back pressure is higher, a 3/4 (standard with 160 l/min pump) and 1-inch coupling
is also available as extra equipment.
Extra equipment valves on the rear side:
• One on/off valve
• Two valves with control lever (3 and 4)
• Power Beyond couplings (when Power Beyond, always with two extra valves).
Extra equipment valves on the front side:
• Two valves with joystick control (1F and 2F)
• One valve with control lever (3F)
• Two change valves for simultaneous coupling of front linkage and front loader.

- 188 -
 3. Operation

3.14.1 Auxiliary hydraulic controls and functions

The auxiliary hydraulic controls are positioned on the armrest.

1 2

3 4 5 6
GUID-655B5707-71F6-485A-B07A-D2FF2F7AB815

1. Auxiliary hydraulics on/off push button

2. Selector for the predefined factory/user settings
3. Joystick functions selector
4. Joystick with push buttons
5. Control levers for valves 3 and 4
6. Control lever for the third front valve

All the standard and extra valves have the same functions, except for the on/off
valves.

WARNING: The programmable features of the joystick or other

controls MUST NOT be used to operate a loader. In order to prevent
involuntary loader motion, the loader joystick controller must be of a self-
neutralising type. When the operator releases his grip on the joystick,
the joystick must return to a non-operational neutral position - except
for float detent position in the loader lower direction.

You can adjust the following properties of the auxiliary hydraulics valves through
the tractor terminal display on the armrest:
• Position lock:
• You can lock a valve function in the ON position.
• Position lock hold time:
• You can set a timer for a valve function to hold the position lock for a
particular time between 0-60 seconds or select continuous position lock.
• Floating position, only in the (-) port:
• You can set the valve in floating position where the valve allows an
implement to move freely, for example to follow the ground level.
• Flow adjustment:

- 189 -
3. Operation

• You can adjust the output of the flow through the valve by selecting
either one of the three factory settings or saving your own user settings.
• The output stays as adjusted independent of the other valves if the
pump output has enough capacity.
• Single-action:
• You can set a valve to be used as a single-action valve by connecting
an external device to one coupling only.

3.14.2 Activating and deactivating the auxiliary hydraulics

DANGER: To prevent accidental auxiliary hydraulics control
movements, always turn off the auxiliary hydraulics during road driving
and during work if you do not need it.

ON/OFF 2

GUID-81F9EA69-748F-4BF4-9F22-D3E06167959A

1. Auxiliary hydraulics on/off push button

2. Indicator light

• To activate the auxiliary hydraulics, press the on/off push button.

The indicator light on the push button is lit.
NOTE: Keep the auxiliary hydraulics on only when needed.

• To deactivate the auxiliary hydraulics, press the on/off push button.

The indicator light goes out.
IMPORTANT: The off function can be used as an emergency stop for the
auxiliary hydraulics.

3.14.3 Selecting joystick functions for auxiliary hydraulics

OFF
GUID-20FD5BA5-7BCA-4C18-A723-03A7F98A292B

1. Joystick functions selector

- 190 -
 3. Operation

You can select which auxiliary hydraulic valves to control with the joystick, or you
can turn the joystick functions off.

WARNING: The programmable features of the joystick or other

controls MUST NOT be used to operate a loader. In order to prevent
involuntary loader motion, the loader joystick controller must be of a self-
neutralising type. When the operator releases his grip on the joystick,
the joystick must return to a non-operational neutral position - except
for float detent position in the loader lower direction.

NOTE: For safety reasons the position locks of valves 1F and 2F cannot be
activated in front loader use. If the tractor is equipped with a change-over switch
for front linkage/front loader, the position lock settings of the related valves are
deactivated when you turn the change-over switch to the front loader position.

• Select OFF to deactivate the joystick.

• Select the icon to control the rear hydraulic valves 1 and 2.

• Select the icon to control the front hydraulic valves 1F and 2F (extra
equipment).

3.14.4 Controlling the auxiliary hydraulics rear valves 1 and 2 and front
valves 1F and 2F
You can control rear valves 1 and 2 or front valves 1F and 2F with the joystick.
Use the joystick functions selector to choose the valves.

1 2
2
-
+

auto

1
-
auto
+

GUID-2D9A4E14-65A8-4951-895D-065C788D201F

1. Joystick movement to control rear valve 2 and front valve 2F.

2. Joystick movement to control rear valve 1 and front valve 1F.

WARNING: The programmable features of the joystick or other

controls MUST NOT be used to operate a loader. In order to prevent
involuntary loader motion, the loader joystick controller must be of a self-
neutralising type. When the operator releases his grip on the joystick,
the joystick must return to a non-operational neutral position - except
for float detent position in the loader lower direction.

- 191 -
3. Operation

WARNING: Do not unnecessarily activate the programmed position

locks for the valves that are used by the joystick. There is a risk of
engaging the position lock.

IMPORTANT: Do not turn the joystick round its vertical axis, because the joystick
may get damaged and the wires can break.

1. To activate the position lock or the floating position, push the joystick in the
desired direction and to the extreme position for less than 1 second.
2. Release the joystick.
If you hold the joystick in its extreme position for more than 1 second, the
output starts to follow the joystick movements.

3.14.5 Controlling the rear valve 1 from rear mudguard push buttons
You can control the auxiliary hydraulic functions on the rear valve 1 from outside
the cab by using the push buttons on the rear mudguards. This is useful, for
example, for adjusting the length of a hydraulic top link when attaching implements.
Before you start, you have to activate the auxiliary hydraulics with the auxiliary
hydraulics on/off push button.

IMPORTANT: Using the rear mudguard push buttons is permitted only with
driving speeds lower than the safety limit of 2 km/h. If you try to use the push
buttons with higher driving speeds, the buttons are disabled and an error code is
shown on the tractor terminal display. The buttons remain disabled until you stop
the engine and the tractor terminal shuts down.

When the rear mudguard push buttons are used, the oil flow is limited to 30% of
the selected predefined factory/user settings for auxiliary hydraulics. You cannot
activate any other hydraulic functions at the same time.

1 2

GUID-BA3D4956-5C69-4B22-AB15-57F47C6A6AC7

1. Push button (blue) for controlling the + port of the rear valve 1
2. Push button (green) for controlling the – port of the rear valve 1

The order of the push buttons is the same on both the left and right side mudguards.

- 192 -
 3. Operation

1. Press the left (blue) push button 1 on the rear mudguard to increase the
pressure in the (+) port of the rear valve 1.
2. Press the right (green) button 1 on the rear mudguard to increase the
pressure in the (-) port of rear valve 1.

3.14.6 Controlling the auxiliary hydraulics rear valves 3 and 4 and the
front valve 3F
You can control the rear valves 3 and 4, and the front valve 3F, with the control
levers.
The rear valves 3 and 4, and the front valve 3F (extra equipment), are always
active when the auxiliary hydraulics is activated with the on/off push button.
• To use the lifting function (+), pull the control lever towards yourself.
• To use the lowering function (-), push the control lever away from yourself.
• To activate the position lock or the floating-position:
• Push the joystick in the wanted direction and to the extreme position.
Push the joystick past the max. flow point with increased force to lock it in
the extreme position. The lever stays in the extreme position even if the
timer is not working.
• Return the lever manually to the middle position.

3.14.7 Selecting predefined settings for auxiliary hydraulics valves

You can select one of the three predefined factory settings or your own user
settings for auxiliary hydraulics valves.

3 M1 M2 M3

1
5
GUID-B1860AA5-B57D-4348-ADDF-DF48846F1A0F

1. Factory setting for slow output

2. Factory setting for medium output
3. Factory setting for maximum output
4. Memory positions for predefined user settings
5. Selector for the predefined factory/user settings

• To select one of the three predefined factory settings, turn the selector to one
of the three factory defined positions.
• To select one of the three predefined user settings, turn the selector to one of
the positions M1, M2 and M3/U-Pilot.

- 193 -
3. Operation

3.14.7.1 Factory settings for auxiliary hydraulics

The factory settings are shown on the armrest display when the auxiliary
hydraulics has been activated, and one of the factory settings has been selected
with the selection switch.

3 M1 M2 M3

1
GUID-DB6451A2-209A-408B-AD7B-D50689F1FA09

1. Factory setting for slow output

2. Factory setting for medium output
3. Factory setting for maximum output
4. Selector for the predefined factory/user settings

In the factory settings, the maximum flow of all ports is limited to a fixed value:
• Slow output 10%
• Medium output 50%
• Maximum output 100%
You cannot change any values in the factory settings.

3.14.7.2 Defining user settings for auxiliary hydraulics

You can define your own user settings for auxiliary hydraulics functions. The user
settings are defined through the tractor terminal display on the armrest.

WARNING: The programmable features of the joystick or other

controls MUST NOT be used to operate a loader. In order to prevent
involuntary loader motion, the loader joystick controller must be of a self-
neutralising type. When the operator releases his grip on the joystick,
the joystick must return to a non-operational neutral position - except
for float detent position in the loader lower direction.

1. Return to the main menu by pressing ESC as many times as needed.

2. Select auxiliary hydraulics settings by pressing the right arrow button.

1
GUID-4B801A01-55BB-4FE9-847D-221BD22DE0BD

1. Auxiliary hydraulics settings

The auxiliary hydraulics settings are shown on the display.

- 194 -
 3. Operation

3. Select a memory place (M1, M2 or M3) with selector for the predefined factory/
user settings.
The settings are made in the selected memory place.
IMPORTANT: When using the valves of the auxiliary hydraulics with the U-
Pilot, the U-Pilot follows the settings of memory place M3.
The selected memory place is shown in the upper left corner of the display.
M1 % + % -
1 40 50
2 50 4 60
3 100 100
4
1F 100 100
2F 100 100
GUID-AE293602-7D40-494D-A8CC-C5959B5CA2D7

4. Select the valve point to be set with the arrow buttons.

5. Press OK to activate the valve point to be set.
A line starts to flash under it.
M1 % + % -
1 40 50
2 50 4 60
3 100 100
4
1F 100 100
2F 100 100
GUID-3CCA0018-F950-4970-A64A-54DB61741D7E

6. Set the value with the arrow button.

• To increase the value, press the up arrow.
• To decrease the value, press the down arrow.
By pressing an arrow key, the functions appear successively:
• Position lock time 1...60
• Position lock
• Floating (not in + port)
• No function active = empty
NOTE: For safety reasons the position locks of valves 1F and 2F cannot be
activated in front loader use. If the tractor is equipped with a change-over
switch for front linkage/front loader, the position lock settings of the related
valves are deactivated when you turn the change-over switch to the front
loader position.

7. Confirm or cancel the setting.

• To deactivate the active field and to restore the old value, press ESC.
• To deactivate the active field and to store the new value, press OK.

3.14.8 Activating and deactivating the position locking

You can activate or deactivate the position locking, or you can also interrupt the
timed position locking before the timer runs out. You can use the position lock for
operating an external hydraulic motor, for example.

- 195 -
3. Operation

M1 % + % -
1 40 50 23 1
2 50 4 60
3 100 100 2
4
1F 100 100
2F 100 100
GUID-2D6F8809-AC7D-427E-8A4B-7555DE30AB23

1. The first rear valve has a timed position lock for 23 seconds.
2. The third rear valve has a continuous position lock.

When the valve port has the position lock activated, the oil is flowing continuously
through the valve (out/in).
1. Set the time for the position locking (1-60 seconds) or select the symbol
continuous ∞ in the armrest display.
2. Activate the position locking either with the joystick or the lever.
• Push the joystick quickly to the extreme position in question.
• Turn the linear lever to the extreme position in question. The lever stays
in the extreme position.
3. To interrupt a timed position locking before the timer runs out:
• move the joystick it to the position in question.
• release the linear lever to the middle position.
WARNING: To avoid serious injury or death due to falling loads
resulting from inadvertent raising or roll-back of the loader, do not
connect loader hydraulics to any tractor auxiliary valve that has
detents which cannot be locked out or removed, except for the
float function in the loader lower circuit. If the tractor is equipped
with such a valve, a dedicated, properly configured loader valve
must be installed.

3.14.9 Activating and deactivating the floating position

You can activate and deactivate the floating position, or you can also interrupt the
timed floating position before the timer runs out.
M1 % + % -
1 40 50 23
2 50 4 60 1
3 100 100
4
1F 100 100
2F 100 100
GUID-194BA55E-38FA-4191-94A5-7AFBADD98BF4

1. The second rear valve is in the floating position.

When the valve port has the floating position activated, the oil circulates freely
and the implement follows the ground contours.
1. Adjust the wanted valve port and floating position in the armrest display.
2. Activate the floating position either with joystick or the linear lever.
• Push the joystick quickly to the extreme position in question.
• Turn the linear lever to the extreme position in question. The lever stays
in the extreme position.

- 196 -
 3. Operation

3. To interrupt the floating position function before the timer runs out:
• move the joystick it to the position in question.
• release the linear lever to the middle position.

3.14.10 Using a hydraulic valve as a single-action valve

You can use a hydraulic valve as a single-action valve for tipping, for example.
WARNING: Make sure that the valve for tipping does not have the
position lock on.

When using a hydraulic valve as a single-action valve, connect the hose of the
tipping device to the (+) coupling of the used valve.
1. To set pressure to the working device, move the respective valve lever to the
(+) direction.
The tipping device raises.
2. To remove the pressure from the working device, move the respective valve
lever to the (-) direction.
You can also use the float position for this action. This way you do not
pressurise the hydraulic pump.
The tipping device lowers.

3.14.11 Activating and deactivating the hydraulics assistant

The hydraulics assistant function increases the engine speed when added output
is required for hydraulics. You can use the hydraulics assistant with the automatic
driving mode.
Using the hydraulics assistant has no effect on the driving speed because the
system automatically reduces the transmission ratio.
You can activate and deactivate the hydraulics assistant in the tractor terminal
display transmission settings view.
1. Return to the main menu by pressing ESC as many times as needed.
2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set view.
3. Press the right arrow button in the set view to enter the transmission settings
view.
4. Move the navigation box to the hydraulics assistant position with the up or
down arrow button.
5. Press the right arrow button to select the hydraulics assistant status field.

- 197 -
3. Operation

6. Select the desired status of the hydraulics assistant by pressing the up or

down arrow button.

1800
cruise

ON 1
GUID-A1C2D840-EADE-44C5-9B59-0DE731A9AF00

1. Hydraulics assistant is activated.

7. Press the left arrow button two times to return to the transmission settings
view main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.

3.14.12 Using the auxiliary hydraulics on/off valves

By default, the tractor is equipped with one auxiliary hydraulics on/off valve. This
standard on/off valve controls the lowest quick-action couplings at the rear. You
can use the standard rear on/off valve to control the hydraulic top link, for example.
The rear on/off valve 2 is extra equipment. The implement is attached
permanently to this valve. You can use the rear on/off valve 2 to control the
levelling ram and hydraulic towing hook extension, for example.
You can control the on/off valves by rocker switches.
• The switches are active even if the auxiliary hydraulics is not activated.
• The switches have two positions and are spring returned.

CAUTION: In the spring returned position, both ports are connected

directly to the tank. This must be noticed when attaching implements
to the valve.

GUID-B304D9AC-736E-4267-84F6-001FC9A8AF31

1. Switch for rear on/off valve 1

2. Switch for rear on/off valve 2 (extra equipment)

1. Press down the symbol side of the switch to use the lifting function (+).

- 198 -
 3. Operation

2. Press down the side of the switch opposite to the symbol to use the lowering
function (-).
Push buttons on the rear mudguards that can be used for controlling the rear
on/off valve 1 are extra equipment. These buttons work in the same way as
the switch for rear on/off valve in the cab.

GUID-E62FC426-55AB-41DE-85AD-E4644C09A6CB

1. Push buttons (extra equipment) for the rear on/off valve 1

3.14.13 Using quick-action couplings

1. Ensure that the auxiliary hydraulics is activated.
2. Release the load from the auxiliary hydraulics (especially from the hydraulic
cylinders).
3. Stop the flow through the auxiliary hydraulics valves.
4. Set all the needed valves to the floating position.
WARNING: Before connecting or disconnecting the quick
couplings, adjust the valves into the floating position (the tractor
has to be running and the parking brake engaged).

5. Activate the floating positions in the needed valve ports on the minus (-) side.
The valves go to floating position, and the pressure exhausts from the quick-
action couplings.
6. Stop the engine.

- 199 -
3. Operation

7. Attach or release the quick-action couplings.

DANGER: When connecting auxiliary cylinders and hydraulic
motors, ensure that the hoses are attached to the correct
couplings. If you attache the hoses incorrectly, the functions are
reversed.
IMPORTANT: Use only couplings that comply to the standards.
IMPORTANT: Clean the quick-action couplings thoroughly before attaching
any auxiliary hydraulic equipment. The caps on the couplings must be fitted
when the auxiliary equipment is not attached.
NOTE: When attaching implements to the auxiliary hydraulics, connect the
return coupling of the implement to the return coupling of the tractor.
NOTE: Make sure that the quick coupling does not leak after disconnecting
the hose.

8. Start the engine.

WARNING: Do not transport anything on the auxiliary hydraulic
valves while driving on the road. The load, trailer link steering and
such have to be locked (for example mechanically).

3.14.14 Using Power Beyond couplings

The greatest possible hydraulic output can be achieved with the smallest
dissipation with the help of the Power Beyond couplings. This is suitable for
implements that have a load-sensing (LS) line for the tractor. The system
includes an LS coupling, in which the extra device load sensing system has to be
connected (LS line).

- 200 -
 3. Operation

1 2 3 4

GUID-4E672EB8-36A4-43DC-94AD-6FD47DA65DC6

1. Leakage connector for the hydraulic motor housing, male quick coupling 1/2”
(12.5 mm)
2. LS coupling, female quick coupling 3/8” (10 mm)
3. Pressure coupling, female quick coupling 3/4” (20 mm)
4. Free return coupling, male quick coupling 1” (25 mm)

The LS line has a connection to the tank when the quick coupling has not been
connected.
Use only couplings that comply to the standards.
1. Connect the tank hoses.
IMPORTANT: Always connect the tank hoses first and take them away last in
order to avoid damages in the hydraulics.

2. Connect the LS line hose connector of the implement to the LS line.

The pump pressure settles to a level determined by the LS pressure of the
implement. The pressure in the tractor is determined by the device that has
the highest LS pressure.
If the external implement (and any other device) is not used, the pump line
has only a pressure caused by the free circulation. Therefore, the pump is
not overloaded unnecessarily, the hydraulic oil does not overheat and fuel
consumption decreases.

3.14.15 Connecting an external hydraulic motor to the auxiliary hydraulics

You can attach a hydraulic motor to the tractor auxiliary hydraulics. The motor
can be rotated in one or both directions.
• To rotate the hydraulic motor in only one direction:
• Attach the return coupling to the tractor return coupling without the shock
valve.

- 201 -
3. Operation

• To rotate the hydraulic motor in both directions (if you are attaching the
couplings to both +/- ports):
• Mount the separate shock valves to the hydraulic motor if they are not
already standards in the hydraulic motor.

NOTE: Pay attention to the hydraulics oil temperature, because high

temperatures are bad for the lubrication and can damage the pump or the
engine. The recommended working temperature is below 80°C and the maximum
limit is 93°C. Stop the engine if the maximum temperature is reached. You can
follow the hydraulics oil temperature on the tractor terminal display.

3.15 Using the front linkage

IMPORTANT: You have to detach the front loader before using the front linkage.

6
ON/OFF 3 4 5
GUID-D3DE3B2F-81C7-429F-A50D-EB6755481DE9

1. Change-over switch for front linkage/front loader (extra equipment)

2. Auxiliary hydraulics on/off push button
3. Indicator light
4. Joystick functions selector
5. Joystick
6. Lift/lower push buttons

• Activate the auxiliary hydraulics by pressing the on/off push button.

The indicator light on the push button is lit.

• Turn the joystick functions selector to position .

• If the tractor is equipped with a change-over switch for front linkage/front

loader, press down the symbol side of the switch.
• To raise the front linkage, pull the joystick rearwards or press the lifting push
button.
• To lower the front linkage, push the joystick forwards or press the lowering
push button.

- 202 -
 3. Operation

• If the implement follows the ground, use the joystick to carefully lower down
the implement.
• Set the valve to the floating position by briefly (less than one second)
pushing the joystick into the forward position.
IMPORTANT: Always use the floating position for implements following the
ground contour. Otherwise there is a risk that the implement may get
damaged or the traction for the front wheels may be lost.

3.15.1 Setting front linkage lifting link positions

You can set the lifting links to different positions by attaching the fastening pins to
different holes and by turning the arms up or down.
WARNING: When you drive on public roads and there is no implement
on the front linkage, the lifting links have to be folded up.

IMPORTANT: When using the front loader, the front linkage lifting links must be
folded to the transport position.

2
1
1 2
GUID-DE5DD197-1BE1-4CCD-B670-C13661931724

1. Fastening hole for working position

2. Fastening hole for floating or transport position
3. Locking pin
Lifting link position Fastening pin location
Working Fastening pins are in holes 1.
Floating Fastening pins are in holes 2.
Transport Lifting links are folded up and fastening pins are in holes 2.

• Check that the locking pins of the fastening pins are in their positions when
the lifting links are mounted.
• When driving on public roads, with or without an implement, always lift the
front linkage fully up.

- 203 -
3. Operation

• When you drive on public roads and there is an implement on the front
linkage covering the headlights, the upper headlights (extra equipment) have
to be switched on.

3.16 Using the Valtra front loader

Valtra front loader is extra equipment.
WARNING: The programmable features of the joystick or other
controls MUST NOT be used to operate a loader. In order to prevent
involuntary loader motion, the loader joystick controller must be of a self-
neutralising type. When the operator releases his grip on the joystick,
the joystick must return to a non-operational neutral position - except
for float detent position in the loader lower direction.

ON/OFF 2
3 4 5

GUID-B6E3BD3D-0953-492C-A975-2C4ACE8B6E47

1. Auxiliary hydraulics on/off push button

2. Indicator light
3. Joystick functions selector
4. Joystick with upper and lower contact buttons
5. Change-over switch for front linkage/front loader (extra equipment)

• Activate the auxiliary hydraulics by pressing the on/off push button.

The indicator light on the push button is lit.

• Switch the joystick functions selector to position .

• If the tractor is equipped with a front linkage/front loader change-over switch,

press down the side of the switch opposite to the symbol.
• To raise the front loader, pull the joystick rearwards.
• To lower the front loader, push the joystick forwards.
• To control the front loader tilt, move the joystick sideways.
• To tilt the loader rearwards, pull the joystick towards yourself.
• To tilt the loader forwards, push the joystick away from yourself.

- 204 -
 3. Operation

• To control the left quick couplings on the front part of the loader (extra
equipment), press the lower contact button.
By pressing the button and simultaneously turning the joystick sideways
towards yourself, the pressure is in the red connectors. By turning the
joystick away from yourself, the pressure is in the blue connectors.
• To control the right quick couplings on the front part of the loader (extra
equipment), press the upper contact button.
By pressing the button and simultaneously turning the joystick sideways
towards yourself, the pressure is in the red connectors. By turning the
joystick away from yourself, the pressure is in the blue connectors.

3.16.1 Using the Valtra Quick front loader coupling plate

The quick coupling plate is extra equipment.

GUID-8CB773BC-EC42-4B12-8AD5-5DBE5EAB2A6E

1. Hose multicoupler
2. Lock button
3. Lever

CAUTION: Hold on to the lever firmly as the pressure may cause the
coupler to hit your hand.

• To release the hose multicoupler, press down the lock button and turn the
lever to the open position.
• To attach the multicoupler, turn the lever to the closed position.
The lock button pops up.

- 205 -
3. Operation

3.16.2 Softdrive
The Softdrive function is extra equipment.

GUID-7AE16216-1BFC-4A92-884E-71C16BA6D6A3

1. Switch for Softdrive

With the Softdrive function, you can connect the pressure accumulators to the
cylinder circuits of the loader barrier. This means that when you drive, the
pressure accumulators even out the pressure peaks coming from the load on the
loader. This makes driving smoother and the stress on the loader and tractor is
reduced.
You can keep Softdrive connected during most working activities. It is
recommended that you disconnect Softdrive only if special precision is required.
The switch for Softdrive has two positions:
• When the symbol side is pressed down, the Softdrive function is on.
• When the side opposite to the symbol is pressed down, the Softdrive function
is off.

3.16.3 Locking the equipment

4
2 3
GUID-0CAA51CD-4528-48E9-A990-C8A8F12BC578

1. Equipment locking switch

2. Upper contact button
3. Lower contact button
4. Joystick

• To lock the equipment to the loader frame:

• Simultaneously press the symbol side of the switch and the lower contact
button and move the joystick to the left.
• To release the equipment from the loader frame:
• Simultaneously press the symbol side of the switch and the lower contact
button and move the joystick to the right.

- 206 -
 3. Operation

3.16.4 Controlling the extra cylinder with the change valve

You can open and close for example the press for bales using the change valve.

1 2
GUID-3E125B74-C1D6-40F6-872B-251D0CAD6E30

1. Lower contact button

2. Joystick

• To close, simultaneously press the lower contact button and move the
joystick to the left.
• To open, simultaneously press the lower contact button and move the
joystick to the right.

3.17 Power take-off

3.17.1 Attaching implements to the power take-off
Before attaching implements to the tractor power take-off (PTO), make sure the
implement is designed for the used PTO speed (540 rpm or 1 000 rpm).
CAUTION: Observe all safety precautions in any operation involving
implements driven by the power take-off (PTO).

WARNING: Stop the engine and disengage the power take-off (PTO)
before attaching any implement to the tractor. Check that the
implement’s working area is clear before engaging the PTO.

WARNING: When a power take-off (PTO) driven implement is being

used, no personnel are allowed near the PTO shaft. Service work on
the PTO shaft should be carried out only with the PTO disengaged,
the engine stopped and the ignition key removed from the ignition
switch.

- 207 -
3. Operation

GUID-FB8D41A2-6747-4662-A5BA-6543E28A84A1

WARNING: After the power take-off (PTO) is disengaged, the

implement continues to rotate for some time (regardless of braking).
Do not approach the implement until it has stopped completely.

WARNING: The cover over the power take-off (PTO) shaft end should
always be attached when the PTO is not in use.

GUID-D381CC58-1E06-49BB-8F80-32FBB58821E1

1. Cover

WARNING: If the tractor engine stops for example due to overloading

when using the PTO, turn the power off before restarting. This
prevents an unintentional engagement of the PTO.

- 208 -
 3. Operation

• Make sure that the length of the PTO shaft is correct for the PTO-driven
implements to be used.
The shaft must be able to work at full deflection vertically and horizontally.
IMPORTANT: A shaft that is too long can cause damage.

• Install the PTO shaft according to the manufacturer's instructions.

DANGER: When fastening the power take-off (PTO) shaft, check
that its shield is undamaged. Attach the shield to a stationary part
of the tractor frame or implement.

• Attach the PTO-driven implement to the tractor.

IMPORTANT: Attach the implement to the tractor before connecting the
power take-off (PTO) shaft between the tractor and the implement. Otherwise
the implement can start to rotate with the PTO shaft.

• Engage the PTO at a low engine speed to protect the PTO.

• In freezing weather, ensure that the transmission oil and hydraulic oil are
warm before engaging the PTO.
Before engaging the PTO in freezing weather:
• let the engine run for a few minutes to warm up the transmission oil
• let the hydraulic oil warm up for a few minutes with the maximum flow of
50%. To adjust the flow, select the factory setting for medium output
(50%) with the selector for the predefined factory/user settings.
• When engaging the PTO, wait approximately 5 seconds until the clutch of the
PTO shaft is totally engaged before loading it.

3.17.2 Rear power take-off

You can use power take-off (PTO) to transmit power from the tractor to an
implement.
The PTO shaft is a splined driveshaft that is easily connected and disconnected.
The rear power take-off controls are the following:

3
GUID-8BB6C17F-A0FC-4582-AC50-21B745D057DB

1. Switch for rear PTO

2. Switch for rear PTO automatic stop
3. Speed control lever for the rear PTO

The rear PTO on/off push button on the rear mudguard is extra equipment:

- 209 -
3. Operation

GUID-4958FCFB-0B02-4AE3-A231-8C8F0D00D3C3

1. Rear PTO on/off push button

3.17.2.1 Recommended rear power take-off shafts

Both the power take-off (PTO) nominal speeds can be used regardless of the
type of shaft installed on the tractor.
Implements for 540 rpm (at engine speed of 1 874 rpm)
Normally a 6-spline shaft with a diameter of 1⅜" (35 mm) is recommended.
The ISO norm does not limit the power of a 540 rpm 6-spline PTO shaft with a
diameter of 1⅜” (35 mm).
NOTE: For power over 67 hp (50 kW), use a 1 000 rpm output to ensure
durability of the PTO shafts.

Implements for 1 000 rpm (at engine speed of 2 000 rpm)

Normally a 21-spline shaft (extra equipment) with a diameter of 35 mm is
recommended.
Heavy use
Normally a 20-spline shaft with a diameter of 45 mm is recommended. If
necessary, a torque limiting clutch with the maximum torque of 1 000 Nm should
be used.

- 210 -
 3. Operation

3.17.2.2 Activating rear power take-off

Before you can start the rear power take-off, you have to activate one of the rear
PTO speed ranges available on your tractor.

2
1

3
4
GUID-42E2DC1E-4E1E-4204-97B4-63C8E189C279

1. Rear PTO speed 540

2. Speed control lever for the rear PTO
3. Rear PTO speed 1000
4. Ground speed PTO

• Select the PTO speed with the control lever.

The tractor has one of the following PTO speed range alternatives:

PTO speed ranges Lever position Function

540/1 000 PTO 540 activated
540

Centre PTO deactivated

PTO 1000 activated
1000

1 000/540E PTO 1000 activated

1000

Centre PTO deactivated

PTO 540E activated
540E

540/540E PTO 540 activated

540

Centre PTO deactivated

PTO 540E activated
540E

IMPORTANT: When using the speed 540E, the shaft speed of 540 rpm is
achieved with an engine speed of 1 539 rpm. If the engine speed is
accelerated, the power take-off (PTO) shaft speed can rise up to 800 rpm.

The indicator light flashes on the instrument panel when the rear PTO
has been activated. The light is lit continuously when the rear PTO is engaged.
• Activate the ground speed PTO (alternative equipment) by moving the lever
to the position.

- 211 -
3. Operation

3.17.2.3 Starting rear power take-off

You can start the power take-off (PTO) after you have activated the PTO by
selecting the PTO speed with the speed control lever.
You can start the rear PTO in two ways:
• By using the PTO switch. The PTO switch is spring-returned and has three
positions: start/standby/off.
• By using the rear PTO on/off push button (extra equipment) on the rear
mudguard.

• To start the rear PTO with the PTO switch:

• Activate the standby mode by setting the rear PTO switch to the standby
(centre) position.
• Start the rear PTO by pressing down the symbol side of the PTO switch
and releasing it.
The indicator light on the instrument panel is lit.

GUID-03DFC136-DC36-499B-B8BF-39092B23B90C

1. Switch for rear PTO

• To start the rear PTO with the rear PTO on/off push button (extra equipment):

GUID-4958FCFB-0B02-4AE3-A231-8C8F0D00D3C3

1. Rear PTO on/off push button

• Set the rear PTO switch to the standby position (centre) before leaving
the tractor.
• Press the rear PTO on/off push button continuously for at least 3 seconds.
The PTO starting begins after 0.5 seconds. If the pressing is interrupted
during these 3 seconds, the PTO stops.

- 212 -
 3. Operation

3.17.2.4 Stopping rear power take-off temporarily

You can stop the rear power take-off (PTO) temporarily in the following ways:
• By using the rear PTO switch.
• By using the rear PTO speed control lever.
• By using the rear PTO on/off push button (extra equipment) on the rear
mudguard.

WARNING: When you do not need the power take-off (PTO), keep the
PTO switch in off position.

WARNING: Use the power take-off (PTO) speed control lever for the
actual disengagement and engagement of the PTO. For example,
when leaving the cab, move the lever to the centre position, except
when using the PTO on/off push button on the mudguard (extra
equipment).

• To stop the rear PTO temporarily:

• Press down the symbol side of the PTO switch and release it.

GUID-03DFC136-DC36-499B-B8BF-39092B23B90C

1. Switch for rear PTO

• Push the PTO speed control lever towards the side panel to disengage
the PTO. This is useful when you must stop the PTO fast, for example in
an emergency.
• Press the rear PTO on/off push button on the rear mudguard once. After
this, the rear PTO on/off push button operates as a start button when
pressed for more than 3 seconds.
The indicator light on the instrument panel flashes indicating that the
PTO speed control lever is engaged. Using the PTO switch, the
disengagement is only temporary.

3.17.2.5 Deactivating rear power take-off

WARNING: When you do not need the power take-off (PTO), keep the
PTO switch in off position.

WARNING: Use the power take-off (PTO) speed control lever for the
actual disengagement and engagement of the PTO. For example,
when leaving the cab, move the lever to the centre position, except

- 213 -
3. Operation

when using the PTO on/off push button on the mudguard (extra
equipment).

• To deactivate the rear PTO:

• Press down the side of the rear PTO switch opposite to the symbol.

GUID-03DFC136-DC36-499B-B8BF-39092B23B90C

1. Switch for rear PTO

• Move the PTO speed control lever to the centre position (PTO deactivated).

2
1

3
4
GUID-42E2DC1E-4E1E-4204-97B4-63C8E189C279

1. Rear PTO speed 540

2. Speed control lever for the rear PTO in centre position (PTO
deactivated)
3. Rear PTO speed 1000
4. Ground speed PTO

The rear PTO is deactivated, and the indicator light on the instrument panel goes
off.

3.17.2.6 Stopping the rear power take-off in emergency

In case of emergency, you can stop the rear PTO either by the speed control
lever for rear power take-off (PTO) or by the PTO emergency stop socket on the
rear wall outside the cab.
Before you start operating PTO-driven implements from outside the cab, make
sure you have the PTO emergency stop socket within reach. If you cannot reach
the PTO emergency stop socket from your operating position, it is recommended
that you attach a wire to the socket by which you can pull it out from distance.

- 214 -
 3. Operation

STOP

GUID-4A7A6F82-ED2C-4C80-A9EB-F55C8B38EDD8

1. PTO emergency stop socket

• To stop the PTO from inside the cab, push the speed control lever for rear
power take-off (PTO) towards the side panel to deactivate the PTO.
• To restart the PTO:
• Activate the PTO speed range by the speed control lever for rear PTO.
• Start the PTO by the rear PTO switch.
• To stop the PTO from outside the cab, pull out the PTO emergency stop socket.
• To restart the PTO after stopping it from the PTO emergency stop socket:
• Plug in the PTO emergency stop socket.
• Stop the tractor and turn off the power.
• Turn on the power and restart the tractor.
• Restart the PTO.

3.17.2.7 Using the rear power take-off automatic stop

The rear power take-off (PTO) automatic stop is useful in headland turns, for
example, where the implement needs to be raised temporarily and then lowered
back again.

GUID-228C1AF2-C0F6-4A04-A5CC-91840A908829

1. Switch for the rear PTO automatic stop

- 215 -
3. Operation

• To activate the PTO automatic stop, press the symbol side of the rear PTO
automatic stop switch down to the AUTO position.
The PTO disengages when the linkage is raised into the transport position
and the three-second delay time has passed. The PTO does not re-engage
even though the linkage is lowered.
NOTE: Start the power take-off (PTO) after an automatic stop.

GUID-03DFC136-DC36-499B-B8BF-39092B23B90C

1. Switch for rear PTO

• You can restart the PTO by pressing the symbol side of the PTO switch to
the start position.
• To deactivate the PTO automatic stop, press down the side of the rear PTO
automatic stop switch opposite to the symbol.

3.17.2.8 Proportional ground speed power take-off

The proportional ground speed power take-off (PTO) is alternative equipment.
CAUTION: When using the proportional ground speed power take-off
(PTO), the speed of the PTO shaft varies according to the
transmission speed of the tractor. When the tractor is reversed, the
PTO shaft also rotates in the reverse direction.

The faster rotating speed may damage the propeller shaft between tractor and
implement. The trailer should be equipped with a means of disconnecting the
drive from the trailer.
Before using a trailer with a powered axle, make sure that the drive is compatible
with the PTO of the tractor. The speed of the trailer should be 0-3% lower than
driving speed of the tractor.
For heavy proportional use it is recommended to use the 1¾” (45 mm) shaft.

You can engage the ground speed PTO by moving the control lever to the
position.
IMPORTANT: Do not engage the ground speed PTO when the tractor is moving.

IMPORTANT: If the power-take off (PTO) is activated and the PTO speed
exceeds 1 800 rpm, the buzzer alarm goes off and the warning light (exclamation
mark) on the instrument panel is lit. Should this occur, immediately decrease the
rpm to prevent damage to the rotating parts of the PTO.

- 216 -
 3. Operation

2
1

3
4
GUID-42E2DC1E-4E1E-4204-97B4-63C8E189C279

1. Rear PTO speed 540

2. Speed control lever for the rear PTO
3. Rear PTO speed 1000
4. Ground speed PTO

When the ground speed PTO is engaged, the switch for rear PTO does not
function, and the warning light on the instrument panel is not lit.

GUID-03DFC136-DC36-499B-B8BF-39092B23B90C

1. Switch for rear PTO

3.17.2.9 Adjusting the rear power take-off engagement

When working with heavily rotating implements, you can adjust the rear power take-
off (PTO) engagement in the tractor terminal transmission settings view. The
factory setting does not need to be changed for normal PTO use.

IMPORTANT: Make sure that the PTO shaft is suitable for heavy use.

1. Return to the main menu by pressing ESC as many times as needed.

2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set view.
3. Press the right arrow button in the set view to enter the transmission settings
view.

- 217 -
3. Operation

4. Move the navigation box to the PTO engagement adjustment position with
the up or down arrow button.
A short press moves the box in the selected direction one field at a time. A
long press moves the box in the selected direction continuously.

C D
AUTO

F R
10

40

4
START
GUID-ED4937AC-402E-4258-8F5E-6688577A114E

5. Press the right arrow button to select the PTO engagement adjustment value
field.
6. Set the rear PTO engagement value with the up or down arrow button.
The value range is between 0...5, where 0 is the factory setting.
The new value is activated. You cannot restore the previous settings.
7. Press the left arrow button two times to return to the transmission settings
view main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.

3.17.3 Front power take-off

Front power take-off (PTO) is only available with front linkage (extra equipment).

GUID-A5D4CE5C-93AE-41B9-B177-2D6473506E51

1. Oil cooler
2. Front PTO shaft

The front PTO shaft has a diameter of 35 mm with 6 splines. The front PTO is
equipped with a pump inside the housing and an oil cooler to prevent
overheating. The cooling system is equipped with a relief valve inside the housing
for cold conditions.

- 218 -
 3. Operation

GUID-A230586F-7BE6-4132-A410-5CFF6C71F633

IMPORTANT: The front power take-off (PTO) shaft's nominal rotating speed is 1
000 rpm and the rotating direction is to the left viewed from the front. Check that
the implement is compatible before attaching.

3.17.3.1 Activating and deactivating front power take-off

The front power take-off (PTO) switch is spring-returned and has three positions:
start/standby/off.

GUID-47AB0148-117D-4169-898E-B250620A2239

1. Switch for front PTO

• Activate the standby mode by placing the switch for front PTO to the standby
(centre) position.
• Start the front PTO by pressing down the symbol side of the switch for front
PTO.
• To stop the front PTO temporarily, press down the symbol side of the switch
for front PTO.
• To set the front PTO in standby mode, place the switch for front PTO in the
centre position.
• Deactivate the front PTO by pressing down the side of the switch opposite to
the symbol.

3.17.4 Power take-off cruise control

The power take-off (PTO) cruise control function saves the engine speed
corresponding to the current nominal PTO speed when the PTO speed is
selected. The function uses the previously used engine speed cruise control
memory slot. Engine speed cruise control, however, is not activated
automatically. When the engine speed cruise is activated, the maximum engine
speed is limited to the speed saved to the memory slot.
PTO cruise control can be activated from the tractor terminal menu. PTO cruise
control also functions with front PTO. If both rear and front PTO are engaged, the
one with the lower speed takes precedence.

- 219 -
3. Operation

3.17.4.1 Activating and deactivating the power take-off cruise control

1. If the tractor terminal main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times
as needed.
2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.
3. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.
NOTE: When the power shuttle lever is in parking brake position (P) you can
enter the transmission settings view by pressing the preprogramming button.

4. Move the navigation box to the power take-off (PTO) cruise control setting
cruise
position with the arrow buttons.

5. Select the desired status of the PTO cruise control by pressing the up or
down arrow button.

Cruise
1

C D
AUTO
10
F R
GUID-7A9A2834-5673-4BD7-85CD-C2E260E916A4

1. Setting for the PTO cruise control

• When the box is checked the PTO cruise control is activated.

• When the box is not checked the PTO cruise control is deactivated.
6. Press the left arrow button to return to the transmission settings view main level.
With a short press of the ESC button you can return directly to the main menu.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.

3.17.4.2 Using the power take-off cruise control

The power take-off (PTO) cruise control must be activated in the tractor terminal
transmission settings view.
1. Select the PTO speed.
The engine speed corresponding to the selected nominal PTO speed is
saved to the last used engine speed cruise control memory slot.
2. Start the PTO.
3. Activate the last used engine speed cruise control setting.
The engine speed rises to speed corresponding to the selected nominal PTO
speed. The maximum engine speed is also limited to this value.

- 220 -
 3. Operation

3.18 U-Pilot headland automatics

The aim of the U-Pilot system is to automate a group of often used functions. A
typical example is a headland turn.
The idea of the system is that the operator runs the whole operational cycle
pressing the switches for the required functions. The cycle is stored in system
memory. After this, the operational cycle can be started with one press of a
switch.
The system also has an on-line/programmable PAUSE function that is activated
with the U-Pilot engage/pause switch in the arm rest. Pressing the U-Pilot engage/
pause switch stops the operation momentarily. Pressing the switch again
continues the operation.
The functions activated with the switches and the travelled distances between the
functions are stored in system memory. The actual driving speed can differ from
the driving speed used during programming the U-Pilot, but the distances
between the different functions are kept the same. The time intervals between the
programmed functions can therefore also differ from the programmed time
intervals.

DANGER: When using the U-Pilot, the functions of an operational

cycle start automatically. Ensure that nobody is in the hazard area.

CAUTION: The switches on the side panel do not show the status of
the equipment when using the U-pilot.

IMPORTANT: Check that the programme is for the intended work and that all the
switches and controls are in the same position as when the programme was
recorded.

3.18.1 U-Pilot operating requirements

For the U-Pilot to work properly, certain requirements have to be met.
• The driving speed must be 0.5-20 km/h.
• The maximum amount of operations for one operation cycle is 30.
• The maximum distance for an operation cycle is 100 m without a pause.
• The maximum distance between the starts of two consecutive functions is
63.5 m.
• The distance is measured with the accuracy of 0.5 m. The minimum distance
between different functions is 0.5 m even if the function switches were
pressed within a shorter distance.
• The maximum length of a pause is 5 minutes.

- 221 -
3. Operation

3.18.2 U-Pilot switches

2
3

GUID-5F3FECDF-4DC9-4245-BEA7-374C91069341

1. U-Pilot activation/recording switch

2. U-Pilot engage/pause button
3. U-Pilot stop button

The U-Pilot activation/recording switch has three positions (OFF/ON/REC):

• The side of the U-Pilot activation/recording switch opposite to the symbol
pressed down (OFF): U-Pilot is not in use.
• The middle position (ON): U-Pilot is in standby mode.
• The symbol side of the switch pressed down (spring returned; to release the
locking device, push it towards the midpoint) (REC): U-Pilot starts recording
or saving.

3.18.3 U-Pilot view

The U-Pilot view is shown on the tractor terminal display.

1 2 3

A 2.8
1/9 12.5m
10 ccruise
Cruise
13.0 2 1310 2

4 5 6
GUID-9C3F9F64-3208-42BC-85D4-BA782F7A1C20

1. Number of the operation

2. Total number of operations
3. Distance to the next operation
4. Symbol of the next/ongoing operation
5. Symbols of the recorded operations
6. U-Pilot symbol

The number of the operation/total number of operations and the distance to the
next operation are shown on the centre row of the tractor terminal display.

- 222 -
 3. Operation

The bottom row shows the symbols of the recorded operations (a maximum of 5
symbols are shown).
The symbol of the next/ongoing operation is shown on a dark background.
The U-Pilot view appears on the tractor terminal display automatically when the
activation/recording switch is set to the ON or REC position. Concurrently, the

warning light is lit on the instrument panel. Press ESC to return to the previous
functional view from the U-Pilot view. The U-Pilot symbol is shown on the tractor
terminal display. The view can be changed to any other view. You can switch
between the U-Pilot view and the normal split drive view easily by using the left or
right arrow button on the tractor terminal.

NOTE: To activate the U-Pilot view again, set the U-Pilot activation switch to OFF
and then to ON again.

3.18.4 U-Pilot view symbols

U-Pilot operations are indicated with symbols. The U-Pilot operation symbols,
settings and limitations are listed in the following table.
Symbol Operation Switch positions Limitation
Rear linkage up Rear linkage, stop or 1), 2)
lowering

Rear linkage down Rear linkage, stop or 1), 2)

lowering
R Rear linkage, Autocontrol Rear linkage, stop or
position on lowering
R Rear linkage, Autocontrol Rear linkage, stop or
position off lowering

Hydraulic valve 1R + Hydr. ON, joystick 1), 2)

backward, M3

Hydraulic valve 1R - Hydr. ON, joystick 1), 2)

backward, M3

Hydraulic valve 2R + Hydr. ON, joystick 1), 2)

backward, M3

Hydraulic valve 2R - Hydr. ON, joystick 1), 2)

backward, M3

Hydraulic valve 3R + Hydr. ON, M3 1), 2)

Hydraulic valve 3R - Hydr. ON, M3 1), 2)

Hydraulic valve 4R + Hydr. ON, M3 1), 2)

Hydraulic valve 4R - Hydr. ON, M3 1), 2)

Hydraulic valve 1F + Hydr. ON, joystick 1), 2)

forward, M3

Hydraulic valve 1F - Hydr. ON, joystick 1), 2)

forward, M3

Hydraulic valve 2F + Hydr. ON, joystick 1), 2)

forward, M3

Table continued on next page

- 223 -
3. Operation

Symbol Operation Switch positions Limitation

Hydraulic valve 2F - Hydr. ON, joystick 1), 2)
forward, M3

Hydraulic valve 3F + Hydr. ON, M3 1), 2)

Hydraulic valve 3F - Hydr. ON, M3 1), 2)

Front power take-off Standby position 1)

(PTO) on

Front PTO off Standby position 1)

Rear PTO on Standby position 1)

Rear PTO off Standby position 1)

cruise Cruise control 1 2)

(constant driving speed)
1 on
cruise Cruise control 2 2)
(constant driving speed)
2 on
cruise Cruise control (constant 2)
driving speed) off

cruise Cruise control 1 2)

(constant engine speed)
1 on
cruise Cruise control 2 2)
(constant engine speed)
2 on
cruise Cruise control (constant 2)
engine speed) off

Four-wheel drive (4WD) 3)

on

4WD off 3)

Differential lock on 3)

Differential lock off 3)

Power socket on Standby position 1)

Power socket off Standby position 1)

Pause in the recorded

programme

End of the recorded

programme

1) The system checks the correct positions of these switches before recording and playing. If the
position is incorrect, the symbol of the operation flashes on the display.
2) The system does not check the adjustments of this equipment; they must be checked and
adjusted by the operator.
3) If these operations are in the AUTO mode when recording, the operation is not recorded. If the
operation is recorded and the switch is turned to AUTO position before use, the switch is
dominant. In that case, the recorded operations of that switch do not occur.

- 224 -
 3. Operation

The PTO is an exception. If it is in the AUTO mode, a stop is recorded also when the PTO has
been stopped by the raise of the rear linkage. When used in the AUTO mode, the rear PTO is
stopped either by the programme or a raise of the rear linkage, whichever occurs first.

3.18.5 Recording a U-Pilot programme

When saving functions for auxiliary hydraulics make sure that the switches are in
the correct positions.
• The hydraulics switch is in the ON position (the indicator light is lit).
• The valve settings selector switch is in position M3. One of the valve
functions must be selected. If no function is selected, the setting cannot be
saved.
• When using rear valves, the joystick functions selector is in position .
• When using front valves, the joystick functions selector is in position . If
the tractor is equipped with a front loader, only the functions of valve 3F can
be saved.
• The symbol side of the 6/2 change-over switch has to be pressed down if the
tractor is equipped with both front linkage and a front loader.

3 4 5 6

7
GUID-5FBA37DF-69DB-420C-9691-1A682ABD1F1F

1. U-Pilot activation/recording switch

2. Change-over switch for front linkage/front loader (extra equipment)
3. Auxiliary hydraulics ON/OFF switch
4. Valve settings selector switch
5. U-Pilot engage/pause button
6. U-Pilot stop button
7. Joystick functions selector

1. Activate U-Pilot by switching the U-Pilot activation/recording switch on the

side panel to the centre position.

The symbol and the warning light are lit.

- 225 -
3. Operation

2. Start recording by pressing the symbol side of the U-Pilot activation/recording

switch (REC) shortly.
Release the locking device of the activation/recording switch by pushing it
towards the middle of the switch.
The text RECORD is displayed on the middle row of the tractor terminal

display. The warning light blinks.

GUID-F6E61341-FE70-49CF-8FEE-18987E2AB111

3. Perform the operations in the required order.

4. Press the U-Pilot engage/pause button to mark a pause when all the
operations preceding the turn are recorded.
The recording continues automatically when the next operation is activated.
5. Save the operation cycle.
When all the operations are recorded, press the symbol side of the U-Pilot
activation/recording switch for more than 2 seconds in order to save the cycle.
The text SAVED is displayed on the middle row of the display. The warning
light is lit.

GUID-46FCCB79-C014-4DDA-A205-4609CB314FA1

The lights of the U-Pilot engage/pause and stop buttons lit. The symbols of
the saved operations roll on the display.
The programme is stored and remains in the memory until it is replaced with a
new one.
NOTE: The memory can be cleared by starting the recording process and saving
a programme with no operations.

3.18.6 U-Pilot recording examples

The U-pilot can be used, for example, for programming a series of operations
when using a reversible plough, or for shifting an operation of a side panel switch
to the armrest.

- 226 -
 3. Operation

Example
Using a reversible plough
Lift of the plough

Four-wheel drive (4WD) off

Differential lock off

Reversion of the plough

Pause

Lowering of the plough

4WD on

Differential lock on

End of the recorded programme

Example
Shifting an operation of a side panel switch to the armrest
Rear power-take off (PTO) on

End of the recorded programme

3.18.7 Running the recorded U-Pilot programme

IMPORTANT: Check the position and adjustments of other switches before
starting the recorded programme. Check that the programme is for the intended
work. Check also that the auxiliary hydraulics settings in memory place M3 are
suitable for the U-Pilot programme in question.
If the work requires that the front power take-off (PTO) or the power socket is
used, set the switches to the standby position after programming.

IMPORTANT: When manually performing any operation that is included in the

recorded programme and that has a significant risk (linkages, power take-off
(PTO), hydraulics), the ongoing programme stops immediately and cannot
continue without reactivation.

Interruption of the recorded programme causes the following:

• The hydraulic operations controlled by the recorded programme are cancelled.
• The movement of the linkages is stopped.
• The PTOs are disengaged if they are included the recorded programme.
• The power socket is disconnected.

- 227 -
3. Operation

• The differential lock is disengaged.

• The cruise control is disengaged.
• The state of the four-wheel drive (4WD) does not change.
The text U-Pilot and the error code are shown on the display.
• Press the U-Pilot activation/recording switch to the middle position to activate
the U-Pilot.
The symbols of the saved programme roll on the bottom row of the tractor
terminal display. The number of the operation/total number of the operations
and the distance to the next operation roll on the centre row. The lights of the
U-Pilot activation/recording switch and the U-Pilot stop button are lit.
NOTE: The U-Pilot checks the position of the auxiliary hydraulics, linkage,
rear power take-off (PTO) and upper power socket switches. If a switch that
is included in the programme is in the wrong position, its symbol flashes on
the display.

Flashing symbol Switch settings

Hydralics ON

Joystick rear

Joystick front

Selector switch, valve settings

Change-over switch for front linkage/front loader,

the symbol side pressed down

Rear linkage stop or lift position

Rear PTO, standby position

Front PTO, standby position

Current socket, OFF position

Set the hydraulic valve control lever to the middle

(or a corresponding symbol for one of the position
other hydraulic valves)
Position lock applied to hydraulic valve

The symbol disappears when the switch is in the correct position.

• Press the U-Pilot engage/pause button to start the recorded programme.
The programme starts and continues until it is paused or the recorded

programme ends. The warning light is lit.

• To pause, press the U-Pilot engage/pause button any time during the
programme.
• To end a pause, press the U-Pilot engage/pause button again.

- 228 -
 3. Operation

• To end the recorded programme immediately, press the U-Pilot stop button.
The STOP text is shown on the tractor terminal display.

GUID-5856D889-0920-41D4-B6D6-E26B2BC705FE

The recorded programme cannot be resumed.

• To resume the recorded programme after it has been stopped, reactivate the
system by turning the U-Pilot activation/recording switch first to the OFF
position, and then to the ON position.
• To start the recorded programme from the beginning, press the U-Pilot engage/
pause button again.

3.18.8 U-Pilot error codes

The U-Pilot error codes indicate different error situations in the function of the U-
Pilot.
U-Pilot error codes are shown on the tractor terminal display.
Code Cause of error
U-Pilot 01 Recording or operation cancelled. Driving speed over 20 km/h.
U-Pilot 02 Recorded programme does not start. Driving speed over 20 km/h or under 0.5 km/h.
U-Pilot 03 Recording cancelled temporarily. Driving speed under 0.5 km/h.
U-Pilot 04 Not in use.
U-Pilot 05 Recording cancelled. Time limit 30 s for the driving speed under 0.5 km/h exceeded.
U-Pilot 06 Recording cancelled. Time limit 60 s for completing the first operation exceeded.
U-Pilot 07 Recording cancelled. Time limit 60 s for starting a new operation exceeded.
U-Pilot 08 Recording cancelled. Operator left the seat for more than 5 s.
U-Pilot 09 Recording cancelled. Distance between consecutive operations over 63.5 m.
U-Pilot 10 Recording cancelled. Travel length of the programme exceeds 100 m without a pause.
U-Pilot 11 Recording cancelled. Programme has more than 30 operations.
U-Pilot 12 Recorded programme cancelled. Operator left the seat for more than 5 s.
U-Pilot 13 Recorded programme cancelled. Time limit 10 s for the driving speed under 0.5 km/h
exceeded.
U-Pilot 14 Recorded programme cancelled. Time limit 300 s for a pause exceeded.
U-Pilot 15 Saving or deleting the programme failed.
U-Pilot 16 Malfunction in the valve of the auxiliary hydraulics.

To reset an error code you have to reactivate U-Pilot by setting the U-Pilot
activation/recording switch to the OFF position and then back to the ON position.
Pressing the tractor terminal ESC button will not reset the error code. The only
error code that does not have to be reset with the U-Pilot activation/recording
switch is error code 03, which resets automatically once the driving speed is
within acceptable limits.

- 229 -
3. Operation

3.19 Implement signal connection

The implement signal connection complies with the ISO 11786 standard.
The implement signal connection is extra equipment. The implement signal
connection is situated in the lower part of the right-hand side pillar in the cab.

1
GUID-3B93B1D4-E8C3-4598-B171-BE6DB92730AA

1. Implement signal connection

An implement connected to the connector can use the following tractor information:

1 2 3 4 5

6 7
GUID-42EFCF41-AD3F-4A1F-ABBD-E09459F4B722

1. Speed information of the radar, 130 pulses/m

2. Power supply max. 5 A
3. Rear linkage position (0–10 V)
4. In work (≤1.5 V)/out of work (≥6,3 V)
5. Rear power take-off (PTO) speed, 6 pulses/round
6. Transmission speed (wheel speed), 130 pulses/m
7. Ground

- 230 -
 3. Operation

GUID-50AD1616-7E3F-4416-847E-90CC41F08B72

1. Indicator light for the implement signal connection

When the indicator light for the implement signal connection is lit, the implement
signal system is in order.

3.19.1 Resetting the implement signal connection

If the implement signal connection (extra equipment) indicator blinks, the system
is in error mode and the connection must be reset.

GUID-50AD1616-7E3F-4416-847E-90CC41F08B72

1. Indicator light for implement signal connection

1. Stop the tractor.

2. Turn off the power.
3. Turn on the power.
4. Start the tractor.
5. If the light continues to blink, contact an authorised Valtra workshop.

3.20 Valtra ISOBUS

The Valtra ISOBUS implement control system (extra equipment) fulfils the
requirements of class 1.
The ISOBUS implement control system complies with the ISO 11783 standard.
The ISOBUS implement control system connects the tractor, the implement and
the ISOBUS terminal together. The system transfers information from the tractor
to the implement and vice versa.

- 231 -
3. Operation

1 2

3
4

GUID-DFB062C5-3EEE-4ECD-BFC7-61103D0CB33E

1. Mounting bracket
2. Mounting bracket
3. Bus extension connectors, ISOBUS system
4. ISOBUS terminal connector
5. Implement signal connection
6. ISOBUS implement connector, the front connector is extra equipment.

The Valtra ISOBUS controls the electric power of the system and the data
transfer between the tractor and the implement. This data includes:
• Power management
• Ignition switch state
• Maintenance of the power request. The implement connected to the
ISOBUS system can request the tractor to maintain power for the next
two seconds.
• Speed information
• Transmission speed, tractor speed calibrated from the tyres
• Speed information of the radar
• Engine speed
• Linkage information
• Rear linkage position
• Rear implement in-work indication
• Power take-off (PTO) information
• Rear PTO speed
• Rear PTO engagement
• Lighting information
• Direction indicators
• Marker lights (parking lights, side amber driving lights, number plate
lights and instrument and switch lights)
• Brake lights
• Tractor rear working lights
• Distance and driving direction

- 232 -
 3. Operation

• Distance based on information of the radar

• Distance based on tyre rotation
• Driving direction based on the power shuttle lever position
• Front linkage and front PTO
• Front PTO speed
• Front PTO engagement

3.20.1 ISOBUS implement connector

The ISOBUS implement connector is part of the ISOBUS implement control
system (extra equipment). The connector connects an ISOBUS compatible
implement to the ISOBUS system.
An extra connector is available with front linkage.

1 2 3 4

5 6 7 8 9
GUID-7595B300-8E9C-4545-9298-D38D3FEC87B2

1. Ground (GND)
2. Power supply for electronic control unit max. 15 A (ECU PWR)
3. Power supply max. 30 A (PWR)
4. Electronic control unit ground (ECU GND)
5. Not in use
6. Power supply for terminating bias circuit (TBC PWR)
7. Return path for terminating bias circuit (TBC RTN)
8. CAN H
9. CAN L

3.20.2 ISOBUS terminal connector

The ISOBUS terminal connector is part of the ISOBUS implement control system
(extra equipment). The connector is used to connect the terminal to the ISOBUS
system.
The connector includes both an ISOBUS data bus and a power supply.

- 233 -
3. Operation

1 2 3

5 6

7 8 9
GUID-6E07E5DC-9779-45C6-B12C-678AF3E33BA3

1. Not in use
2. CAN L
3. Not in use
4. CAN H
5. Not in use
6. Power supply for terminating bias circuit (TBC PWR)
7. Power supply for electronic control unit (ECU PWR)
8. Ground for terminating bias circuit (TBC GND)
9. Ground for electronic control unit (ECU GND)

3.20.3 Bus extension connectors

Bus extension connectors are part of the ISOBUS implement control system
(extra equipment). Normally the bus extension connectors are connected
together. They can also be used to connect additional ISOBUS devices to
ISOBUS (for example, ISOBUS GPS).

NOTE: If the bus extension connectors are disconnected, the ISOBUS implement
bus is broken and the system does not function properly. When connecting
additional ISOBUS devices, check that the bus stays intact (the bus extension
connectors are connected).

The connectors are located behind the cover, inside the B-pillar.

1 2 1 2

3 4 3 4
GUID-F19C60D2-B673-43DA-B723-EBCD7C76C681

1. Power supply for terminating bias circuit (TBC PWR)

2. CAN H
3. Return path for terminating bias circuit (TBC RTN)
4. CAN L

- 234 -
 3. Operation

3.20.4 Resetting the ISOBUS connection

If the ISOBUS connection (extra equipment) indicator blinks, the system is in
error mode and the connection must be reset.

GUID-50AD1616-7E3F-4416-847E-90CC41F08B72

1. Indicator light for ISOBUS connection

1. Stop the tractor.

2. Turn off the power.
3. Turn on the power.
4. Start the tractor.
5. If the light continues to blink, contact an authorised Valtra workshop.

3.21 Towing devices

3.21.1 Trailer hitch

3.21.1.1 Unlatching the trailer hitch equipped with mechanical unlatching

system
These instructions apply to both the standard trailer hitch and the Euro trailer
hitch (extra equipment) but not to the hydraulically extended Euro trailer hitch
(extra equipment).

- 235 -
3. Operation

2
GUID-DF19242C-D1E4-47FC-831F-E12349550AC4

1. Lift/lower push buttons

2. Hitch latch lever

1. Press the lift push button to fully raise the linkage.

2. Pull the hitch latch lever to unlatch the hitch.
Keep the lever pulled up.
3. Press the lower push button to lower the linkage.
4. Release the hitch latch lever.

3.21.1.2 Unlatching the trailer hitch equipped with hydraulic unlatching system
The hydraulic trailer hitch unlatching system is extra equipment.
These instructions apply to both the standard trailer hitch and the Euro trailer
hitch (extra equipment) but not to the hydraulically extended Euro trailer hitch
(extra equipment).

- 236 -
 3. Operation

1 2

4 5

6
GUID-943776B8-0B73-4677-9185-AA6FD02CF5B0

1. Lifting height selector

2. Draft control selector
3. Trailer hitch latch releasing switch
4. Lift/stop/lower switch
5. Passing switch for the position control knob
6. Position control knob

1. Set the lifting height selector to max position.

2. Set the draft control selector to position P.
3. Set the position control knob to position 8.
4. Press down the side opposite to the symbol of the lift/stop/lower switch.
5. Press down simultaneously the passing switch for the position control knob
and the trailer hitch latch releasing switch.
The trailer hitch latch unlatches.
6. Press down the symbol side of the lift/stop/lower switch.
NOTE: Make sure that the linkage is activated (the diagnose light is not lit).
Keep the trailer hitch latch releasing switch pressed down.
The linkage lowers below the latching point (to the position set by the position
control knob).
7. Release the trailer hitch latch releasing switch.
8. Use the position control knob to lower the linkage as required.

- 237 -
3. Operation

3.21.1.3 Latching the trailer hitch

These instructions apply to both the standard trailer hitch and the Euro trailer
hitch (extra equipment) but not to the hydraulically extended Euro trailer hitch
(extra equipment).The instructions apply also to both the mechanical and the
hydraulic (extra equipment) trailer hitch unlatching systems.

WARNING: When attaching any implements, check that the drawbar

eye engages the trailer hook correctly.

WARNING: Attach trailed single-axle vehicles to the trailer hitch. When

driving with the trailer on a horizontal slope, the drawbar eye must be
of the rotating type to prevent breakage.

IMPORTANT: Use only drawbar eyes which comply with the regulations and are
undamaged. When using other than allowed drawbar eyes, the warranty lapses
and the responsibility of the manufacturer is no longer valid.

GUID-15D314D8-BD49-4E64-AE13-9D69F14580E6

1. Lift push button

2. Lower push button

1. Reverse the tractor up to the trailer.

2. Align the hook with the trailer drawbar.
3. Press the lift push button until the hitch latches.
You can hear a click.
4. Lower the linkage slightly.
WARNING: When using a trailer, make sure that the hitch latch is
locked.
Ensure that the trailer is supported by the hitch latch and does not lower with
the linkage.

- 238 -
 3. Operation

5. Check the linkage position.

IMPORTANT: Adjust the linkage so that it does not hit the towed device at
any circumstance.

3.21.2 Agricultural drawbar

An agricultural drawbar is extra equipment. Several different models are available
according to the marketing areas.

GUID-4A36BA4E-C0E4-4DFD-B9F8-2E4B80E1A38F

The agricultural drawbar is used for towing implements where only part of the
implement weight is on the drawbar, for example balers. The maximum weight of
a drawbar implement is 5000 kg.
Agricultural towing device:
• One model for the trailer hitch and another model for tractors without the
trailer hitch.
• Adjustable to four different distances from the power take-off (PTO) shaft.
• In the two outer positions, the drawbar can also be adjusted ±12.5° and ±25°
laterally.
• The maximum permissible vertical load is 30 kN (drawbar in the forward
position) and 18 kN (drawbar in the rearmost position).
Light agricultural towing device:
• Only available for the trailer hitch.
• Adjustable to two different distances from the PTO shaft.
• In the outermost position, the drawbar can also be adjusted ±11° and ±22°
laterally, and to two different positions.
• The maximum permissible vertical load is 10 kN (drawbar in the forward
position) and 7.5 kN (drawbar in the rearmost position).

- 239 -
3. Operation

3.21.3 Scharmüller towing device

The Scharmüller towing device consists of a towing device frame, an agricultural
towing device and a locking.
WARNING: According to law, the operator has to ensure that all
relevant precautions are taken (lockings secured etc.).

2
3
GUID-A9D0874E-0675-4249-BC83-E599175C13F9

1. Towing device frame with a fixed hitch (Piton Fix)

2. Agricultural towing device
3. Locking

Locking to the trailer must be secured.

3.21.3.1 Adjusting the jaw height

The height of mechanical and automatic jaws is adjusted in the same way.
WARNING: You cannot change the jaw height if the lever is broken or
dirty. The jaw must be locked and secured every time the height is
changed.

- 240 -
 3. Operation

GUID-4CFBD8ED-2045-422B-866B-03BACD4973B1

1. Lever

1. Pull the lever upwards and turn it to the left.

2. Move the jaw into the wanted height.
3. Release the lever.
The locking pins lock the lever into the correct position with the help of the
returning springs.
You can also lift the jaw away from the frame by using the same lever.

- 241 -
3. Operation

3.21.3.2 Attaching to the mechanical jaw

You can attach a trailer to the mechanical jaw using the coupling lever.

GUID-24CCFE2A-AFFA-49EA-9BF2-F810A30DA7AE

1. Ring
2. Coupling lever

• Pull up the ring at the top of the coupling lever to lift up the drawbar.
WARNING: After attaching the trailer, check that the pulling pin is
completely down and locked.
WARNING: When using jaws where the towing pin is equipped
with a locking pin, make sure that the locking pin is locked when
attaching the trailer.

3.21.3.3 Attaching to the automatic jaw

You can attach a trailer to the automatic jaw using the lowering and lifting levers.
Use a solid drawbar because of the rotating jaw.
IMPORTANT: Use only drawbar eyes which comply with the regulations and are
undamaged. When using other than the allowed drawbar eyes, the warranty
lapses and the responsibility of the manufacturer is no more valid.

IMPORTANT: When using the hydraulic trailer hitch with the wagon device, do
not let the link of the trailer touch the drawbar body.

- 242 -
 3. Operation

GUID-90B7436B-F0FA-487B-931D-B5F086BEEC95

1. Towing pin lowering lever

2. Towing pin lifting lever

1. Lift the towing pin up.

To lift the pin, turn the lifting lever to the upper position.
2. Attach the trailer to the coupling.
When the draw eye reaches the bottom of the draw gap, the towing pin
automatically goes down. You can also lower the towing pin by pushing the
lowering lever downwards.
3. Check that the towing pin is locked.

2
GUID-BA8488DE-C3E5-4789-B584-23A51901F313

1. Towing pin not locked

2. Towing pin locked

WARNING: The drawbar pin is locked in the down position when

the security knob is out. When attaching the trailer, the drawbar
locking pin must be secured.

- 243 -
3. Operation

3.21.4 Euro trailer hitch

The Euro trailer hitch can be mounted instead of the standard trailer hitch.
The Euro trailer hitch is extra equipment.

4
GUID-5FB38332-E579-4B6E-BC52-4C811B27B6C0

1. Fastening pins
2. Euro trailer hitch
3. Implement attachment pin
4. Euro drawbar, extra equipment

The Euro trailer hitch can be changed to the Euro drawbar (extra equipment) by
removing the fastening pins.

IMPORTANT: Always secure the fastening pins with the locking pins on the top
side of the trailer hitch. This prevents the locking pins from getting stuck to any
objects such as tree branches on the ground that might open them accidentally.

When the hitch or drawbar is not in use, it can be fastened to the bracket.

GUID-C383B9AE-1A3A-494E-83CC-24E14388FD7B

1. Bracket

- 244 -
 3. Operation

3.21.5 Euro trailer hitch with hydraulic extension

The Euro trailer hitch with the hydraulic extension is otherwise similar to the Euro
trailer hitch, but you can move it hydraulically in longitudinal direction.

3.21.5.1 Unlatching the hydraulically extended Euro trailer hitch

1 2

4 5

6
GUID-943776B8-0B73-4677-9185-AA6FD02CF5B0

1. Lifting height selector

2. Draft control selector
3. Trailer hitch latch releasing switch
4. Lift/stop/lower switch
5. Passing switch for the position control knob
6. Position control knob

1. Set the lifting height selector to max position.

2. Set the draft control selector to position P.
3. Set the position control knob to position 8.
4. Press down the side opposite to the symbol of the lift/stop/lower switch.
5. Press down simultaneously the passing switch for the position control knob
and the trailer hitch latch releasing switch.
The trailer hitch latch unlatches.

- 245 -
3. Operation

6. Press down the symbol side of the lift/stop/lower switch.

NOTE: Make sure that the linkage is activated (the diagnose light is not lit).
Keep the trailer hitch latch releasing switch pressed down.
The linkage lowers below the latching point (to the position set by the position
control knob).
The locking indicator turns to the rear position and then to upright position
again.

GUID-A287F0D7-A9A8-415B-983D-65C5F82C34E9

1. Locking indicator

7. Release the trailer hitch latch releasing switch.

8. Use the position control knob to lower the linkage as required.

3.21.5.2 Extending the Euro trailer hitch

When the frame of the towing device is lowered, you can extend it hydraulically
backwards to make it easier to attach the hitch/drawbar to the drawbar eye. The
cylinder of the hydraulic extension is usually connected permanently to the rear on/
off valve 2 (extra equipment).

GUID-DFC0D961-2804-4BF8-AB8D-1EAE69072355

1. Switch for rear on/off valve 2 (extra equipment)

• Extend the towing device.

Press down the side opposite to the symbol of the switch for rear on/off valve
2.

- 246 -
 3. Operation

• Retract the towing device.

Press down the symbol side of the switch for rear on/off valve 2.

3.21.5.3 Latching the hydraulically extended Euro trailer hitch

WARNING: When attaching any implements, check that the drawbar

eye engages the trailer hook correctly.

WARNING: Attach trailed single-axle vehicles to the trailer hitch. When

driving with the trailer on a horizontal slope, the drawbar eye must be
of the rotating type to prevent breakage.

IMPORTANT: Use only drawbar eyes which comply with the regulations and are
undamaged. When using other than allowed drawbar eyes, the warranty lapses
and the responsibility of the manufacturer is no longer valid.

GUID-10BA67F3-F98E-4D90-95C8-669C9382A028

1. Lift/lower push buttons

2. Switch for rear on/off valve 2 (extra equipment)

1. Reverse the tractor up to the trailer.

2. Align the hook with the trailer drawbar.

- 247 -
3. Operation

3. Press the lift push button until the hitch latches.

GUID-A287F0D7-A9A8-415B-983D-65C5F82C34E9

1. Locking indicator

The locking indicator turns from the upright position to back position and then
to upright position again. The indicator doesn't turn fully upright position if the
towing device is extended.
You can hear a click when the hitch latches.
4. Press the lower push button to lower the linkage slightly.
Ensure that the hitch is supported by the latch and does not lower with the
linkage.
5. Press the symbol side of the on/off valve switch to retract the towing device.
The towing device extension locks and the locking indicator turns to upright
position.
6. Ensure that the towing device extension is locked.
• Press the opposite side to the symbol of the on/off valve switch.
Ensure that the towing device does not extend.
• Press the symbol side of the on/off valve switch.

- 248 -
 3. Operation

7. Ensure that the towing device is fully locked.

GUID-A2D6E079-2109-4B52-A213-FFCCF6667EFC

1. 2-6 mm
2. Extension locking pins
3. Locking indicator

The towing device is fully locked when the following conditions are fulfilled
simultaneously.
• The towing device is in the upmost position and supported by the latch
• The towing device is retracted and extension locking pins are down (the
distance of the roll pins from the frame is 2-6 mm)
• The locking indicator is fully upright.
NOTE: The locking indicator is also in the fully upright position when the
towing device is down.

8. Check the linkage position.

IMPORTANT: Adjust the linkage so that it does not hit the towed device at
any circumstance.

- 249 -
3. Operation

3.21.5.4 Changing the trailer hitch/draw

You can change the trailer hitch/draw. When the hook or jaw is not in use, you
can fasten it to the bracket on the rear side.
When using the Euro trailer hitch, the requirements for the drawbar eye are the
same as when using the trailer hitch.

GUID-7C1F6F2A-A954-4274-AA09-AAC13C1A68AF

1. Fastening pin

1. Lower down and extend the towing device.

2. Remove the fastening pin by pushing it from below.
3. Change the hitch/draw.
4. Attach the fastening pin.

3.22 Air pressure system

You can get pressurised air (8 bar) for external purposes, for example for filling
tyres, from the air pressure system (extra equipment).

GUID-D693A76C-B461-4940-82A2-67961561B6B1

1. Pressurised air quick coupling

You can also get compressed air from the air pressure coupling by turning it as
far as it goes. The air pressure coupling is located on the left side of the tractor
beside the pressure container. Through this coupling, you can also fill the system

- 250 -
 3. Operation

with outside compressed air, for example, when the compressor of the tractor is
broken. In this case, the coupling must not be turned as far as it goes.

GUID-BF1785E4-B3D4-4817-8E0E-2492CA8ED5FE

1. Air pressure coupling

IMPORTANT: Do not weld or drill the pressure container.

The pressure regulator is provided with a built-in pressure relief valve, which
operates if the pressure rises to 12-14 bar. For example, a broken pressure
regulator valve or a frozen or blocked filter can cause this situation.

4 6
2 8

0 10

1
GUID-7FD85F7E-9697-4C5D-866B-8C15C4B7E65E

1. Air pressure system pressure gauge

WARNING: The pressure of the air pressure system must be at its

maximum, about 7-8 bar, before driving a tractor with a trailer
equipped with air pressure brakes.

When the ambient temperature is below +5°C, the antifreeze container must be
filled with antifreeze liquid containing lubricant. The liquid streaming valve has to
be in the open position. The container and streaming valve are situated on the
top of the left axle housing.

- 251 -
3. Operation

1 3
0 0
1

GUID-81D17BC9-2C2E-4C1D-A507-C3BF0E2E5116

1. Antifreeze container
2. Liquid streaming valve
3. Open position

3.23 Trailer
Several factors affect the compatibility of a trailer.
The type of trailer that can be connected to the tractor depends, among other
things, on:
• The braking power of the tractor.
• Whether the trailer has brakes.
• How much of the trailer weight is on the hitch.
• Whether the trailer has one or more axles.
The total trailer weight is the load added to the empty trailer weight.
When loading the hitch, at least 20% of the tractor weight has to be on the front
wheels.
The maximum allowed wheel or hitch loading must not be exceeded.

WARNING: If the trailer hitch is worn out or otherwise damaged so

that the drawbar eye can come off the trailer hitch, the hook must be
replaced.

- 252 -
 3. Operation

3.23.1 Trailer air pressure brakes

When towing a trailer, you can increase the braking power with trailer air
pressure brakes.
The trailer air pressure brake system (extra equipment) is controlled by the
tractor brakes. The trailer brakes operate also when using the parking brake.

1 2 3 4

GUID-AAE43069-A1E8-465B-BFF9-DFF03DAB579D

1. Brake line coupling with yellow cover

2. Quick coupling for the output of the pressurised air
3. Brake line coupling with black cover
4. Container line coupling with red cover

On a two-hose system, the trailer is connected to two couplings:

• Container line with a red cover
• Brake line coupling with a yellow cover
On one-hose systems, the trailer is connected to the brake line coupling with a
black cover.
The Duo-Matic system has only one coupling to connect.

1 2

GUID-36373947-19C0-41B7-BCA3-1FFFA3D3B654

1. Quick coupling for the output of the pressurised air

2. Trailer coupling Duo-Matic

WARNING: When the tractor is towing a trailer, lock the brake pedals
together when driving on the road. When pressing one brake pedal
only, the brake action of the trailer is smaller.

- 253 -
3. Operation

WARNING: The pressure of the air pressure system must be at its

maximum, about 7-8 bar, before driving a tractor with a trailer
equipped with air pressure brakes.

When the trailer couplings are not in use, they must be covered.

3.23.2 Trailer fluid brake valve

The trailer fluid brake valve (extra equipment) operates with the low pressure of
the tractor hydraulics, controlled by the tractor brakes.
The trailer brakes are connected to the tractor with a quick-action coupling at the
rear part of the tractor.

GUID-C17D9805-AB65-48B1-AD51-E1AD8FC55AFF

1. Quick-action coupling for the trailer brakes

WARNING: When the tractor is towing a trailer, the brake pedals must
be locked together. The trailer brakes do not operate if only one of the
brake pedals is pressed.

WARNING: The trailer brakes do not work when using the parking brake.

WARNING: When the engine is not running, the trailer brakes do not
work.

- 254 -
 4. Maintenance

4 Maintenance
The tractor must be maintained regularly. Correct maintenance at the right time is
essential to ensure reliable operation of the tractor.
Maintenance costs are small compared to repair costs resulting from lack of
maintenance. The most important measures are those you carry out yourself,
including lubrication and various checks and adjustments.

4.1 Maintenance schedule

You can choose the maintenance schedule according to the yearly running hours
of the tractor.
Periodical maintenance
Periodical maintenance schedule is recommended for all tractors and specially
for tractors, which have more than 1000 running hours in a year. The
maintenance tasks are carried out according to the periodical maintenance chart.
The periodical maintenance from 50 hours onwards can also be ordered from the
authorised workshop. In that case the periodical maintenance is carried out by
Valtra authorised and trained service personnel.
Yearly maintenance
The yearly maintenance schedule is suitable for tractors which have under 1000
running hours in a year. The schedule should be carried out by an authorised
workshop but the operator has to carry out the normal daily and weekly service
routines according to the periodical maintenance chart.

4.2 Service inspection

A service inspection is required for all new tractors after 100 running hours.
The service inspection is mandatory in order to retain the guarantee. The service
is performed by your local dealer.

NOTE: The tractor is inspected according to the manufacturer's instructions

before it is handed over to a customer.

Engine
The inspection of the engine contains the following services:
• Change of engine oil and filter
• Change of fuel system prefilter
• Change of fuel filter
Power transmission
The inspection of the power transmission contains the following services:
• Change of low pressure filter and lubrication filter
Front axle and steering system
The inspection of the front axle and steering system contains the following services:

- 255 -
4. Maintenance

• Change of oil in differential

• Change of oil in hubs
Working hydraulics
The inspection of the working hydraulic system contains the following services:
• Change of the pressure filter and return filter
Other points
The inspection contains the following services as well:
• Lubrication according to maintenance chart
• Road test of the tractor
During the road test all the functions of the controls and instruments are
checked. After the road test, the oil leaks, coolant level and fuel system are
checked.

4.3 Performing maintenance tasks

Follow these instructions when maintaining.
• Test drive the tractor and test that all instruments and controls are working
properly.
• Always stop the engine before starting the work.
• Park the tractor on level ground, especially when doing oil checks.
• Apply the parking brake to ensure that the tractor cannot move.
NOTE: If the ground is uneven, block the wheels.

• Wash down the tractor so that the service work can be done easily and quicker.
Observe that if the tractor has extra equipment like towing device, air
conditioning, air pressure brakes and so on, the periodical maintenance and
checks for them must also be carried out.
Follow the instructions concerning general service tasks:
• Observe the utmost cleanliness in all maintenance work.
Thoroughly wipe off filler caps and plugs as well as surrounding parts of the
tractor before filling up with fuel or oil.
CAUTION: Keep the engine surface clean in order to avoid the risk
of fire.

• Check the oil level.

Check the oil when it is cold and has had time to run down to the bottom of
the oil sump.

- 256 -
 4. Maintenance

• When changing the oil and filters, check their appearance.

Large amounts of dirt (for example heavily clogged filters) can point to a fault
which could cause extensive and costly repairs if not corrected in time.
WARNING: When changing the oil, notice that the oil can be very
hot when it drains from the tractor.
WARNING: Avoid touching the exhaust manifold, turbocharger
and other hot parts of the engine.

• Use proper gloves and other protection for the noxious chemicals.
Fuel, lubricating oil and coolant cause irritation to the skin if they are in
contact with it for long periods.
• Dispose the waste oil, liquid waste, oil filters and batteries properly and
handle them carefully.

NOTE: After completion of service work, replace all shields and covers.

4.3.1 Greasing lubricating points fitted with grease nipples

1. Always clean the grease nipples before applying the grease gun.
2. Apply grease through the nipples until clean grease oozes out (unless
otherwise instructed).
NOTE: Preferably carry out lubrication with bearing points and joints
unloaded and with the bearings in different positions.

3. Wipe away superfluous grease which has been pressed out at the lubricating
point.

4.3.2 Cleaning the tractor

Clean the tractor regularly.
Turn the ignition key to the STOP position before washing.
NOTE: Protect the environment by following the environmental regulations. The
washing place must have a separator outlet when using detergents.

It is best to wash the new tractor for the first time a week after the start-up. Avoid
rubbing the surface of the tractor too hard during the first months.

NOTE: Do not wax the paint work of the new tractor before the initial washing.

• Wash the tractor using a pressure washer.

Keep the nozzle of the pressure washer at least 30 cm from the sealing
points and paint work. The temperature of the washing water must not be
higher than 50°C.
NOTE: Do not use special nozzles, such as turbo nozzles, when washing.
Follow the instructions of the pressure washer manufacturer.

- 257 -
4. Maintenance

• Do not let the water get into the cab air filter when washing the cab sides.
The cab air filter is in the side plate of the roof, usually on the left.
• Do not wash the inside of the cab with a pressure washer or running water.
• Do not point the pressure washer towards electrical equipment, electrical
connectors, lead-through points, bearings, seals and locks.
Use lower pressure (6,5 MPa / 65 bar) and point the water diagonally to the
above points. Do not point the pressure washer towards the radar sensor
(minimum distance 1 m and maximum pressure 6,5 MPa / 65 bar).
• When using the cold fat remover, do not keep the tractor in sunshine.
The paint work may get damaged, if the painted surface is hot.
• Wax the painted surfaces.
After washing, grease the lubricating points and the joints and lubricate the
bearings with oil.

4.3.2.1 Cleaning the engine compartment

Keep the engine surface clean to avoid the risk of fire.
NOTE: Protect the environment by following the environmental regulations. The
washing place must have a separator outlet when using detergents.

• Let the engine cool down for a few minutes before washing.
IMPORTANT: To avoid the risk of fire, do not wash the engine when it is hot.

• Wash the engine carefully using pressure washer.

• Use lower pressure, 6.5 MPa / 65 bar.
• Point the water jet diagonally to the engine.
NOTE: Do not use special nozzles, such as turbo nozzles, when washing.
Follow the instructions of the pressure washer manufacturer.

• Do not use high pressure to wash the electric and fuel equipment or the radiator.
These components can be damaged easily. Wash the delicate engine parts
by hand.
• Let the engine dry up before starting.

4.3.2.2 Cleaning polycarbonate windows

The polycarbonate windows must be cleaned regularly to keep the windows
bright as long as possible.

• Wash the windows by hand or pressure washer.

NOTE: Do not use special nozzles, such as turbo nozzles, when washing.
Follow the instructions of the pressure washer manufacturer.
Do not point the pressure washer towards the side seals or lead-through
seals. The possible detergent may reach the glass parts which are not coated.

- 258 -
 4. Maintenance

• Wipe the stains by using a detergent or plenty of water.

The coated parts of the windows withstand different detergents well.
NOTE: Do not use abrasive detergents and do not rub the windows dry.

• Do not use the window wiper on a dry window.

Ensure that there is enough fluid in the washer reservoir.
• Never clean the polycarbonate windows using a sharp tool like an ice scraper.

4.4 Recommended fuel and lubricants

4.4.1 Fuel
Make sure the correct fuel is used.
The properties of light fuel oil that is only intended for heating do not meet the
requirements of modern diesel engines, and cannot be used as fuel.
The high pressure pump of the Common Rail system requires the fuel to have
sufficient lubricity, because it does not have separate oil lubrication. Adding oil to
diesel fuel is forbidden, because it causes carbon build-ups, and if oil is mixed
with even a small amount of water it clogs the filter.
Additionally, various fuel quality requirements imposed by taxation and seasonal
changes have to be taken into consideration.

4.4.1.1 Quality requirements for engine fuel

The fuel must conform to the EN 590 standard.
Property Requirement Test standard
Specific weight +15°C 0.82-0.84 kg/litre EN ISO 3675:1998
EN ISO 12185
Viscosity +40°C 2.0-4.5 mm2/s EN ISO 3104

Sulphur content max. 350 mg/kg EN ISO 14596:1998

Cetane number 4737 min. 51 EN ISO 5165:1998
Water content max. 200 mg/kg EN ISO 12937:1996
Lubricity/HFRR max. 460 µm ISO 12156-1

IMPORTANT: To mix fuel with any admixing material is not allowed.

4.4.1.2 Storing fuel

Fuel has to be stored in a dry and clean environment.
• Arrange the conditions of storing and distributing fuel so that no water or
impurities can enter the storage tanks.
The storage tanks must be installed in a slanted position, so that water and
impurities are collected at the opposite end of the pump suction pipe. The
pump suction pipe must not reach the bottom of the tank.

- 259 -
4. Maintenance

• Drain the water periodically from the tank to prevent problems.

CAUTION: Do not refuel the tractor at the same time as the
storage tank is being refilled.

• Fill the tank with winter-quality fuel before the cold season.

4.4.1.3 Fuel filter system

The engine’s standard filter system gives sufficient protection for the injection
system from impurities that can be present in well-tended distribution systems.
The control of distributor-type injection pumps is based on internal pressure,
which drops if the fuel system is clogged. If the pilot pressure drops too low, the
engine power is reduced, the smoke level is increased and starting becomes
more difficult.

IMPORTANT: Water in the injection system destroys the system in a very short
time. Always service the water trap and filters according to the specified amount
of running hours.

Always use the original Valtra fuel filters.

IMPORTANT: Using other fuel filters than the original ones, even for a short
period of time, may cause lower performance and expensive damages.

4.4.1.4 Biodiesel fuel

The only possible alternative fuel to use is rapeseed methyl ester (RME)
biodiesel according to the European norm EN 14214, or the US norm ASTM
D6751.
When using biodiesel the engine capacity is almost the same as when using
diesel fuel.

IMPORTANT: In common rail fuel injection systems a maximum of 20% dilution

of the biodiesel (B20) is allowed.

4.4.2 Grease
Use proper grease for the lubrication points.
NOTE: Always use proper grease. Each lubrication point requires its own type of
grease.

NOTE: Avoid repeated skin contact with the grease.

NOTE: Protect nature and take care of empty packages.

- 260 -
 4. Maintenance

4.4.2.1 Valtra Grease - NLGI2 universal grease

Use Valtra Grease for greasing for example wheel bearings, chassis water
pumps, caterpillar rollers.
Valtra Grease:
• is a lithium-based universal grease
• is suitable for greasing all heavy machines
• stands a temperature range of -25°C...+130°C
The grease is adhesive, protects against corrosion and resists water and varying
temperatures.

4.4.2.2 Valtra Calsium LF - NLGI2 calsium grease LF

Use the Valtra Calsium LF grease for greasing points exposed to water. Calsium
LF is a long-fibre, high-quality, calcium-based universal grease for vehicle use.
Calsium LF:
• is suitable for greasing all heavy machines
• is a long fibre grease
• is red-coloured
• stands a temperature range of -25°C...+80°C
The Valtra Calsium grease is intended to be used for chassis, water pumps, pins
and especially for greasing points exposed to water. The grease is adhesive,
protects against corrosion and resists water and varying temperatures.

4.4.2.3 Valtra Grease Moly - NLGI2 moly grease

Use Valtra Grease Moly for wheel bearings, chassis water pumps, caterpillar
rollers et cetera. Valtra Grease Moly is a high-quality, lithium-based universal
grease for vehicle use.
Valtra Grease Moly:
• is alithium-based universal grease
• is suitable for greasing all heavy machines
• stands a temperature range of -25°C...+130°C
The grease is adhesive, protects against corrosion and resists water and varying
temperatures.
Molybdenum sulphide as an additive (1-3%) improves the greasing in places
exposed to shock loads.

4.5 Storing the tractor

4.5.1 Storing the tractor for a period shorter than two months
When storing the tractor for a period shorter than two months, check the following
items.
• The tractor has been regularly maintained.
• The tractor is clean and has been washed.

- 261 -
4. Maintenance

• The coolant contains enough anti-corrosion liquid.

• The fuel tank is full.
• The battery is disconnected, cleaned and stored in a cool and dry place
where the temperature is even.
• The air conditioning is operated for a few minutes at least once a month.

4.5.2 Storing the tractor for a period longer than two months
When storing the tractor for a period longer than two months, perform the
following maintenance.
• Clean, wash and lubricate the tractor.
• Make sure that the coolant contains enough anti-corrosion liquid.
• Clean the air cleaner.
• Lower the hydraulic lift to its lower position.
• Service the fuel tank.
• Empty the tank from fuel.
• Clean the tank.
• Fill the fuel tank with fuel.
• Change the prefilter in the fuel system.
• Change the fuel filter and bleed the fuel system of air.
• Service the engine.
• Change the engine oil and oil filter.
• Run the engine until it is thoroughly warm.
• Disconnect the battery.
Clean it and store it in a cool and dry place where the temperature is even.
Charge the battery every second month.
• Slacken the fan belt.
• Protect exposed parts against corrosion by applying anti-corrosion oil.
• Cover the air induction pipe to the air cleaner and the exhaust pipe.
Use a plastic bag or similar.
• Operate the air conditioning for a few minutes at least once a month.

4.6 Running the tractor in after storage

4.6.1 Running the tractor in after a storing period shorter than two
months
After a storing period shorter than two months you must run the tractor in.
• Check the electrolyte level in the battery and that the battery is fully charged.
• Fit the battery into place.
• Check the oil level in the engine and transmission.

- 262 -
 4. Maintenance

• Check the coolant level in the radiator.

• Carry out the general lubrication.
• Bleed the fuel system, if required.
• Check the pressure of the tyres.
• Start the engine without racing it.
• Test-run the tractor.

4.6.2 Running the tractor in after a storing period longer than two
months
You must run the tractor in after a storing period longer than two months.
• Check the tyre pressures.
• Remove the protective covers.
• Turn the radiator fan carefully forwards and backwards, so that the sealing
ring of the coolant pump works loose (it may be stuck to the shaft).
• Wash off any anti-corrosion oil applied to the exterior of the tractor.
• Tighten the fan belt/belts (compression belt)
• Check the oil level in the engine and transmission.
• Check the coolant level in the radiator.
• Check the electrolyte level in the battery.
• Bleed the fuel system of air.
• Refit the battery (fully charged).
• Start the engine without racing it.
• Test-run the tractor.

4.7 Periodical maintenance

GUID-35316B42-303A-4BD3-B31B-782A62332EE7

1. Periodical maintenance view

- 263 -
4. Maintenance

The periodical maintenance view shows when you must perform the tractor service.

NOTE: When the periodical maintenance view is shown on the display, the
service work has to be carried out before the view is cleared.

NOTE: Clean the tractor before maintenance.

4.7.1 Periodical maintenance chart

You must follow the service intervals in the periodical maintenance chart.
IMPORTANT: When carrying out service you must follow the service intervals,
that is, you must also perform all previously required actions mentioned in the
periodical maintenance chart. For example, when doing 2000 hours service you
must also do the service required at 1000 hours, 500 hours, weekly and daily.

NOTE: The service intervals shown apply for normal operating conditions but in
more severe conditions servicing should be carried out more frequently.

IMPORTANT: When using Biodiesel fuel or working in harsh conditions there

might be exceptions in the periodical maintenance.

The table shows the periodical maintenance tasks.

• The column 10 h shows the tasks that must be carried out daily or every 10
hours.
• The column 50 h shows the tasks that must be carried out weekly or every 50
hours.
• The column 500 h shows the tasks that must be carried out every 500 hours.
• The column 1000 h shows the tasks that must be carried out yearly or every
1000 hours.
• The column 2000 h shows the tasks that must be carried out every other year
or every 2000 hours.
Maintenance check point 10 h 50 h 500 h 1000 h 2000 h
Check the engine oil level. ● ● ● ● ●
Check the oil level in the transmission and hydraulic system. ● ● ● ● ●
Check the coolant level. ● ● ● ● ●
Check and clean the radiator fins and engine cover grilles. ● ● ● ● ●
Check for oil and fuel leaks. ● ● ● ● ●
Grease the three-point linkage. ● ● ● ●
Check and grease the trailer hitch. ● ● ● ●
Check and grease the front linkage. ● ● ● ●
Check the front power take-off. ● ● ● ●
Grease the brake mechanism. ● ● ● ●
Grease front axle mounting bearings. ● ● ● ●
Grease flexible front mudguards ● ● ● ●
Check the belts' tightness. ● ● ● ●
Table continued on next page

- 264 -
 4. Maintenance

Maintenance check point 10 h 50 h 500 h 1000 h 2000 h

Check the fuel system prefilter and sediment bowl. ● ● ● ●
Check the electrolyte level in the battery. ● ● ● ●
Check the tyre pressure. ● ● ● ●
Check the emergency brake ● ● ● ●
Check the windscreen washer fluid ● ● ● ●
Grease door hinges. ● ● ● ●
Change the engine oil and filter. ● 1) ● ●

Check the engine breather pipe ● ● ●

Check the brake fluid level. ● ● ●
Clean the cab air filter. ● ● ●
Check wheel nuts' tightness. ● ● ●
Check the brake pedal free travel. ● ● ●
Check the parking brake. ● ● ●
Change the oil filters of the transmission and hydraulics. ● ● ●
Check the oil level in the front axle differential and hubs. ● ● ●
Change the front power take-off oil and wash the oil filter. ● ● ●
Check the front power take-off rubber couplings. ● ● ●
Grease the rubber surfaces of the trailer quick couplings. ● ● ●
Check the integrity of the air pressure system. ● ● ●
Check the air pressure system automatic water draining. ● ● ●
Change the oil in the hydraulics. ● ●
Change the oil in the front axle differential and hubs. ● ●
Change the cab air filter. ● ●
Change the recirculation air filter. ● ●
Change the fuel filter and prefilter. ● 2) ●

Change the engine air filters. ● ●

Grease the flywheel ring gear. ● ●
Check the front wheel toe-in. ● ●
Adjust the engine valves. ● ●
Change the hydraulics breather. ● ●
Check the power shuttle operation. ● ●
Tighten the frame nuts and bolts. ● 3) ●

Change the oil in the transmission. ●

Change the transmission breather. ●
Change the oil in the brake circuits. ●
Clean the cooling system. ●
Change the cap of the coolant expansion tank. ●
Check the cab mounting. ●
Maintain the air conditioning. ●

1) In extremely dusty conditions or when using over 5% Biodiesel fuel, change the oil and filters
every 250 hours.
2) When using over 5% Biodiesel, change the fuel filter and prefilter every 500 hours.
3) If the tractor is fitted with a front loader, tighten the frame nuts and bolts every 500 hours.

- 265 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.2 Daily maintenance

4.7.2.1 Checking the engine oil level

Check the engine oil level regularly.
The engine oil level must be checked when the oil has cooled off and has had
time to run down to the bottom of the oil sump.

2
GUID-B838BF96-A28A-4F45-8021-81CBF39CB384

1. Oil filler cap

2. Dipstick

1. Stop the engine and let it stand for a few minutes.

2. Pull out the dipstick.
The oil level must be between the maximum and minimum marks on the
dipstick.
3. Add oil through the oil filler cap, if necessary.
4. Inspect the oil sump and engine for leakage.

4.7.2.2 Checking the oil level in the transmission system

Check the oil level in the transmission system periodically.
Steering and transmission share the same oil system.

- 266 -
 4. Maintenance

1 2

GUID-DCF7AD26-5890-43D5-9249-626CE97DE49F

1. Transmission oil dipstick

2. Transmission oil filling plug

1. Stop the engine and let it stand for a few minutes.

2. Pull out the dipstick.
The oil level must be between the minimum and maximum lines on the dipstick.
3. Add oil if necessary.

4.7.2.3 Checking the oil level in the hydraulic system

Check the oil level in the hydraulic system periodically.
1. Stop the engine and let it stand for a few minutes.

- 267 -
4. Maintenance

2. Pull out the dipstick.

GUID-BD5BA437-D746-4BBE-9B40-BDCE0CD082C2

1. Dipstick

The oil level must be between the minimum and maximum lines on the dipstick.
3. Add oil through the hydraulic return coupling, if necessary.

GUID-650382EF-2132-48F9-8F80-A62DFBAD757F

1. Hydraulic return coupling

- 268 -
 4. Maintenance

4. Check the leakage oil reservoir for the quick-action couplings and empty it
occasionally.

1
1

GUID-303DF720-5AC9-43CE-9DC3-B36FAAC95036

1. Leakage oil reservoir

4.7.2.4 Checking the coolant level

Check the coolant level regularly.
NOTE: Drain the cooling system completely every second year and refill it with
new coolant.

1 2

GUID-00016F96-08C5-42FE-9F5E-2EEF5CE43C02

1. Expansion tank
2. Cold fluid level sign

1. Stop the engine and let it stand for a few minutes.

The checking must be made when the fluid is cold. A hot fluid level is higher
than a cold.

- 269 -
4. Maintenance

2. Check that the fluid level in the expansion tank is in accordance with the fluid
level sign for cold fluid.

3. Add more coolant to the tank, if necessary.

IMPORTANT: Never use just water as coolant.
• Check the freezing point of the coolant.
At the beginning of the cold season it is important to measure the
freezing point.
• If the freezing point is too high, drain off some of the coolant and top up
with anti-freeze.
• Run the engine for a while.
The anti-freeze must be mixed with the coolant.
• Re-check the freezing point of the coolant.
4. Inspect the expansion tank for leakage.
IMPORTANT: There is a drain hole under the water pump that must not be
blocked. If coolant drips out of the hole, the pump seal is damaged and must
be replaced. In a new engine some leakage is possible until the pump settles
in.

4.7.2.5 Cleaning radiators

Clean all the radiator honeycombs regularly.

4 5 6

7 7
GUID-807D8E6F-B78C-45A5-A6C4-66DEB0BD43C0

1. Front power take-off (PTO) oil cooler (extra equipment)

2. Air conditioning cooler (extra equipment)
3. Transmission oil cooler
4. Hydraulics oil cooler
5. Engine intake air cooler
6. Engine coolant radiator
7. Locking latches

- 270 -
 4. Maintenance

1. Open the engine cover.

By opening the locking latches the first coolers turn forward to make the
cleaning easier.
2. Clean the radiators using compressed air or flush them with water.
When cleaning, use the air pressure, a water hose (not a pressure washer)
or a soft brush. Be careful not to damage the cores.
3. Direct the spray against the air streaming direction.
4. Turn and lock all dislocated radiators back to their original position.
5. Close the engine cover.

4.7.3 Weekly maintenance

4.7.3.1 Greasing the three-point linkage

Grease the three-point linkage regularly.
NOTE: Use Valtra Grease Universal for greasing.

1. Grease the levelling screws.

There are two grease nipples.
2. Grease the top link.
There are two grease nipples.
3. Grease the lifting cylinder lower pins.
There are two grease nipples.
4. Grease the lifting cylinder upper pins.
There are two grease nipples.

- 271 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.3.2 Checking the trailer hitch

Check the locking of the trailer hitch.

GUID-8C2A85C5-CF69-4E3B-BBC3-239A2FD8043C

1. 6-8 mm

• Make sure that the spring returns the pawl fully home.
When the pawl is turned upwards the trailer hitch must move up 6-8 mm.
• Check the wear of the trailer hitch.
WARNING: When the trailer hitch has worn down to 44 mm at the
thinnest part, it has to be replaced.

GUID-F06CD2D1-2FAE-49F7-8126-CCF0BBA1B69D

1. Minimum 44 mm

4.7.3.3 Greasing the trailer hitch

Grease the trailer hitch regularly.
NOTE: Use Valtra Grease Universal for greasing.

- 272 -
 4. Maintenance

1
GUID-4619475F-35DD-4555-9A83-4A4AC24C5953

1. Grease nipple

1. Grease the trailer hitch shaft.

4.7.3.4 Maintaining the front linkage

Check the front linkage regularly.
The type plate of the front linkage is located on the front part of the left frame bar.
• Check regularly that all screws and nuts are tight.

GUID-D7709C37-4A1F-4265-846E-02AB4F2E47F6

• Tighten all screws and nuts of the front linkage after the first 15-25 running
hours.
• Check that the hydraulic connections have no leaks.

- 273 -
4. Maintenance

• Grease the pins of the lifting cylinders and the shaft of the lifting links with
Valtra Grease Universal every 50 hours.
The grease nipple for the shaft of the lifting links is located on the rear side of
the axle.

GUID-52E7DB4E-BE35-465B-B194-4D007F90F8E2

4.7.3.5 Checking the front power take-off

• Tighten all fixing screws after the first 15-25 running hours.
• Check regularly that all fixing screws are tight.
• Check that the hydraulic connections have no leaks.

4.7.3.6 Greasing the brake cam

Use Valtra Calsium LF grease when greasing the brake cam.

STOP

1 2

2
GUID-3803AAD9-6FD5-4167-A7A9-B7D9B7E4EE1C

1. Grease nipple
2. Sliding surfaces

- 274 -
 4. Maintenance

1. Grease the nipples on both sides of the brake cam.

2. Grease the sliding surface on the brake mechanism.

4.7.3.7 Greasing front axle mounting bearings

You must grease the front axle mounting bearings regularly.
Use Valtra Grease Universal when greasing.

GUID-3BD9A390-1A3A-4223-B695-1A94ECBF76FD

1. Greasing nipples

1. Lift the front end of the tractor a little.

Do not lift from front axle or front weight bracket
2. Grease the nipples on both bearings.
Tilt the axle to make sure that grease goes equally into the bearings.

4.7.3.8 Greasing hydraulically suspended front axle mounting bearings

You must grease the hydraulically suspended front axle mounting bearings
regularly.
Use Valtra Grease Universal when greasing.

GUID-9984E91F-77A0-43D1-88B0-44D409F162E6

1. Grease the nipple on the front axle suspension on the right side of the subframe.
2. Grease the nipples at the end of the cylinders.

- 275 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.3.9 Greasing flexible front mudguards

Grease the turning mechanism regularly with Valtra Calsium LF grease.

GUID-2668F8E7-90B1-4FE2-B062-E93E8206C7F2

1. Turning mechanism

1. To aid the maintenance, turn the mudguards from the rear edge by pulling
them sidewards.
2. Grease the turning mechanism regularly with Valtra Calsium LF grease.

4.7.3.10 Checking belts' tension

Check the belts' tension regularly.
NOTE: Always keep a spare fan belt handy.

1. Check the overall condition of the belts.

A slack, worn and/or oily belt can cause problems with battery charging and
the cooling system.
2. Check the belt tension.
The fan/generator belt has an automatic belt tensioner.
3. Adjust or change the belt, if needed.

- 276 -
 4. Maintenance

4.7.3.11 Adjusting the air conditioning compressor belt

Adjust the air conditioning compressor belt, if needed.

1 2

1
GUID-A9640524-4032-49D1-BEB2-795D9F917AA5

1. Attaching bolts
2. Compressor
3. Deflection (10 mm)

1. Loosen the three attaching bolts.

2. Turn the compressor in its mountings.
3. Tighten the attaching bolts.
4. Check the deflection of the belt.
A deflection of approximately 10 mm is suitable for the tension of the belt.

4.7.3.12 Adjusting the air compressor belt

Adjust the air compressor belt, if needed.

2 2
1 3
GUID-D2F6D6BF-E892-4B8E-862D-D7DBC330CAD7

1. Adjustment belt pulley

2. Belt pulley nut
3. Deflection (10 mm)

1. Check the fixing bolts of the air compressor.

- 277 -
4. Maintenance

2. Loosen the belt pulley nut.

3. Adjust the belt's tension with the adjustment belt pulley.
4. Tighten the belt pulley nut.
5. Check the deflection of the belt.
The belt tension is suitable with a deflection of approximately 10 mm.

4.7.3.13 Changing the air conditioning compressor belt

Change the air conditioning compressor belt, if needed.

GUID-82A92957-78AA-49AD-9D5C-DAD49A32EE05

1. Visco fan nut

1. Open the Visco fan nut.

IMPORTANT: The nut is a left-handed thread.

2. Move the Visco fan forward.

IMPORTANT: Do not hit the Visco fan against the radiator or the wind tunnel.

3. Remove the air conditioning compressor belt and install a new one.
4. Install the Visco fan and tighten the nut.
5. Ensure that the electrical connector of the Visco fan is connected.
6. Check the belt's tension.

4.7.3.14 Changing the multi-grooved fan belt and the air compressor belt
Change the multi-grooved fan belt and the air compressor belt, if needed.
1. Remove the old belts by cutting.

- 278 -
 4. Maintenance

2. Open the flange screws.

On tractors with front power take-off (PTO), the spacing ring must be
removed so that there is enough space to change the belts.

3
2

1
GUID-1D3370A9-4D5C-4AB6-864C-3B247686BDEA

1. Elastic rubber coupling

2. Flange screws
3. Spacing ring

3. Remove the spacing ring.

The spacing ring is tightened between the flange and the elastic rubber
coupling.
4. Loosen the automatic belt tensioner.
Use a 1/2" wrench as tool.

1
GUID-0C16508B-3E67-4343-9E64-453FA125BB5B

1. Automatic belt tensioner

5. Install new belts.

Pass the belts through the belt changing groove on the wind tunnel
6. If you have removed the spacing ring, install it back to its place.
7. Tighten the automatic belt tensioner.
8. Tighten the air compressor belt.

- 279 -
4. Maintenance

9. Check the belts' tension.

4.7.3.15 Checking the fuel system prefilter and sediment bowl

Check the fuel system prefilter and sediment bowl regularly.
IMPORTANT: Water in the injection system destroys the system in a very short
time. Always service the water trap and filters according to the specified amount
of running hours.

1 2 3
GUID-5F6E0647-8103-495A-B6A0-F63C2F942C64

1. Tap at the bottom of the main fuel filter

2. Tap at the bottom of the prefilter
3. Sediment bowl (water trap)

1. Check the cleanliness of the sediment bowl.

If there are impurities or water in the sediment bowl, empty the prefilter.
2. Open the tap at the bottom of the prefilter to empty it.
3. Drain the fuel from the prefilter into a container.
If there is water in the prefilter, also empty the main fuel filter by opening the
tap below it.
IMPORTANT: Water in the fluid can damage the pump and the nozzles.
IMPORTANT: Do not drain fuel on the ground!

4. Close the tap when the filter is empty.

Both the main fuel filter and prefilter are emptied in the same way.

- 280 -
 4. Maintenance

5. If there was water in the filters, clean the fuel tank.

6. Bleed the fuel system, if needed.
The fuel system must always be bled when the main fuel filter is emptied.
NOTE: Drain the water traps more often, if required.

4.7.3.16 Checking the electrolyte level in the battery

Check the electrolyte level in the battery regularly.
WARNING: Be careful with the battery solution. It is corrosive.

As default the battery is placed under the steps.

1. Open the lock for the battery casing.

1
GUID-D30E53E5-EA53-48BA-BDDA-F1A9EF1F3BF0

1. Lock for the battery casing

2. Turn the battery casing to the open position.

3. Take out the tool box.

1
2
GUID-457E2B22-A47E-4CBB-9F30-A0FFE191B28F

1. Toolbox
2. Battery cover

4. Remove the battery cover.

- 281 -
4. Maintenance

5. Open the plugs.

1
GUID-4E17CB5B-2985-4465-BF53-EEC5B5827F27

1. Plug

6. Check that the battery electrolyte level is in accordance with the level marked
on the battery.
If the battery has no mark, check that the electrolyte level is approximately
5-10 mm above the cell plates in the battery.
7. Top up with distilled water, if required.
IMPORTANT: During the cold season it is important that the engine is
allowed to run for a while after topping up with distilled water, otherwise the
water may freeze before it has had time to mix with the battery acid.
WARNING: Under no circumstances should you attempt to
replenish the battery acid yourself.
WARNING: Never use a naked flame to check the level of the
electrolyte.

8. Check the cables and battery terminals and clean them if necessary.
NOTE: If the water in the battery evaporates too quickly, it may be a sign that
the charging voltage is too high. Keep the battery clean and dry on the
outside. Protect the pole studs and the cable terminals with grease.

9. Fasten the covers and tool box after service.

4.7.3.17 Checking the tyre pressure

Check the tyre pressure regularly, especially after changing the tyres.
IMPORTANT: Change tyres and wheels at a professional tyre workshop that is
equipped to handle this type of work.

• Check the pressure of the tyres with a pressure gauge.

• Add pressure, if needed.
WARNING: Avoid overinflation as excess pressure may cause the
tyre to explode.

4.7.3.18 Checking the emergency brake

Check the emergency brake (extra equipment) weekly.

1. Pull the emergency brake to check that it is functioning.

- 282 -
 4. Maintenance

2. Adjust the emergency brake, if necessary.

Normally there is no need for adjusting, because the emergency brake is
adjusted (also parking brake), when the drive brakes are adjusted. The
adjustment is done the same way as parking brake adjustment. In this case,
the tractor has two cables.

4.7.3.19 Windscreen washer fluid reservoir

The windscreen washer fluid reservoir is located on the rear mudguards.

GUID-7D9BAED9-D8C7-4447-9AE9-121603918A38

1. Washer fluid reservoir

The washer fluid reservoir for the front and rear window is common.The rear
window washer is extra equipment.

NOTE: Check the amount of fluid weekly. When the temperature is under 0° C,
use an anti-freeze agent in the fluid.

4.7.4 Maintenance every 500 hours

4.7.4.1 Greasing door hinges

Grease the door hinges periodically.
Use Valtra Universal Grease for the door hinges.
• Apply grease in the nipples on the door hinges.

- 283 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.4.2 Changing the engine oil and the oil filter

NOTE: In extremely dusty conditions or when using over 5% Biodiesel fuel, the
oil and filters must be changed every 250 hours.

NOTE: If the amount of operating hours is low, the oil and filters must be changed
at least once a year.

2 3
GUID-7577D47F-B5C3-4BA9-8DB7-2ECE319C17A2

1. Filler hole
2. Dipstick
3. Oil filter

1. Check that the tractor is standing on level ground.

2. Stop the engine and let it stand for a few minutes.
3. Remove the drain plug from the engine sump.

GUID-42622A5E-46C6-4F75-94CE-29FBF2012D7A

1. Drain plug

- 284 -
 4. Maintenance

4. Drain the oil from the engine to a separate container.

If the engine is warm, the oil runs better.
5. Clean, refit and tighten the drain plug.
6. Release the oil filter.
7. Wipe off any oil which has run out onto the chassis.
8. Lubricate the new gasket.
9. Attach the new filter.
Tighten the new filter by hand (not too tight).
10. Fill the recommended oil in the filler hole.
11. Check the oil level from the dipstick.
The oil is filled until the upper mark on the dipstick is reached.
12. Start the engine.
13. Run the engine and check for possible leaks.
14. Run the engine for a while and check the oil level.

4.7.4.3 Checking the breather pipe

Check the breather pipe periodically.

GUID-57911AE7-A848-477F-B593-17048E6F074C

1. Breather pipe

• Check that the breather pipe is not blocked.

- 285 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.4.4 Checking the brake fluid level

Check the brake fluid level periodically.

GUID-698655D3-C1AF-4AA8-A8AA-03B66D1A7D8F

1. Brake fluid reservoir

WARNING: The brake fluid is corrosive and poisonous and must be

handled carefully at all times. It also corrodes the paint.

The brake fluid level must be between the maximum and minimum marks.
1. Top up with new brake fluid, if necessary.
NOTE: Use recommended fluid only.
WARNING: Normally there is no need to top up the fluid. If there is
a leakage, it must be repaired immediately, before driving. If
necessary, contact a Valtra authorised workshop.

4.7.4.5 Cleaning the cab ventilation air filter

Clean the cab ventilation air filter periodically.
WARNING: The air filter element does not remove chemicals from the
outside air. Follow the instructions of the pesticide manufacturer.

NOTE: Clean the cab ventilation air filter more often if needed.

- 286 -
 4. Maintenance

GUID-A3BD895F-8759-43F0-9780-CA19C820A36A

1. Air filter housing

2. Ventilation air filter

1. Remove the air filter housing from the upper left-hand corner of the cab roof.
2. Remove the ventilation air filter.
3. Check the condition of the ventilation air filter.
A damaged ventilation air filter must be changed.
4. Clean the ventilation air filter.
• Knock the filter element against your palm so that most of the dirt comes
off.
• Use a vacuum cleaner to clean the ventilation air filter from the outside in
or blow it clean with compressed air from the center outwards.
IMPORTANT: Make sure that the air pressure is not too high.

A larger air filter housing with active coal filter or larger air filter is available as
extra equipment.

4.7.4.6 Checking wheel nuts' tightness

Check the wheel nuts' tightness periodically to avoid unnecessary risks.
• Check the tightness of the wheel nuts.
• Check the tightness of the wheel disc/rim bolts.

- 287 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.4.7 Checking the brake pedal free travel

Check the brake pedal free travel periodically.

1
GUID-EF67E40A-0816-4DDA-A5CF-C324AF720D99

1. Free travel of the pedal

1. Check the free travel of the brake pedal.

The free travel must be 70-80 mm when the pedals are latched together.
2. Adjust the free travel if necessary.

4.7.4.8 Adjusting brake pedals' travel

Adjust the travel of brake pedals when needed.

1. Make sure that the tractor cannot move by itself.

• Raise the rear wheels off the ground.
• Start the tractor.
• Move the power shuttle lever to centre position (N).
• Keep the clutch pedal pressed down.
The clutch pedal must be pressed down to rotate the wheels.
2. Tighten the brake adjusting nuts.
Tighten the nuts until the rear wheels cannot be turned by hand.

STOP
1

GUID-9A199B1C-D2F9-4619-A37B-2FBF679A1DBB

1. Adjusting nut

- 288 -
 4. Maintenance

3. Slacken the nuts.

Slacken the nuts for 1.5 turns.
4. Check that the rear wheels can rotate freely.
5. Check the function of both brake pedals individually by driving.
Check that the brake action is the same on both wheels while driving with
both pedals latched together.
6. Check that the pedal free travel is the same on both wheels.
The pedal free travel should be ca. 70–80 mm. For the reverse drive system
brakes, the brake pedal free travel should be 60-70 mm.

4.7.4.9 Checking the parking brake

Check the parking brake periodically.
1. Engage the parking brake.
2. Check that the brake is functioning.
3. Release the parking brake.
4. Check that the brakes were released.
5. Adjust the parking brake if necessary.

4.7.4.10 Adjusting the parking brake

The parking brake is adjusted in the factory and readjustment is not necessary
unless parts of the brake mechanism have been changed. The parking brake is
affected when the driving brakes are adjusted.
The parking brake is controlled with a spring return pressure cylinder and it is
connected to the drive brake mechanism by a cable.

IMPORTANT: Always adjust the driving brakes before adjusting the parking brake.

1. Start the tractor.

2. Fit blocks in front of the front wheels to prevent the tractor from moving.
3. Move the power shuttle lever to neutral (centre position).

- 289 -
4. Maintenance

4. Pull the cable clearance to the end of the cable.

The arrow in the following figure shows the direction.

1 2 3 4

STOP

GUID-4D9BE4F6-2A03-486A-BC39-42E57D61D24D

1. Cable
2. Clearance
3. Adjusting nut
4. Locking nut

5. Open the locking nut.

6. Adjust the clearance through the adjusting nut so that it is 1-2 mm.
7. Tighten the locking nut.

IMPORTANT: When mounting the parking brake cable, the cylinder side end has
to be mounted according to the tolerances. This should only be carried out by an
authorised workshop.

- 290 -
 4. Maintenance

4.7.4.11 Changing transmission oil filters

Change the transmission oil filters regulary.

1 2
GUID-44C40BD0-E657-4551-B018-C6D40199F954

1. Transmission lubrication filter.

2. Low pressure filter of the transmission system.

Oil filters are located on the right side of the tractor under the cab. The lubrication
filter is indicated with the text LUB on the mounting piece on top of it. The low
pressure filter is indicated with the text TRANS on the mounting piece on top of it.
1. Fit a suitable container under the filter.
2. Clean the filter housing and the surrounding area.
3. Remove the filter housing and the filter element.
4. Wash the filter housing in clean diesel fuel.
5. Lubricate the seal of the new filter element.
6. Fit the new filter into place.
7. Refit the filter housing.
Screw in the housing fully by hand and then unscrew by one quarter-turn.

- 291 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.4.12 Changing hydraulic system oil filters

Change the hydraulic system oil filters regulary.

1 2
GUID-7880C1CF-682D-44D5-A845-869DBE98FD96

1. Return oil filter of the auxiliary hydraulic system

2. Pressure filter of the hydraulic system

Oil filters are located on the right side of the tractor under the cab. The return oil
filter is labelled with the text HYD on the mounting piece on top of it.
1. Fit a suitable container under the filter.
2. Clean the filter housing and the surrounding area.
3. Remove the filter housing and the filter element.
4. Wash the filter housing in clean diesel fuel.
5. Lubricate the seal of the new filter element.
6. Fit the new element into place.
7. Refit the filter housing.
Screw in the housing fully by hand and then unscrew by one quarter-turn.

4.7.4.13 Checking the oil level in the front axle differential

Check the oil level in the front axle differential periodically.
Agricultural front axle:

1
GUID-1E1BFB91-91C6-41CE-95BB-CE5CE00E6AFE

1. Inspection hole

- 292 -
 4. Maintenance

Agricultural front axle with hydraulic suspension:

GUID-42E30B17-C91C-4501-8459-AF5B922482DC

1. Inspection hole

Industrial front axle:

GUID-4753D85A-F9BB-49C3-9BCE-DAD0300F66BC

1. Inspection hole

1. Check that the oil is in level with the inspection hole.

2. Add more oil if necessary.

4.7.4.14 Checking the oil level in front axle hubs

Check the oil level in the front axle hubs periodically.

GUID-7598191B-540A-4E2E-8FA1-93BD16C2B4B9

1. Oil surface indicator line

- 293 -
4. Maintenance

1. Turn the wheel until the oil surface indicator line is horizontal.
2. Check that the oil surface is in level with the hole.
3. Add more oil, if necessary.

4.7.4.15 Changing front PTO housing oil and washing oil filter
Change the oil of the front power take-off (PTO) housing and wash the oil filter
regularly.

1
6

5
4 7
3
1
2

GUID-D3B6982A-BBCD-457E-B92A-B002A05CF282

1. End plate
2. Lock ring
3. O-ring
4. Filter
5. Oil level hole
6. Breather
7. Plug

1. Drain the oil by opening the plug at the rear of the housing.
2. Release the filter by loosening the lock ring and the end plate.
3. Clean the strainer with diesel.
4. Dry the strainer with compressed air.
5. Attach the filter and the parts in the contrary order.
Check that the O-ring fits the groove of the end plate.

- 294 -
 4. Maintenance

6. Fill up the housing with oil to the level of the hole.

The breather can be loosened for bleeding. Check that the breather is not
blocked. When filling, the tractor has to stand on even ground.
7. Use the front PTO a moment and check oil.

4.7.4.16 Checking front PTO rubber couplings

Check the front power take-off (PTO) rubber couplings regularly.

140 Nm 1

2
2

GUID-E577BC15-1B7A-4883-8D63-3E90E473D0D3

1. Rubber clutch pieces

2. Rubber coupling

• Check the rubber coupling for tears.

• Change the rubber coupling when needed.
It is recommended to let an authorised workshop change the coupling. If you
change the coupling yourself, when mounting the rubber clutch, make sure
that the pieces are straight.

4.7.4.17 Checking and greasing the trailer air-pressure brake system

Check and grease the trailer air-pressure brake system regularly.

1. Grease the rubber surfaces of the trailer quick couplings with Valtra Calsium
LF grease.
2. Check the integrity of the system.
The system has to be air tight so that after stopping the engine, the pressure
does not decrease more than 0.15 bar during 10 minutes (2%). When
needed, repair the leaks.

- 295 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.4.18 Checking the air pressure system's automatic water draining

If the tractor is equipped with an air pressure system, there are pressure
containers on both sides of the tractor under the cab. The containers have
automatic valves for water draining. The valve functions must be checked
frequently.

GUID-47DD9E97-2BBD-4154-BBE5-37D85C7EB0F9

1. Automatic water draining valve on both sides of the tractor

1. Push a blunt stick through the draining valve hole.
IMPORTANT: The stick must not be sharp, because it can damage the valve.
If the air that comes out is free of water, the automatic is operating.
2. If there is water with the air, push the stick through the valve hole until there
is no pressure on the container.
3. Open the valve and clean the seal inside it.
4. Mount the valve back.
5. Check the valve on the other side.
6. If the valves do not operate properly after cleaning, replace them with new ones.

4.7.5 Maintenance every 1000 hours or yearly

4.7.5.1 Changing oil in the hydraulic system

Both hydraulic and transmission oil can be used in the hydraulic system. The use
of transmission oil is recommended, since hydraulic oil may mix with oils from
other tractors through implements and thereby damage other tractors. The
hydraulic system is filled with transmission oil at the factory.
1. Run the tractor, and raise and lower the hydraulic lift (or e.g. the front loader)
until the oil is a little warm.
2. Lower the hydraulic lift (also the front lift).

- 296 -
 4. Maintenance

3. Remove the drain plug under the housing.

GUID-D6AD728D-8265-4740-8A3F-5360721C8631

1. Hydraulic oil drain plug

4. Drain the oil into a suitable container.

5. Clean and refit the plug.
6. Refill by pump through the hydraulic return coupling.

GUID-650382EF-2132-48F9-8F80-A62DFBAD757F

1. Hydraulic return coupling

The oil must go through the return filter so that no impurities enter the
system.

- 297 -
4. Maintenance

7. Pull out the dipstick to check the oil level.

GUID-BD5BA437-D746-4BBE-9B40-BDCE0CD082C2

1. Hydraulic oil dipstick

The dipstick is located in the front gearbox housing on the left. Make sure
that after refilling, the oil level is between the minimum and maximum marks.
8. Start the engine and check the oil level.

4.7.5.2 Changing oil in the front axle differential

Change the oil in the front axle differential periodically.
Agricultural front axle:

2
1
GUID-2D094982-C9AE-46B3-8553-AA2B3F52D17E

1. Inspection hole
2. Drain plug

Agricultural front axle with hydraulic suspension:

- 298 -
 4. Maintenance

1
GUID-F6C6262F-1048-4540-8018-D487381F433E

1. Drain plug
2. Inspection hole

Industrial front axle:

1
2

GUID-874BE334-3980-4131-A119-15C6FF648AA0

1. Drain plug
2. Inspection hole

1. Unscrew the drain plug.

2. Drain the oil into a suitable container.
3. Clean the plug and refit it.
4. Fill new oil through the inspection hole up to the level of the hole.

- 299 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.5.3 Changing oil in the front axle hubs

Change oil in the front axle hubs periodically.

GUID-7598191B-540A-4E2E-8FA1-93BD16C2B4B9

1. Oil surface indicator line

1. Unscrew the plug and drain the oil.

2. Turn the wheel until the line of the inspection hole is horizontal.
3. Fill up with oil to the level of the hole.

4.7.5.4 Changing the cab ventilation air filter

Change the cab ventilation air filter periodically.

GUID-A3BD895F-8759-43F0-9780-CA19C820A36A

1. Air filter housing

2. Ventilation air filter

1. Remove the air filter housing from the upper left-hand corner of the cab roof.
2. Remove the ventilation air filter.
3. Replace the ventilation air filter with a new one.
Change ventilation air filter more often if necessary.
4. Attach the air filter housing back to its place.

- 300 -
 4. Maintenance

4.7.5.5 Changing the recirculation filter

Change the recirculation filter periodically.

1 2

GUID-0372D6E8-D5EB-4D6A-BDBE-2EF3439749AE

1. Grille
2. Recirculation control knob (not with automatic air conditioning)
3. Filter element

1. Remove the recirculation control knob (not with automatic air conditioning).
2. Remove the grille.
3. Extract the filter element.
4. Change the filter.
NOTE: It may be necessary to change the filter more frequently.

4.7.5.6 Changing the fuel filter

Change the fuel filter periodically.
Always use original Valtra fuel filters.

IMPORTANT: Using other fuel filters than the original ones, even for a short
period of time, may cause lower performance and expensive damages.

IMPORTANT: When using over 5 % Biodiesel, change the fuel filter every 500
hours.

- 301 -
4. Maintenance

GUID-97D682F8-9367-4A36-AFF4-0657826509C4

1. Locking ring
2. Filter element

1. Open the locking ring and remove the filter element.

IMPORTANT: Unscrew the filter by hand, do not use a filter wrench.

2. Fill a new filter element with fuel.

3. Attach the filter element.
NOTE: The filter fits in one position only.

4. Screw the locking ring until you hear a clicking sound.

4.7.5.7 Changing the fuel prefilter

Change the fuel prefilter periodically.
Always use original Valtra fuel filters.

IMPORTANT: Using other fuel filters than the original ones, even for a short
period of time, may cause lower performance and expensive damages.

IMPORTANT: Unscrew the filter by hand, do not use a filter wrench.

- 302 -
 4. Maintenance

1
2
3

GUID-3D1F85AF-D562-45EC-BCB8-546A6FB6C318

1. Bleeder-screw
2. Locking ring
3. Filter element
4. Water trap
5. Drain cock

1. Slightly open the drain cock at the lower part of the prefilter.
2. Drain the fuel into a container.
• Open the bleeder-screw in the prefilter’s mounting frame to drain the fuel
more easily.
• Close the bleeder-screw after the draining has been completed.
IMPORTANT: Do not drain fuel on the ground!

3. Release the water trap from the prefilter.

4. Open the locking ring.
5. Remove the filter element.
6. Fasten the water trap to the lower part of the new prefilter.
7. Fill the filter element and water trap with fuel.
8. Attach the filter element.
NOTE: The filter fits in one position only.

9. Screw the locking ring until you hear a clicking sound.

IMPORTANT: Change the filters more often, if necessary.

10. If necessary, bleed the fuel system.

- 303 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.5.8 Changing engine air filters

Change the main air filter and safety filter regularly.

2
GUID-B074C018-89E9-4DB9-962A-A0E5E0207DA4

1. Main air filter

2. Safety air filter

The safety filter protects the engine if the main air filter gets damaged.
IMPORTANT: Never run the tractor without the safety filter.

NOTE: Do not clean the safety filter. Always change the safety filter according to
the maintenance schedule.

NOTE: Unless it is necessary, do not open the cover of the air filter housing.

1. Open the air filter housing.

2. Take out the main filter.

GUID-F1FDAA55-6F86-47A2-A5A8-B2EF00ABD4BF

1. Main air filter

- 304 -
 4. Maintenance

3. Remove the safety filter.

IMPORTANT: Take the utmost care when removing the safety filter so that
no dirt enters the induction pipe.

1
GUID-B837A46A-C0E3-4996-BB87-BBFBC5F5EA1A

1. Safety air filter

4. Check that the seals of the filters are in good condition.

5. Check that the sealing surfaces of the air filter housing are clean.
6. Fit the new safety filter back in place.
Make sure that it is correctly positioned in the housing.
7. Fit the new main filter in place.
Make sure that it is correctly positioned in the housing.
8. Fasten the cover of the air filter housing.

4.7.5.9 Greasing the flywheel ring gear

Grease the flywheel ring gear periodically.

GUID-39749F84-A612-4F19-B930-3051E00120F6

1. Shield plug of the grease hole

- 305 -
4. Maintenance

1. Remove the shield plug of the grease hole on the clutch housing.
The grease hole is located on the left-hand side of the clutch housing.
2. Apply a little grease to a few points on the ring gear with a grease gun.
The grease spreads around the gear when the gear is used.
NOTE: Use Valtra Grease Moly.

4.7.5.10 Checking the front wheel toe-in

Check the front wheel toe-in periodically.
1. Make a vertical mark on both front tyres in the middle of the tread in level
with the hubs.
2. Measure the distance between the marks.
3. Roll the tractor forwards so that the marks again come in level with the hubs,
this time at the rear edge.
4. Measure the distance between the marks again.
The measurement must be 0-2 mm larger at the rear edge.
5. Adjust the toe-in if necessary.

4.7.5.11 Adjusting toe-in of front wheels

Adjust the toe-in of the front wheels if needed.
Before you adjust the toe-in, check that there is no free play in the ball joints of
the steering arms and tie rod.

NOTE: In order not to limit the steering movement, both tie rods must be adjusted.

1. Centre the wheels.

2. Loosen the tie rod locking nut.

1 2

GUID-B08F41DF-D557-4383-9D67-586ABE2C94CD

1. Locking nut
2. Adjustment screw

3. Turn the adjustment screw in the right direction.

- 306 -
 4. Maintenance

4. Measure both tie rods.

IMPORTANT: Both tie rods must be of the same length after the adjustment.

5. Tighten the locking nut when the correct distance has been achieved.
6. Check the toe-in.

4.7.5.12 Adjusting engine valves

Contact an authorised Valtra workshop for the checking and adjustment of the
engine valves.
NOTE: The adjustment of the engine valves must be done after 1 000 operating
hours.

4.7.5.13 Changing the hydraulics breather

Change the hydraulics breather periodically.
IMPORTANT: If the tractor is used continuously in dusty conditions, the breather
must be changed more frequently.

GUID-FCB991AC-CF34-441C-B324-7381CDCFE754

1. Hydraulics breather

1. Unscrew the old breather.

2. Lubricate the seal on the new breather.
3. Tighten the breather by hand.

- 307 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.5.14 Checking the power shuttle operation

Contact an authorised Valtra workshop for checking of the power shuttle operation.
NOTE: Checking of the power shuttle operation must be done after 1 000
operating hours.

4.7.5.15 Tightening frame nuts and bolts

Tighten the frame nuts and bolts periodically.

4.7.6 Maintenance every 2000 hours or every other year

4.7.6.1 Changing oil in the transmission system

Change the oil in the transmission system periodically.
1. Run the tractor until the oil in the transmission system is warm.
This speeds up the oil drainage and most of the impurities come out with the
oil.
2. Remove the drain plugs under the gearbox and final drives.

1 2

GUID-6B0DFDCB-F4C4-4FE2-B52F-BFD7451DB03A

1. Final drives drain plugs

2. Gearbox drain plug

3. Drain the oil into a suitable container.

4. Clean and refit the plugs.

- 308 -
 4. Maintenance

5. Remove the cover of the suction strainer.

2
1

GUID-DD716079-A81F-42D4-BE09-38D441883771

1. Cover of the suction strainer

2. Suction strainer

6. Wipe off any oil which has run out on the chassis.
7. Clean the suction strainer in diesel fuel and dry it with compressed air.
Replace the suction strainer if it is damaged.
8. Refit the suction strainer, gaskets and cover.
9. Change the transmission oil filters.

- 309 -
4. Maintenance

10. Remove the top link to reach the filling plug located behind it.

1 2

GUID-DCF7AD26-5890-43D5-9249-626CE97DE49F

1. Transmission oil dipstick

2. Transmission oil filling plug

11. Fill the oil through the filler cap.

12. Check that the oil level is between the marks.
13. Start the engine and check the oil level.

4.7.6.2 Changing the transmission breather

Change the transmission breather periodically.
IMPORTANT: If the tractor is used continuously in dusty conditions, the breather
must be changed more frequently.

- 310 -
 4. Maintenance

GUID-97415CE8-E1A3-469C-BB1F-617CADD9E6DE

1. Breather

1. Unscrew the old breather.

2. Lubricate the seal on the new breather.
3. Tighten the breather by hand.

4.7.6.3 Changing the brake fluid

It is recommended to change the brake fluid every second year or after 2000
hours of operation.

GUID-698655D3-C1AF-4AA8-A8AA-03B66D1A7D8F

1. Brake fluid reservoir

WARNING: The brake fluid is corrosive and poisonous and must be

handled carefully at all times. It also corrodes the paint.

1. Empty the brake fluid reservoir.

- 311 -
4. Maintenance

2. Open the bleeding nipples.

Place hoses from the nipples to a container.
3. If the tractor is equipped with a trailer brake valve (extra equipment) and/or
air pressure brakes (extra equipment), open also their bleeding nipples.
Place hoses from the nipples to a container.
4. Pump the brake pedal until all brake fluid in the pipes and cylinders has run out.
5. Fill the brake system with new brake fluid.
6. Bleed the brake system of air.

4.7.6.4 Bleeding the brake system

The brake system has to be bled every two years when changing the oil of the
brake circuits, or if the connections have been opened when repairing.
The brake pedals must not be latched together when bleeding. The procedure for
bleeding the brake system is the same for both brake pedals.
If the tractor is equipped with a trailer brake valve (extra equipment), air pressure
brakes (extra equipment) or reverse drive controls (extra equipment), they must
all be bled. Brakes are bled from the lowest bleeding nipple in the following order:
1. The trailer air pressure brakes, the bleeding nipples of the control valve

STOP

GUID-29CE4F75-F283-4A0F-8C44-B25F0F52DAF1

1. Bleeding nipples of the trailer air pressure brakes

2. The tractor brakes, the bleeding nipples of the working cylinder

- 312 -
 4. Maintenance

STOP
1

GUID-157375E2-5A2F-4BB7-A3A7-8862EFD0600E

1. Bleeding nipples of the tractor brakes

3. The trailer fluid brakes, the bleeding nipple of the fluid brake valve

GUID-476ECA5C-4E6D-4500-BA4B-BE56673F3C84

1. Bleeding nipple of the tractor fluid brake valve

Bleeding of the brakes for the reverse drive system is carried out through the
bleeding nipple of the trailer fluid brake valve. If there is no trailer fluid brake
valve, the bleeding must be carried out last through the bleeding nipples of the
tractor working cylinder.

NOTE: Check that the brake fluid reservoir is full before starting to bleed the
system.

1. To build up pressure in the system, pump several times on the brake pedal.
2. Press down the brake pedal and simultaneously open the bleeding nipple on
the brake which is being actuated by the pedal.
3. Press down the brake pedal fully and close the nipple.
4. Release the brake pedal slowly.
5. Repeat pumping the brake pedal until the brake fluid which runs out of the
bleeding nipple is completely free from air.
6. Check the brake fluid amount in the reservoir and top the reservoir, if needed.

- 313 -
4. Maintenance

4.7.6.5 Cleaning the cooling system

Clean the cooling system periodically.
If problems occur with the cooling system, it can be a sign that the whole system
needs to be thoroughly cleaned.
1. Stop the engine.
2. Open the cap of the expansion tank.
CAUTION: Open the expansion tank cap carefully. When running
the tractor the expansion tank has an overpressure of 1.0 bar.

GUID-8A4B2EE7-EB30-4CE9-A7BE-96106EE1949F

1. Cap of the expansion tank

3. Loosen the side cover of the radiator.

4. Connect a hose from the radiator draining cock to a clean container and open
the plug.

1
GUID-A9306A24-8E24-4FCC-9402-510048F7F0FA

1. Radiator draining cock

- 314 -
 4. Maintenance

5. Open the drain cock on the cylinder block and open the drain plug on the oil
cooler.
IMPORTANT: Do not drain coolant on the ground!

1 2
GUID-345A6D9D-60F3-41AC-A9B0-D19455F30D9C

1. Drain cock on the cylinder block

2. Drain plug on the oil cooler
The cooler is located between the engine block and oil filter.

6. Turn the heater control in the cab clockwise.

7. Drain the water pump by cranking the engine a few revisions with the drain
plugs removed.
8. Clean the cooling system with a special cleaning agent available from your
dealer.
Follow the manufacturer’s instructions.
9. Close the radiator drain cock.
10. Close the drain cock of the cylinder group.
11. Close the drain plug of the oil cooler.

- 315 -
4. Maintenance

12. Loosen the hose placed between the thermostat housing and expansion tank.

GUID-9EE39C93-75DD-4522-B5AF-A034C92A9002

1. Hose

13. Check that the restrictor hole (Ø about 2 mm) in the union is open.
14. Refasten the hose.
15. Fill the system to the fluid level mark on the expansion tank.
Mix the anti-freeze and water according to the manufacturer’s instructions.

GUID-466AD63D-A4F5-4B3A-ACDF-421E70ABC050

1. Fluid level mark

NOTE: Always use a recommended coolant.

IMPORTANT: Never fill up with cold fluid while the engine is warm.
IMPORTANT: Do not use plain water as coolant.

After changing the fluid, run the engine for a while and check the level of the fluid.

- 316 -
 4. Maintenance

4.7.6.6 Maintaining the air conditioning

Maintain the air conditioning regularly.

3
2

5
4
GUID-0CFBD6D0-4E09-4FC3-AD80-0E562E6DDFDD

1. Condenser
2. Compressor
3. Outlet pipe of the condensation pipe
4. Evaporator
5. Dryer

IMPORTANT: If the air conditioning system has not been used for a while, free
the compressor before starting the engine by rotating the pulley nut with a
wrench.

CAUTION: Do not attempt to remove any part of the air conditioning

system.

NOTE: Make sure that the compressor starts. At low temperatures, the
thermostat prevents the compressor from starting.

• Do not attempt to repair the air conditioning system.

Contact an authorised Valtra workshop if problems occur.
• Clean the condenser at regular intervals to remove dust, insects and other
particles.
• Check that there are no leaks in the condenser, evaporator, hoses and
couplings.
• Check the cleanliness of the outlet pipe of the condensation pipe.

- 317 -
4. Maintenance

• Avoid contact with the refrigerant.

WARNING:
If a refrigerant ends up in your eyes, contact a doctor immediately.
Do not weld near the air conditioning system as poisonous gas
may be released. The maximum permissible environmental
temperature for the refrigerant pipes is 80°C.

• If the air conditioning is not functioning properly, contact an authorised Valtra

workshop for checking of the system.
• Check the condition of the refrigerant.

4.7.6.7 Checking the refrigerant condition

4
3
5

GUID-5F260390-C1E0-4869-AA28-756C1E1FBF6D

1. Sight glass
2. Moisture eliminator/indicator
3. High-pressure side
4. Low-pressure side
5. Receiver drier of the air conditioning system

1. Run the engine at 1 500 rpm.

2. Adjust the air conditioner to maximum cooling.
3. Let the engine run for a few minutes.
4. Observe the sight glass.
NOTE: The refrigerant must be colourless. If it is brown or yellow, it must be
changed. Contact an authorised workshop.

- 318 -
 4. Maintenance

5. Check the moisture eliminator/indicator.

NOTE: The colour of the moisture eliminator/indicator has to be blue or green
depending on the manufacturer. If it is pink or grey, replace the moisture
eliminator/indicator. Contact an authorised workshop.

POSSIBLY EXCESSIVE REFRIGERANT

No bubbles appear. The high-pressure side is abnormally hot. Contact an authorised
Valtra workshop.
SUFFICIENT REFRIGERANT
The fluid is almost transparent. A few bubbles may appear as the engine speeds up and
down. The high-pressure side is hot and the low-pressure side cold.
INSUFFICIENT REFRIGERANT
A few bubbles appear intermittently, at intervals of 1-2 seconds. The high-pressure side is
warm, and the low-pressure side fairly cold. Contact an authorised Valtra workshop.
VERY LITTLE REFRIGERANT
Bubbles flow continuously, and when the refrigerant is almost exhausted, a mist-like flow is
seen with no bubbles visible. There is almost no difference in temperature between the high-
pressure side and the low-pressure side near the compressor. Contact an authorised
Valtra workshop.

4.8 Checks and adjustments

4.8.1 Changing tyres
WARNING: When welding the discs, the tyre must be removed from
the rim/disc. There is a danger of explosion.

When selecting tyres, always contact your dealer to ensure the correct
transmission ratio for four-wheel drive (4WD).
1. Get the tyres changed.
IMPORTANT: Change tyres and wheels at a professional tyre workshop that
is equipped to handle this type of work.

2. Check the tyre pressures.

3. When larger front tyres are fitted, check and adjust the turning angles on both
sides with maximum inclination of the front axle.
4. Set the tyre parameter.
5. Calibrate the speed sensors.
6. Tighten the wheel nuts after a few hours of driving.

4.8.1.1 Setting the tyre parameter

You can set the tyre parameter with the tractor terminal.
1. If the tractor terminal main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times
as needed.
2. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.

- 319 -
4. Maintenance

3. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.
NOTE: When the power shuttle lever is in parking brake position (P) you can
enter the transmission settings view by pressing the preprogramming button.

4. Move the navigation box to the tyre parameter position with the arrow buttons.
A short press moves the box in the selected direction one field at a time. A
long press moves the box in the selected direction continuously.

F R
4

40

4
START

880
GUID-31376969-DA75-4B2B-9A7E-874E3F6359DB

5. Press OK.
6. Change the tyre parameter value with the up or down arrow button.
7. Press OK to store the new value and to deactivate the selected field.
With a short press of the ESC button you can deactivate the selected field
without saving the changes.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previously active drive display.

4.8.1.2 Tyre parameters

Tyre Parameter value
520/70R38 831
520/85R38 880
20.8R38 872
540/65R38 798
580/70R38 873
600/65R38 831
650/60R38 818
650/65R38 870
480/80R42 882
520/85R42 942
20.8R42 920
650/65R42 914
620/70R42 925
270/95R48 832
540/80R38 IND 880
650/65R42 IND 914
600/65-34 FOR 782
18.4-38/14 FOR 820
20.8-38/14 FOR 855
Table continued on next page

- 320 -
 4. Maintenance

Tyre Parameter value

600/65R38 FOR 831
650/65R38 FOR 874
650/75–38 FOR 920

4.8.1.3 Calibrating speed sensors

1. Choose a straight and even road with no traffic for the speed sensor calibration.
2. Turn the hand throttle knob to the low idling position.
3. Disengage the differential lock.
4. Disengage the four-wheel drive.
5. If the tractor terminal main menu is not displayed, press ESC.
6. Press the down arrow button in the main menu to enter the set menu.
7. Press the right arrow button in the set menu to enter the transmission
settings view.
NOTE: When the power shuttle lever is in parking brake position (P) you can
enter the transmission settings view by pressing the preprogramming button.

8. Move the navigation box to the speed sensor calibration position with the
arrow buttons.
If the preconditions for calibrating the speed sensors are not met, the
following screen is displayed:

40

4
START

880

GUID-F2C21CD9-CBB3-4EDA-B2B2-9DFAF3A514F6

If the preconditions for calibrating the speed sensors are met, the following
screen is displayed:

40

4
START

880

GUID-354891D9-3C4B-49D9-8DCA-81F75B495B53

9. Turn the wheels to the middle position.

If the tractor is equipped with an angle sensor, note that the middle position
of the sensor must be calibrated before starting the speed sensor calibration.
10. Release the brake pedal and clutch pedal.

- 321 -
4. Maintenance

11. Select the forward driving direction.

12. Start the calibrating procedure by pressing OK.
The tractor automatically selects the optimal gear and engine speed for
calibration.
The tractor accelerates to the calibrating speed and the engine speed rises to
the optimal level of 1700 rpm.
13. Calibration starts when the driving speed is suitable for calibrating.
Forward arrows indicate that the calibration is in process.

40

4
START

880

10028
GUID-1947B158-A034-46D6-B204-5D01749CD7B8

In order for the calibration to proceed normally, the speed should stabilise
within 7 seconds.
14. Let the tractor drive forward until the display shows the calibration result.
• If the calibration is completed successfully, the following view is displayed:

40

4
START

880

GUID-8ABA3EDA-3D1B-4686-847C-2A88928E0938

• If the calibration cannot be completed successfully, the following view is

displayed:

40

4
START

880

GUID-CC6937DB-B75D-4AD5-86C7-1D3F97266427

When the calibration is completed, the engine speed lowers to the low idling
speed.
15. Stop the tractor
If the calibration was unsuccessful, perform the calibration again. If the calibration
is still unsuccessful, contact an authorised Valtra workshop.
A long press of the ESC button returns to the previous active drive display.

- 322 -
 4. Maintenance

If calibration cannot be completed successfully, the problem may be caused by

one of the following:
• Four-wheel drive is engaged.
• Differential lock is engaged.
• The angle sensor is not calibrated.
• The system could not set the required engine speed within 7 seconds. (The
tractor may be pulling too heavy a load, for example.)
• The speed of the tractor varied too much during the calibration.
• One of the sensors to be calibrated is in fault mode.

4.8.2 Track widths

The track width is measured between the middle of the tyres. If needed, adjust
the track widths.
If the front axle is suspended, the track width in the front is 40 mm narrower.

IMPORTANT: The maximum allowed width of the tractor is 2550 mm (if larger
width is not nationally allowed).

The distance between the mudguards is 1090 mm at the rear.

In many work applications, it is advisable to adjust the track widths so that the
track made by the front tyres is covered by the track made by the rear tyres.
When using narrow track widths for the rear axle, check that the lower links do
not touch the tyres. When required, lock the side regulators.

IMPORTANT: According to EU directives the smallest allowed distance between

the tyre and the cab is 50 mm.

4.8.2.1 Agricultural front axle track widths

The agricultural front axle track widths (in mm) are listed in the following table.

380/85R28 2 135 2 045 1 930 1 840 1) 1 735 1 645 1 530 1 440

14.9R28
340/85R28
16.9R28, 2 045 1 930 1 840 1) 1 735 1 645 1 530 1 440
420/70R28
420/85R28,
440/65R28
480/65R28,
480/70R28
540/65R28 1 930 1 840 1) 1 735 1 645 1 530 1 440

Table continued on next page

- 323 -
4. Maintenance

520/60R28 1 930 1 835 1) 1 735 1 640 1 530 1 435

230/95R36 2 100 2 000 1 980 1 880 1 700 1 600 1 580 1 505 1)

1) Standard track width

4.8.2.2 Industrial front axle track widths

The industrial front axle track widths (in mm) are listed in the following table.

420/70R28, 2 130 2 026 1 928 1 830 1) 1 732 1 626 1 530

380/85R28,
14.9R28
16.9R28, 2 026 1 928 1) 1 830 1 732 1 626 1 530
420/85R28
480/65R28,
480/70R28
520/60R28, 2 030 1 935 1) 1 835 1 740 1 630 1 535
480/70R30
540/65R28 1 928 1) 1 830 1 732 1 626 1 530

540/65R30 1 935 1) 1 935 1 740 1 630 1 535

230/95R36 2 255 2 210 1 940 1 900 1 855 1 810 1 545 1 500 1)

1) Standard track width

- 324 -
 4. Maintenance

4.8.2.3 Rear axle track widths

The rear axle track widths (in mm) are listed in the following table.

420/85R38 2 115 2 010 1 910 1 810 1) 1 715 1 610

18.4R38, 2 010 1 910 1 810 1) 1 715 1 610

460/85R38
20.8R38, 2 010 1 910 1 810 1) 1 715
520/70R38,
520/85R38,
480/80R42
540/65R38, 1 910 1 810 1) 1 715
580/70R38,
600/65R38
650/60R38, 1 910 1 810 1)
650/65R38

270/95R48 2 020 2 000 1 920 1 900 1 620 1 600 1 520 1 500 1)

1) Standard track width

4.8.3 Using chains

Chains can be used on the front wheels only when they are also used on the rear
wheels.
IMPORTANT: With larger tyres and a suspended cab (extra equipment), the
space between the mudguard and the tyre may become too small (under 25
mm). If the space is not large enough when you need to use the chains, adjust
the mudguards.

• Make sure that the chains are correctly tightened to avoid damaging the
mudguards.

- 325 -
4. Maintenance

4.8.4 Using twin-mounted wheels

Twin-mounted wheels can be used for decreasing the surface pressure, but not
for obtaining better side support.
1. Multiply the loading by 1.76 of the permissible load on one wheel.
IMPORTANT: Do not exceed the maximum permitted axle loading even if the
tyres allow a heavier load.

2. If dual/extension wheels are used, check that the tyre size does not exceed
the permissible tyre values.
3. Adjust the track width of the inner wheels to the minimum value.
4. Adjust the turning angle, if necessary.

4.8.5 Engine

4.8.5.1 Bleeding the fuel system

The fuel system bleeds air automatically. Allow air to bleed from the fuel system
every time the system has been opened or fuel has run out during driving.

GUID-5F4B4A7C-530E-406B-A776-CBA6D2260DBA

1. Electric feed pump

WARNING: The fuel system connectors are not allowed to be opened

when the engine is running and not for 30 seconds after switching off
the engine. The pressure in the engines can be over 1 000 bar. If the
jet of the high pressure fuel comes in contact with your skin, the fuel
penetrates the skin and causes serious injuries. Contact your doctor
immediately.

WARNING: Only an authorised person is allowed to repair the fuel

system.

- 326 -
 4. Maintenance

1. Hold the ignition key in the power on position .

Wait for 30 seconds.The fuel feed pump is rotating and air is bled from the
low pressure fuel system.
The feed pump stops after one minute if the engine is not started.
2. Start the engine.

Turn the ignition key to the starting position for ten seconds.
NOTE: The high pressure circuit bleeds only when the high pressure pump is
rotating.

3. If the engine fails to start, move the ignition key to the STOP position and
start the bleeding procedure again.

4.8.6 Electrical system

4.8.6.1 Safety precautions for the electrical system

Follow the safety precautions for the electrical system.
IMPORTANT: Disconnect the negative battery lead before removing the alternator.

IMPORTANT: Never open the charging circuit while the engine is running.

IMPORTANT: Disconnect the negative lead of the battery first and connect it last.

IMPORTANT: Remove the battery caps during charging to prevent the build up of
explosive gases in the battery.

IMPORTANT: Always connect the battery with the correct polarity.

IMPORTANT: Do not connect any additional electrical equipment, as this may

damage components of the existing electrical system.

4.8.6.2 Checking the battery

Check and clean the battery on a regular basis.
DANGER: Avoid sparks or naked flames near the battery. The battery
gives off an explosive hydrogen gas! The battery electrolyte is
corrosive.

- 327 -
4. Maintenance

GUID-E5D10B34-4179-4DBB-B3A8-474F522CB210

• Check the charge in the battery.

Use a hydrometer (acid tester). The density of the electrolyte must be at least
1.23.
• Check that the fan belts are correctly tightened.
• Keep the battery clean.
Wash it with lukewarm water after removal from the tractor.
IMPORTANT: Always disconnect the negative lead before washing.

• Clean the pole studs, the cable terminals and the battery retainer thoroughly.
Wash off oxidised spots with water. Wipe the outside of the battery when it is
clean, and coat the pole studs and the cable terminals with petroleum jelly.
• Refit the battery.
IMPORTANT: Always connect the positive lead first.

4.8.6.3 Alternator
The tractor has a negative-grounded alternator which can easily be damaged if
incorrect connections are made in the electrical system.
Connection of the battery with wrong polarity can burn out the alternator or
rectifier. The electrical charging circuit must not be broken when the engine is
running.

4.8.6.4 Protecting the electrical system before welding

Before repairing the tractor by arc welding, protect the electrical system from
damaging.
1. Disconnect the battery leads.
Disconnect the negative lead first.
2. Disconnect the alternator wiring.
IMPORTANT: Never run the engine with the alternator disconnected.

- 328 -
 4. Maintenance

3. Remove the engine control unit cover.

GUID-CD524856-5B53-42CD-909B-24DD63062551

1. Engine control unit cover

4. Disconnect the three connectors.

GUID-69F7A9B5-0D69-40F7-8CC1-F416A04BBA85

1. Connectors
2. Connector locking device

Open the connector locking device to disconnect the connectors.

When reconnecting, turn the locking device back to the locking position.

4.8.6.5 Fuses and relays

The electric centre is positioned under the dashboard. The relays related to the
specific fuses are located in the fuse boxes. Other relays are placed outside the
electric centre.
The electric centre must always be kept clean. If a fuse blows, the fault must be
traced and remedied.

- 329 -
4. Maintenance

IMPORTANT: Fuses must not be replaced with new ones of higher rating as this
may damage the electrical equipment.

Power for extra equipment can also be taken from the spare fuses or unused
extra equipment fuses. A current source can be connected from the main current
pole of the starter motor (the current is then switched off with the main switch
(extra equipment)) through the new fuse.

4.8.6.6 Fuses and relays in the electric centre

The fuses and relays in the electric centre in the lower part of the dashboard are
listed in the following tables.
The fuse diagram is placed inside the fuse box. There is space for spare fuses.
The electric centre in the lower part of the dashboard contains 49 fuses and the
nominal current rating of these fuses is 5-30 A.

K1 K2 D1 F1 F2 F3 F4 F5 F6

K14 K15
K16

K3 K4 K5

F7 F8 F9 F10 F11 F12 F13 F14 K17 K18

K6 K7 K8 F15

F16

F17

F18 Spare-Fuse K19 K20

F19
K9 K10 K11 F20

F21

F41 F42 F43 F44

F22 F23 F24 F25 F26 F27 F28 F29 F30 F31 F32 F33 F34 F35 F36 F37 F38 F39 F40

K12

F46 F47 F48 F49

F45

K13

GUID-64380A27-090B-4AC7-9420-EA02EE07838F

Fuse Nominal current Description

F1 10A Brake lights
F2 10A Ignition switch
F3 15A Hazard
F4 10A Beacon, cab light
F5 10A Seat, diagnostics, Auto-Guide
F6 10A 2-pole current sockets
F7 15A High beam
F8 15A Low beam
F9 15A Reserve
F10 10A Lighter (+30)
F11 10A Trailer hitch (light), Isoadapter
F12 10A Direction indicators
F13 10A Windscreen wiper and washer,
horn
F14 10A Floor fan
F15 10A Trailer socket, back buzzer, hydr.
pilot
F16 10A Can valves
F17 10A Air condition compressor
Table continued on next page

- 330 -
 4. Maintenance

Fuse Nominal current Description

F18 10A 6/2 front 2
F19 10A 6/2 front 1
F20 10A Fuel pump
F21 15A Reserve
F22 15A Reserve
F23 10A Main switch
F24 10A Memory
F25 10A TC1 (VP3), F/N/R/P-lever
F26 10A TC2, radar, working hydraulics
F27 5A 3-pole current socket
F28 5A Cruise switches
F29 10A Armrest, front loader
F30 5A Instrumentation
F31 10A Transmission sensors
F32 10A Parking ensure
F33 10A Twin-Trac, front PTO, front
suspension
F34 15A Radio, electrical mirrors,
handsfree, rear wiper/washer
F35 15A Seat, rear steering prevent
F36 25A Fan
F37 30A Engine controller (EEM)
F38 25A Light switch
F39 25A 3-pole current socket
F40 25A TC1 (VP1+VP2)
F41 15A Rear working lights, left
F42 15A Rear working lights, right
F43 15A Waist working lights, front
F44 15A Waist working lights, front
F45 30A Waist working lights, rear/roof
F46 10A Parking lights, left
F47 10A Parking lights, right
F48 10A Parking lights, illum.
F49 15A Front working lights

Relay Description
K1 Brake lights
K2 Reserve (not used)
K3 Air condition
K4 CAN valves
K5 Hydr. pilot
K6 Fuel pump
K7 6/2 Front 1
K8 6/2 Front 2
K9 Reserve
Table continued on next page

- 331 -
4. Maintenance

Relay Description
K10 Main switch
K11 Reserve
K12 Waist working lights, rear
K13 SCS socket
K14 Auxiliary relay, +15
K15 Parking lights
K16 Front working lights
K17 Auxiliary relay, +15
K18 Waist working lights, front
K19 Auxiliary relay, +15
K20 Rear working lights
K21 Direction indicator
K22 Intermittent control relay, front
K23 Main switch

4.8.6.7 Engine induction air preheater fuse

GUID-4290EF35-D066-4805-A662-7CE24FE9104A

1. Fuse case

Fuse Nominal current Description

F53 250 A Electric preheating of engine
induction air

- 332 -
 4. Maintenance

4.8.6.8 Cab power supply fuse

The fuse is situated immediately in front of the cab in the right-hand corner in the
power supply cable from the starter motor.

GUID-C782E71E-2A09-4043-BE57-4CF6F44A374F

1. Fuse case

Fuse Nominal current Description

F52 125 A Cab power supply

4.8.6.9 Adjusting headlights

It is important that the headlights are correctly adjusted when running on public
roads.
Before you adjust the headlights, make sure that the tractor load is normal and
tyre pressure is correct.

1
1

GUID-FA7656D1-1F35-4FF1-A2D4-B46F0F66CA39

1. Distance between headlight centres

2. 5 m (tractor distance from the wall)
3. Height of headlights above ground minus 50 mm

Headlight adjustment can be carried out quickly and accurately by using an

optical headlight adjusting unit. If no optical instrument is available, the
adjustment can be done as follows:
1. Turn on the dipped lights.

- 333 -
4. Maintenance

2. Measure that the cut-off edge of the light pattern comes at height of
headlights above ground minus 50 mm when the tractor is 5 m from the wall.
3. Turn the full beam lights on.
4. Measure that the distance between headlight centres matches the distance
measured on the wall.
5. Adjust the lights using the headlight adjusting screws.
If the tractor has raised full/dipped beam headlights (on the top part of the cab),
the lights have to be adjusted so that the light pattern shines on the mark where
the ground is even and the distance is 30 m.

NOTE: Lights which can be mounted in the lower part of the front frame cannot
be used on general roads.

4.8.7 Power transmission system

4.8.7.1 Changing the rear power take-off shaft

Change the rear power take-off (PTO) shaft when needed.
IMPORTANT: Never run the tractor without the power take-off (PTO) shaft.

GUID-7CC294BF-5FCC-460D-8987-E374E84E5E42

1. Inner circlip

1. Remove the inner circlip and the space ring.

2. Pull out the shaft.
3. Fit the new shaft.
4. Check that the shaft seal is undamaged.
5. Attach the space ring and the circlip.
6. Change the circlip if damaged.
IMPORTANT: Check that the circlip is correctly positioned.

- 334 -
 4. Maintenance

4.8.7.2 Checking the transmission ratio of a power take-off driven trailer

Check the transmission ratio of a power take-off (PTO) driven trailer.
Before you check the transmission ratio, make sure that the tractor with the trailer
is on a flat, hard-surfaced area or road.
1. Check that the tyres have the correct pressure.
2. Remove the PTO transmission shaft.
3. Fasten wire or tape indicators on the PTO shaft of the tractor and on the
trailer drive shaft.
The indicators must be aligned.
4. Drive the tractor together with the trailer slowly forwards.
Ask two people to count simultaneously how many revolutions the tractor and
the trailer shaft each make. Stop counting when the tractor shaft has made
100 revolutions.
5. Compare the figures for the tractor and trailer shafts.
• If the number of the trailer drive shaft revolutions is higher than 100, the
trailer is slower than the tractor.
The trailer should be 0-3% slower, that is, the trailer shaft should have
revolved 100-103 times. If the number is greater than this, the trailer’s
braking effect is too great.
• If the number of the trailer drive shaft revolutions is lower than 100, the
trailer is faster than the tractor.
In this case, the trailer tends to push, which can endanger the steering of
the tractor.

4.8.8 Steering system

4.8.8.1 Adjusting the steering angle

IMPORTANT: When altering the track width or when fitting a front loader, always
make sure that the front wheels have free movement to full lock in both directions
and that the front axle and the wheels can turn fully. If necessary, adjust the
steering lock stop screws on the powered front axle.

- 335 -
4. Maintenance

1. Slacken the locking nut.

2
1

GUID-139BD303-EDD9-406A-876D-7684A8353248

1. Locking nut
2. Adjusting screw

2. Adjust the adjusting screw.

IMPORTANT: Adjust the adjusting screws on both sides to the same length
so that the turning angle is the same on both sides.

3. Tighten the locking nut.

4.8.9 Cab and shields

4.8.9.1 Adjusting the steps for driving off-road

1. On the right side, remove the pin and the locking screw.

GUID-DB19E68D-1D88-4208-8B93-F34933AC682F

1. Pin
2. Locking screw

- 336 -
 4. Maintenance

2. Turn the right side step fully up and lock it in this position with the pin.

GUID-FDE04FAF-3CC4-4129-A7DD-7E59F34649C2

1. Pin

3. On the left side, remove the lowest step completely by unscrewing three
screws.

1
GUID-B9481B13-0E49-4E2C-B31D-C63A3AE341A7

1. Screws

4.8.9.2 Limiting the door opening

Limit the door opening when on twin wheels.

GUID-26E5254C-769C-4408-B110-7BC1F79E3562

1. Gas spring
2. Fastening holes

• Check that the door does not come in contact with the wheels when
mounting twin wheels.
• Change the gas spring to another hole if needed.

- 337 -
4. Maintenance

4.8.9.3 Checking and adjusting front mudguards

Check and adjust the front mudguards if needed.
• After transportation, check and adjust the front mudguards for maximum
turning angle.
• If necessary, move them to the right width so that the mudguards do not
touch the tractor chassis.
The minimum distance of the mudguards frame from the tyres is 40 mm
sideways and 60 mm vertically.

4.8.9.4 Adjusting flexible front mudguards

Adjust the flexible front mudguards, if needed.

3
GUID-6576D9D9-86FC-4F2E-B464-354C8376A3D8

1. Fixing screws
2. Turning mechanism
3. Stoppers

The front mudguards are adjusted correctly at the factory. With the fixing screws
the pretension (15°) is adjusted for the mudguards to prevent vibration when
driving straight. The fixing screws also limit the travel of the mudguard outside
and inside.
On some tractor models the flexible front mudguards with turning limitation are
fitted as standards with a factory-mounted front loader. It is also possible to fit
them afterwards to other models. When turning the wheels, the mudguards turn
less than the wheels and must be flexible in case they come into contact with
something.
• Check the maximum oscillation and turning angles so that the front
mudguards do not come in contact with, for example, the side panel when
you fit tyres.
When this adjustment is not needed the screw is in the maximum position.
IMPORTANT: Check that the end of the fixing screw does not touch the
guard of the tyre valve when turning the tyres to the maximum position.

• Adjust the fixing screw if the tyre touches the mudguard.

• If necessary, limit the turning of the mudguards by adjusting the stoppers.

- 338 -
 4. Maintenance

• To adjust the height of the mudguards, change the fixing screws or the shafts
to the other holes.
In addition, the mudguards can be inclined forward and backward in their
fixing holes.

4.8.10 Hydraulic system

4.8.10.1 Adjusting lifting links of the trailer hitch

Adjust the lifting links of the trailer hitch if needed.
The lifting height selector must be in the maximum position when the towing hook
is unloaded.

GUID-8943DED7-C904-4D18-A712-E6C09A107602

The lifting links must always have a certain amount of clearance when the
hydraulic lift is in its upper position. However, they must be adjusted in such a
way that the trailer hitch is securely locked by the pawl, even when the towing
hook is loaded.
1. Raise the hydraulic lift to its upper position.
Do not use the buttons for connecting an implement.
2. Check the adjustment by moving the lifting links manually.
The adjustment is correct when the links move loosely. When the lift is
lowered, the towing hook is locked positively by the pawl.
3. Make sure that the spring returns the pawl completely.
4. If necessary, adjust the length of the links by removing the cotter at the upper
end of the links and turning them until the correct length is obtained.
5. Check that both lifting links are of the same length after the adjustment.
The lifting links can be tight when the push buttons for connecting an implement
are used for lifting. Correctly adjusted, the lifting links ensure that the hydraulic lift
can be raised to its uppermost position. The trailer hitch is locked when the lift is
lowered to the point where the hitch rests on the pawl. This prevents
unnecessary loading on the hydraulic pump and overheating of the oil.

- 339 -
4. Maintenance

4.8.10.2 Maintaining the automatic jaw of the wagon towing device

Maintain the automatic jaw of the wagon towing device regularly.

5
3

1 4
2
GUID-CE9DE3E8-B494-411B-9DB2-6930B53DF2CC

1. Main pin
2. Control unit of the puller pin
3. Nipple 1
4. Nipple 2
5. Locking pin (2 pcs)

• Regularly clean the main pin, control unit of the puller pin and locking pins.
Do not use pressure wash when cleaning the main pin.
• Grease nipple 1 regularly with Valtra Calsium LF grease.
• Turn the jaw from left to right at least 90º after greasing.
This ensures that the grease spreads evenly to the desired surfaces.
IMPORTANT: If the jaw is rusty, for example due to the fertiliser, do not use a
rust-loosening agent for removing the rust but take it to an authorised Valtra
workshop.

• Grease nipple 2 with Valtra Calsium LF grease if necessary or at least every

1000 hours.

- 340 -
 5. Faults and remedial actions

5 Faults and remedial actions

5.1 Handling error situations

Indicator lights and service codes guide you in error situations.
• Take notice of the indicator lights on the instrument panel and act accordingly.

The STOP indicator light starts flashing. • Stop the tractor and the engine immediately.
• Continue only in an emergency, for example,
to move the tractor to the roadside.
The book symbol starts flashing on the tractor • Check if the service code is included in the
terminal display to indicate an active service code service code table.
in the system. • Follow the instructions on what operations
NOTE: If the book symbol starts flashing, contact are allowed and what operations are to be
an authorised Valtra workshop, even if the error avoided while the service code is displayed.
does not prevent driving the tractor. • If the service code is not listed in the table,
contact an authorised workshop immediately.
The limiting function of the maximum engine Avoid long-term and heavy use of the engine until
speed is on (for example, 1 500 rpm or 1 800 rpm). the error is fixed.
Some service codes limit the maximum engine
speed, torque and power of the engine. This
prevents serious damage to the engine.

NOTE: The tractor has a function which delays the activation of the parking brake
when the engine is stopped. The function activates if:
• The engine speed stays below 400 rpm for longer than one second, but the
engine remains running.
and
• The driving speed exceeds 5 km/h.
In this case, the tractor does not move and no service codes are shown on the
display. To continue driving, you have to stop and restart the engine.

5.2 Errors indicated by the indicator lights

Indicator light Indication
Direction indicator light for second trailer.
If one of the bulbs on the combination has failed, this light is not lit.
GUID-32CAE5D4-C71C-4D8B-
A41F-2E1DE50F1ED4

Direction indicator light for first trailer.

If one of the bulbs on the combination has failed, this light is not lit.
GUID-16CF17A4-
D96E-4592-8DF3-1D4A100F090E

Direction indicator light.

GUID-B0CF1609-
A4C1-481D-8BC6-03C81546ADA6
If the light flashes quickly, one of the bulbs on the tractor has failed.

Engine air cleaner clogging indicator light

The light is lit when the engine is running and a buzzer sounds once to indicate that the
GUID-06E4C986-88C7-44BA-9897-211
781955328
engine air filter is clogged and needs to be serviced.

Engine oil pressure light

The light is lit when the engine is running, a buzzer sounds continuously and the STOP
GUID-A1E9566C-86CE-4AD3-A512-
D772AE266E1E
indicator light flashes to indicate that the oil pressure is too low.

Table continued on next page

- 341 -
5. Faults and remedial actions

Indicator light Indication

Parking brake indicator light
If the light is lit and the STOP light is flashing, the parking brake cable is broken or
GUID-
F0C90BFB-3126-404D-8C49-3FA955C
incorrectly adjusted.
C4FD2

Battery charging indicator light

The light is lit and a buzzer sounds once when battery charging is not ongoing.
IMPORTANT: A charging failure must be fixed immediately. When the voltage is
GUID-CD4C4C77-7CDB-4FB5-AF3A-
BEFDF3417EB1

reduced, the electric valves may reduce the oil pressure for the multi-disc clutches and
cause clutch slippage which may damage the clutch discs.

STOP indicator light

IMPORTANT: If the STOP light starts flashing, stop the tractor and engine immediately.
You can continue driving only in an emergency, for example to move the tractor to the
roadside.
The STOP light flashes to indicate a serious fault, for example:

•
Engine oil pressure is too low
•
Gearbox oil pressure is too low
•
Gearbox oil/hydrostat temperature is too high
•
Parking brake cable is broken or incorrectly adjusted
• Engine temperature is too high (gauge).
Gearbox oil pressure light
The light is lit and the STOP indicator light flashes to indicate that the gearbox oil
GUID-9B9A9C87-
BB4C-43A1-9A88-7899299F22D0
pressure is too low.

Gearbox oil/hydrostat temperature light

The light is lit and the STOP indicator light flashes to indicate that the gearbox oil or
GUID-AC890C72-21FE-4056-895A-
DB34A4CE9357
hydrostat temperature is too high.
The gearbox oil temperature can be shown on the tractor terminal or Proline instrument
panel display.
The hydrostat temperature can be shown on the tractor terminal display.

• If the hydrostat temperature rises to 105 °C (or over it), the buzzer goes off and a
105 c
pop-up view HST is shown on the tractor terminal display for 5 seconds.
• If the hydrostat temperature rises to 110 °C, the traction is disengaged and a pop-
110 c
up view HST is shown on the tractor terminal display for 5 seconds. The
service code (7200-31-003) is also displayed on the tractor terminal display.
Pressure oil filter clogging indicator light
The light is lit and a buzzer sounds once when the engine is running and the oil
GUID-9B16B673-D692-4975-
A9F9-5D6DBAFC4177
temperature is over 20 °C. This indicates that the pressure filter(s) of the hydraulic or
transmission system requires service.
NOTE: The light may come on if the tractor is started when it is very cold.

5.2.1 Cleaning the main engine air filter

You can clean the main engine air filter with compressed air.
IMPORTANT: The main engine air filter element must not be cleaned more than
three times. After that it must be replaced.

NOTE: Change the main engine air filter if you discover any holes or other
defects.

- 342 -
 5. Faults and remedial actions

IMPORTANT: Do not open the cover of the air cleaner housing unnecessarily.
During maintenance, check that the cover of the housing, pipes and unions are in
good condition.

IMPORTANT: The safety filter behind the main engine air filter must not be
cleaned but must always be changed according to the maintenance schedule.
The purpose of the safety filter is to prevent damage to the engine if the main
engine air filter fails.

1. Stop the engine.

2. Take out the main engine air filter from the air filter housing.
3. Direct the air flow from the rear side of the main engine air filter forward in the
air direction.
Use clean and dry compressed air with a maximum pressure of 500 kPa.
IMPORTANT: Do not hold the nozzle closer than 3-5 cm from the main
engine air filter.

GUID-5FE4591E-C896-46F1-A988-86B61B32F677

4. Direct the air flow from the front side of the main engine air filter and after
that from the rear side.
5. Check the inside of the air cleaner housing and the inlet pipe.
Dirt on these parts indicates that the filter element is defective or has not
been fitted properly.
6. Check the main engine air filter and its sealing surfaces using a flashlight.
7. Fit the main engine air filter back in the air filter housing.

5.2.2 Identifying a blocked transmission or hydraulic system filter

When the pressure oil filter clogging indicator light is lit the filter of the
transmission or hydraulic system is blocked.
If the indicator light is lit when the oil has been warmed, one of the pressure filters
(not the low pressure filter of the transmission system) is blocked. If the indicator

- 343 -
5. Faults and remedial actions

light is lit when using auxiliary hydraulics, it is probably only the hydraulic return
filter which is blocked.
NOTE: All filters are identical.

1 2 3 4
GUID-3CD96ED8-BE86-413D-AFC1-1791995868AC

1. Return oil filter of the auxiliary hydraulic system

2. Transmission lubrication filter
3. Low pressure filter of the transmission system
4. Pressure filter of the hydraulic system

Oil filters are located on the right side of the tractor under the cab. The return oil
filter is labelled with the text HYD on the mounting piece on top of it. The
lubrication filter is indicated with the text LUB on the mounting piece on top of it.
The low pressure filter is indicated with the text TRANS on the mounting piece on
top of it.
1. Release the pressure sensor wires of the auxiliary hydraulics return oil filter.
2. Run the engine.
3. Check if the pressure oil filter clogging indicator light is lit.
If the indicator light does not come on, the fault is in the return oil filter.
4. Change the return oil filter if the blocking is caused by this filter.
5. Release the pressure sensor wires of the pressure filter of the hydraulic
system if the indicator light still comes on.
6. Run the engine.
7. If the indicator light does not come on, the fault is in the pressure filter of the
hydraulic system.
8. Change the pressure filter of the hydraulic system if the blocking is caused by
this filter.
9. Change the transmission lubrication filter and the low pressure filter of the
transmission system if the indicator light still comes on.
IMPORTANT: If the blocking is in one of the transmission filters and it occurs
considerably ahead of scheduled replacement of the filters, it may be an
indication of partial damage to the transmission system. In this case, further
investigations need to be made to avoid additional damage to the
transmission system.

- 344 -
 5. Faults and remedial actions

5.3 Warning symbols on the Proline instrument panel display

5.3.1 Low fuel pressure warning

GUID-1FE7B6E7-41BC-4B54-B124-5818B2DCEFE5

1. Instrument panel display

2. Proline instrument panel display setting switch

This message gives information about the pressure drop of the fuel before the
running faults appear.
To clear the display, press the side of the Proline instrument panel display setting
switch opposite to the symbol.

- 345 -
5. Faults and remedial actions

5.3.2 Hydraulic oil temperature warning

The hydraulic oil temperature warning is shown on the instrument panel display
when the oil temperature is too high.

1 4
Hydraulic Oil
Temperature High
S
2 T
SET to continue O
2 5 0 5. 0 0 1:5 8 P

GUID-D11FA2B5-8B64-434E-B5B7-0243588F98C9

1. Instrument panel display

2. Exclamation mark
3. Proline instrument panel display setting switch
4. Stop indicator light

When the hydraulic oil temperature warning is shown on the display, the following
also occur:
• The buzzer alarms once.
• The stop indicator light flashes.
• The exclamation mark is lit.
To clear the display, press the side of the Proline instrument panel display setting
switch opposite to the symbol. The stop light is flashing until the oil temperature
drops under the warning limit.
Stop the engine, clean the hydraulic oil cooler and check the hydraulic oil level.

- 346 -
 5. Faults and remedial actions

5.3.3 Hydraulic oil level low warning

1 4
Hydraulic Oil
Level Low
S
2 T
SET to continue O
2 5 0 5. 0 0 1:5 8 P
3

GUID-BD7B675B-861F-4FD1-BD65-442438A80A45

1. Instrument panel display

2. Exclamation mark
3. Proline instrument panel display setting switch
4. Stop indicator light

When the low hydraulic oil level warning is shown on the display, the following
also occur:
• The buzzer alarms once.
• The stop indicator light flashes.
• The exclamation mark is lit.
Stop the engine and check the hydraulic oil level. Add oil if needed.
To clear the display, press the side of the Proline instrument panel display setting
switch opposite to the symbol.

5.3.4 Transmission speed warning

The transmission speed warning is shown on the instrument panel display when
the transmission speed is too high.

SLOW DOWN

2 HIDASTA

2 5 0 5. 0 0 1:5 8

GUID-8504EC77-F401-4288-A478-D1C0DA4874B1

1. Instrument panel display

2. Exclamation mark

- 347 -
5. Faults and remedial actions

When the transmission speed warning is shown on the display, the following also
occur:
• The buzzer sounds continuously.
• The exclamation mark is lit.
When the transmission speed has fallen low enough, the buzzer and exclamation
mark go out and the display returns to the previously selected state.

5.3.5 Transmission overload warning

The transmission overload warning is shown on the instrument panel display
when the transmission load is too high.

SLOW DOWN

2 OVERLOAD

2 5 0 5. 0 0 1:5 8

GUID-A828FF3A-E0BF-4BB6-BDF6-58740786C0B0

1. Instrument panel display

2. Exclamation mark

When the transmission overload warning is shown on the display, the following
also occur:
• The service code (7202) is displayed on the tractor terminal display.
• The buzzer sounds continuously.
• The exclamation mark is lit.
If the operator reduces the transmission load in less than five seconds, the
buzzer and exclamation mark go out and the instrument panel display returns to
the previously selected state. The service code disappears from the tractor
terminal display.
If the transmission load stays too high for more than five seconds, the service
code (7203) is displayed on the tractor terminal display. At the same time the
driving pedal is deactivated and driving cannot be continued. The service code is
stored to the tractor terminal service code log.
To continue driving, the power shuttle lever must be turned to the parking brake
position and back to the wanted driving direction.

- 348 -
 5. Faults and remedial actions

5.3.6 Power take-off speed warning

The power take-off (PTO) speed warning is shown on the instrument panel
display when the ground speed PTO is engaged and the PTO speed rises above
1800 rpm.

1
SLOW DOWN
PTO SPEED
2 TOO HIGH!

2 5 0 5. 0 0 1:5 8

GUID-B5C7BCDF-848F-4C6F-8EE3-0C80311F6595

1. Instrument panel display

2. Exclamation mark

When the PTO speed warning is shown on the display, the following also occur:
• The buzzer sounds once.
• The exclamation mark is lit.
When the PTO speed has fallen low enough, the buzzer and exclamation mark
go out and the display returns to the previously selected state.

5.4 Viewing service codes

You can read active service codes on the tractor terminal display.
If there is an active service code, the book symbol is flashing on the display.
1. If the tractor terminal main menu is not displayed, press ESC as many times
as needed.
2. Press the down arrow two times.
The service codes are displayed on the display.

GUID-8A5BDFCB-E993-433B-B580-FE5D33F2C2C9

3. Browse the service code list.

To browse the code list, use the arrow buttons.
If arrows are shown in the display margins, you can browse through more
codes by pressing the corresponding arrow button.

- 349 -
5. Faults and remedial actions

4. Exit the service code list.

• To return to the main menu, press ESC shortly.
• To return to the last active drive view, press ESC longer.

5.5 Service codes

Service codes indicate different errors in the tractor components or functions.
IMPORTANT: The table explains what the service codes mean and what
measures you should take in these situations.

NOTE: If two or more service codes marked with a star (*) are displayed
simultaneously, driving is prevented for safety reasons until the error situations
have been repaired.

Service codes Error meaning/measures

000091 — 03 — 000 There are faults in the function of the front control accelerator pedal.
The engine runs only at low idling speed.

1. Lift up the accelerator pedal and turn the ignition switch to the off
position for a moment.
2. Start the engine again (do not touch the accelerator pedal).
3. Try driving by lifting the engine revolutions with the cruise control. If
there is no cruise control, use the hand throttle or the accelerator
pedal so that you do not push the pedal totally to the bottom.
000094 — 03 — 000 There is an error in the engine fuel system function.
The engine power output is limited and the maximum running speed is
1500 rpm.
000094 — 18 — 000 The fuel pressure (after the filters) is too low.

• Check that there is fuel in the fuel tank.

• Check the fuses.

If this does not help, the feed pump of the fuel system may be faulty or the
fuel filters may be blocked or frozen.
The engine can be run temporarily to move the tractor to a safe area to
avoid injection pump damage.
000097 — 31 — 000 There is too much water in the water trap of the fuel system.

• Drain the water from the water trap in the lower part of the prefilter.
• Drain the water from the main filter.

If water has to be drained from the filters frequently, find out the reason for
the high water content in the fuel.
000100 — 01 — 000 The oil pressure of the engine is too low, or there is no pressure at all.
The engine stops immediately.

• Check the oil level.

• Do not try to start the engine.
000100 — 18 — 000 The engine oil pressure is too low.

• Check the oil level.

• Contact a Valtra authorised workshop immediately.

To avoid serious engine damage, avoid using the engine. The engine can
be run only temporarily to move the tractor to a safe area.
000100 — 31 — 000 There is an error in the engine oil pressure sensor.
000100 — 04 — 000 The engine output is limited.
The engine oil pressure may be low.
000100 — 03 — 000 To avoid serious engine damage, avoid using the engine. The engine can
be run only temporarily to move the tractor to a safe area.
Table continued on next page

- 350 -
 5. Faults and remedial actions

Service codes Error meaning/measures

000102 — 04 — 000 There is an error in the engine boost pressure sensor. The engine output
000102 — 03 — 000 is limited.
You can continue driving temporarily, but clear the fault as soon as possible.
000102 — 16 — 000 The engine boost pressure is too high.
The engine output is limited and the maximum running speed is 1500 rpm.
000102 — 18 — 000 The engine boost pressure is too low.
The engine runs but the malfunction has to be examined as soon as
possible to avoid engine damage.

• Check that the air filter is clean (see the warning light for blocked filter
on the instrument panel).
000105 — 03 — 000 The temperature sensor for the engine injection air is faulty.
000105 — 04 — 000 The engine works but its output and exhaust gas emissions change.
You can continue driving temporarily.
000105 — 16 — 000 The engine injection air temperature is too high.
The engine output is reduced.

• Check that all tractor radiator grilles are clean.

You can continue driving temporarily, but clear the reason for heating as
soon as possible.
000110 — 00 — 000 The coolant temperature is very high.
The engine stops after 30 seconds.

• Check the coolant level and that the radiator is clean.

• Let the engine cool off a moment and start the engine.
• Let the engine run without load until the temperature reduces.

You can continue driving temporarily, but clear the reason for heating as
soon as possible.
000110 — 03 — 000 There is an error in the coolant temperature sensor.
000110 — 04 — 000 The engine output is limited.

• Clear the fault as soon as possible

You can continue driving temporarily, but the engine overheating may
cause engine damage.
000110 — 16 — 000 The coolant temperature is too high. The engine output is limited.

• Check the coolant level and that the radiator is clean.

You can continue driving temporarily, but clear the reason for heating.
000168 — 01 — 000 The operating voltage coming to the engine control unit is too low, which
may prevent the engine from running.

• Check the fuses F55 and F56.

• Check the battery and charging generator condition even if the engine
works.
000898 — 03 — 000 There is an error in the tractor electrical system.
000898 — 04 — 000 The engine should work at least with the accelerator pedal or with the
hand throttle, but there may be faults in other functions.
009006 — 31 — 000 There is an error in the tractor electrical system.
Normally, the engine works but there can be errors in some functions.
The engine information cannot be seen on the instrument panel (running
speed, temperature, indicator lights).
You can continue driving temporarily, because the engine protection
system is operating.
009100 — 31 — 000 There is an error in the tractor electrical system or the engine electrical
system.
The engine output is limited.
You can continue driving temporarily.
009107 — 31 — 000 There is an error in the engine controlling system.
Probably the engine does not start.
Contact a Valtra authorised workshop.
Table continued on next page

- 351 -
5. Faults and remedial actions

Service codes Error meaning/measures

009140 — 03 — 000 There are faults in the hand throttle function.
The engine runs only at idling speed.

1. Turn the hand throttle to the minimum position, and turn the ignition
switch to the off position for a moment.
2. Start the engine again.
3. Try driving with the accelerator pedal or the cruise control.
009141 — 03 — 000 There is an error in the engine controlling system.
For safety reasons, the engine runs only at idling speed.
009300 — 31 — 000 There is an error in the tractor electrical system or the engine electrical
system.
The engine output is limited.
You can continue driving temporarily.
009302 — 31 — 000 There is an error in the tractor electrical system.
The engine does not start.
009303 — 31 — 000 There are faults in the cruise control function.
The cruise control is out of use.
The tractor can be driven normally.
The fault has to be corrected soon.
009304 — 31 — 000 There is an error in the engine controlling system.
You can continue driving, but the engine running speed as well as the
driving speed are limited.
009305 — 31 — 000 There is an error in the engine controlling system.
009306 — 31 — 000 You can continue driving temporarily.

• Contact a Valtra authorised workshop.

5.6 Steering system malfunctions

CAUTION: If a malfunction occurs in the steering system, stop the
tractor and correct the malfunction before restarting.

If the oil supply from the hydraulic pump fails for any reason, the tractor can still
be steered with the steering wheel. In this case the steering valve acts as a pump
and provides oil pressure for the steering cylinder. The steering is heavy to use
and it operates slowly.

5.7 Towing the tractor

5.7.1 Towing the tractor when the engine is running

1
GUID-69FDDDA1-8F27-47E5-971C-4F99D2943C16

1. RangeShift push button

2. Driving speed cruise control increasing and decreasing push buttons

- 352 -
 5. Faults and remedial actions

1. Set the transmission to neutral.

• Press down the RangeShift push button and simultaneously press the
driving speed cruise control decreasing (-) and increasing (+) push
buttons for a minimum of 3 seconds.
DANGER: Pressing the RangeShift push button releases the
traction immediately. Press down the brake pedals to prevent
the tractor from moving if you are on sloping ground.
Transmission sets to neutral and N is displayed on the tractor terminal
display and A-pillar display.
• If N does not appear on the tractor terminal display and A-pillar display,
change the speed range to D.
If you do not get the D range on, follow the towing speeds below.
2. Tow the tractor.
The maximum allowed towing speeds are:
• Speed range A: 3 km/h
• Speed range B: 6 km/h
• Speed range C: 8 km/h
• Speed range D: 10 km/h
• Transmission in neutral: 10 km/h

5.7.2 Towing the tractor when the engine is not running

IMPORTANT: Avoid towing when the engine is not running, because the gearbox
lubrication does not function.

1. Release the parking brake.

Use suitable tools for releasing the parking brake.
2. Tow the tractor.
The maximun allowed towing speeds are:
• Speed range A: 3 km/h
• Speed range B: 6 km/h
• Speed range C: 8 km/h
• Speed range D: 10 km/h
IMPORTANT: If you do not know which speed range is active, do not exceed
the maximum allowed towing speed for speed range A.

- 353 -
6. Technical specifications

6 Technical specifications

6.1 Dimensions
Dimensions (mm) N122 D N142 D
With front tyres 16.9R28 16.9R28
With rear tyres 20.8R38 20.8R38
Length 4 536 4 536
Width 2 538 2 538
Height to the roof 2 945 2 945
Height to the exhaust pipe 2 844 2 893
Wheel base 2 565 2 565
Front axle ground clearance 525 1) 525 1)
Rear axle ground clearance 550 550

1) Same with front axle suspension when the front axle is in the middle of the suspension area.

6.2 Weights
With tyres 18.4R38 N122 D N142 D
Total weight with full fuel tank and 5 350 1) 5 350 1)
without ballast weights (kg)
Front axle weight (kg) 2 155 (40%) 1) 2 155 (40%) 1)
Rear axle weight (kg) 3 195 (60%) 3 195 (60%)

1) With industrial front axle 140 kg heavier

Total weight with the front axle suspension is 150 kg more.

6.3 Maximum permissible axle loading

The data is valid for tractors driving at maximum speed with standard track widths
and regardless of tyre limitations.
Maximum speed, (km/h) Agricultural front axle, Industrial front axle,
maximum axle loading, maximum axle loading,
(kg) (kg)
Front 40 4 000 5 000
8 5 500 6 200
Rear 40 8 000 8 000
Total weight 40 9 000 9 000

6.4 Tyres
Rear Front Agricultural front axle Industrial front axle
420/85R38 340/85R28 x
x x
460/85R38 380/85R28
x 1) 1)

x x
18.4R38 14.9R28
x 1) x 1)
Table continued on next page

- 354 -
 6. Technical specifications

Rear Front Agricultural front axle Industrial front axle

520/70R38 420/70R28 x x
x x
520/85R38 420/85R28
x 1) x 1)
x x
20.8R38 16.9R28
x 1) x 1)
540/65R38 440/65R28 x
580/70R38 480/70R28 x x
600/65R38 480/65R28 x x
650/60R38 520/60R28 x x
x x
650/65R38 540/65R28
x 1) x 1)
710/60R38 600/60R28 x 1) 2) x 1) 2)
480/80R42 16.9R28 x x
270/95R48 230/95R36 x x
480/80R38 IND 400/80R28 IND x 1) x 1)
540/80R38 IND 440/80R28 IND x 1) x 1)
18.4-38/14 FOR 14.9-28/14 FOR x 1) x 1)
600/65R38 FOR 500/65R28 FOR x 1) x 1)
650/65R38 FOR 540/65R28 FOR x 1)
20.8-38/14 FOR 16.9-28/14 FOR x 1) 3) x 1) 3)

1) Fixed disc
2) Rear adjustable wheeldiscs
3) Only 40 km/h models

6.4.1 Wheel nuts tightening torque

Wheel nuts Tightening torque (Nm)
Front 450
Rear 450
Rim - wheel disc (front and rear) 210

6.4.2 Front axle tyre loadings and pressures

NOTE: The permissible wheel load can reduce the maximum permissible axle load.

NOTE: The maximum permissible front axle load is 4 000 kg.

Tyre Maximum load/axle - Two wheels/ Pressure (bar)

axle (kg)
340/85R28 3 600 1.6
14.9R28 3 600 1.6
380/85R28 3 600 1.6
16.9R28 4 480 1.6
420/85R28 4 860 1.6
420/70R28 4 120 1.6
Table continued on next page

- 355 -
6. Technical specifications

Tyre Maximum load/axle - Two wheels/ Pressure (bar)

axle (kg)
440/65R28 3 900 1.6
480/70R28 5 000 1.6
480/65R28 4 480 1.6
520/60R28 4 720 1.6
540/65R28 5 300 1.6
230/95R36 3 800 3.6
400/80R28 IND 6 900 3.2
440/80R28 IND 8 000 3.2
14.9-24 FOR 4 720 3.0
14.9-28 FOR 5 000 3.0
500/65R28 FOR 5 600 2.4
16.9-28/14 FOR 6 240 2.7

IMPORTANT: On 50 km/h models driving at a maximum speed, the tyre loading

is smaller. For more information, refer to the tyre manufacturer’s catalogue.

6.4.3 Rear axle tyre loadings and pressures

NOTE: The permissible wheel load can reduce the maximum permissible axle load.

NOTE: The maximum permissible rear axle load is 8 000 kg.

Tyre Maximum loading/axle - Two wheels/axle Pressure (bar)

(kg)
420/85R38 6 000 1.6
18.4R38 6 000 1.6
460/85R38 6 000 1.6
20.8R38 7 300 1.6
520/85R38 7 750 1.6
520/70R38 6 700 1.6
540/65R38 6 150 1.4
580/70R38 7 750 1.6
600/65R38 7 300 1.6
650/60R38 7 750 1.6
650/65R38 8 250 1.6
480/80R42 7 500 1.4
270/95R48 5 300 3.6
480/80R38 IND 10 600 3.2
540/80R38 IND 12 600 3.2
18.4-34 FOR 7 500 2.6
18.4-38 FOR 7 750 2.6
600/65R38 FOR 8 750 2.4
20.8R38 /14 FOR 8 680 2.3

- 356 -
 6. Technical specifications

IMPORTANT: On 50 km/h models driving at a maximum speed, the tyre loading

is smaller. For more information, refer to the tyre manufacturer’s catalogue.

6.5 Stud dimensions and spacing for wheel discs

13

15
7 14
4 16
2 17
3
5
6 10
8 9
11
12
GUID-B003215A-E0CD-4898-B50D-95CF7EECC3A0

1. Agricultural front axle

2. 1800 mm
3. 40 mm
4. 8 x M20 x 1.5
5. ø220 mm
6. ø275 mm
7. Industrial front axle
8. 1900 mm
9. 40 mm
10. 10 x M20 x 1.5
11. ø280 mm
12. ø335 mm
13. 1750 mm
14. 40 mm
15. 8 x M20 x 1.5
16. ø220 mm
17. ø275 mm

- 357 -
6. Technical specifications

6.6 Track widths

6.6.1 Rear track widths
Tyres, adjustable discs Track widths (mm)
420/85R38 1610, 1715, 1810 1), 1910, 2010, 2115
18.4R38, 460/85R38 1610, 1715, 1810 1), 1910, 2010
520/70R38, 520/85R38, 20.8R38,
480/80R42 1715, 1810 1), 1910, 2010

540/65R38, 580/70R38, 600/65R38 1715, 1810 1), 1910

710/60R38 1810 1)

650/60R38, 650/65R38 1810 1), 1910

270/95R48 1500 1), 1 520, 1 600, 1 620, 1 900, 1 920, 2 000, 2 020

1) Standard track width

Tyres, fixed discs Track widths (mm)

520/85R38, 540/80R38 IND,
20.8R38, 20.8-38 FOR 1 675, 1 850 1)
600/65R38 FOR, 650/65R38,
650/65R38 FOR, 650/75R38 1 850 1)
460/85R38, 18.4R38, 18.4-38 FOR,
480/80R38 IND 1 650, 1 875 1)

1) Standard track width

6.6.2 Front track widths

Tyres Agricultural axle, track widths (mm)
Adjustable discs

340/85R28, 14.9R28, 380/85R28 1 530, 1 645, 1 735, 1 840 1), 1 930, 2 045, 2 135
420/70R28, 420/85R28, 16.9R28,
440/65R28, 480/65R28, 480/70R28 1 530, 1 645, 1 735, 1 840 1), 1 930, 2 045

520/60R28 1 530, 1 640, 1 735, 1 835 1), 1 930

540/65R28 1 530, 1 645, 1 735, 1 840 1), 1 930

230/95R36 1 505 1), 1 580, 1 600, 1 700, 1 880, 1 980, 2 000, 2 100
Fixed discs
380/85R28, 14.9R28, 420/85R28, 1 745, 1 840 1)
16.9R28, 400/80R28 IND,
440/80R28 IND,14.9-28 FOR,
500/65R28 FOR, 540/65R28 FOR,
16.9-28 FOR, 600/60R28

1) Standard track width

Tyres Industrial axle, track widths (mm)

Adjustable discs

380/85R28, 14.9R28, 420/70R28 1 530, 1 625, 1 730, 1 830 1), 1 930, 2 025, 2 130
16.9R28, 420/85R28, 480/65R28,
480/70R28 1 530, 1 625, 1 730, 1 830, 1 930 1), 2 025

540/65R28 1 530, 1 625, 1 730, 1 830, 1 930 1)

520/60R28 1 535, 1 630, 1 740, 1 835, 1 935 1), 2 030

230/95R36 1 500 1), 1 545, 1 810, 1 855, 1 900, 1 940, 2 210, 2 255
Table continued on next page

- 358 -
 6. Technical specifications

Tyres Industrial axle, track widths (mm)

Fixed discs
400/80R28 IND, 420/85R28,
14.9R28, 14.9-28 FOR, 600/60R28 1 875 1), 1 900
380/85R28, 16.9R28, 540/65R28,
540/65R28 FOR, 440/80R28 IND,
16.9-28 FOR, 500/65R28 FOR 1 865 1), 1 890

1) Standard track width

6.7 Engine
Model N122 D N142 D
Designation 44CWA 49CWA-4V
Type Four stroke direct injection diesel engine with Common Rail
Turbocharged and intercooling yes yes
Number of cylinders 4 4
Max. output, kW/(hp)/rpm (ISO 14396)
Normal 101/(137)/2000 112/(152)/2000

Transport boost 1) 106/(144)/2000 118/(160)/2000

Nominal output kW/(hp)/rpm (ISO 14396)

Normal 98/(133)/2200 110/(150)/2200

Transport boost 1) 101/(137)/2200 113/(154)/2200

Max. torque, Nm/rpm (ISO 14396)

Normal 560/1500 600/1500

Transport boost 1) 600/1500 650/1500

Max. no load speed, rpm 2350 2350

Low idling speed, rpm
Normal 850 850
Parking brake is on 650 650

1) Higher transport boost power area in the speed range D.

6.7.1 Engine lubrication system

Oil pump
Type Gear pump, strainer on the suction side and
replaceable filter on the pressure side
Oil pressure at idling speed (min) 100 kPa (1 bar)
Oil pressure at normal working speed 250-400 kPa (2.5-4 bar)

Oil filter
Type Disposable type filter element

Oil type
Valtra grade Valtra Engine CR
SAE grade 10W-40: -25°C...+40°C
API grade CI-4 (ACEA E7)

Oil volume
When changing with filter 13 litres

- 359 -
6. Technical specifications

6.7.2 Fuel system

Fuel
Type Diesel fuel which conforms to EN 590 norm
Feed pump Electric pump
Tank 230 litres
Steel tank (extra equipment) 170 litres

Injection system
Common rail injection High pressure pump with electric injection control

6.7.3 Air cleaner

Air cleaner Two-stage, dry element, with blockage indicator
Pre-cleaner system Ejector

6.7.4 Cooling system

Pump Centrifugal
Radiator Pressurised with expansion tank regulated by
pressure cap
Thermostat 83°C
Fan The belt-driven fan is controlled by the engine's
control module for precise fan speed modulation
Coolant Water and antifreeze agent (standard ASTM D 3306
or BS 6580:1992)
Coolant volume 22 litres

6.8 Electrical system

Ground Negative
Voltage 12 V
Battery 174 Ah
Alternator 150 A
Starter motor 3.0 kW
Electric resistor (engine induction air) 1.2 kW

Fuses
Electric centre, lower part of the dashboard 49 fuses
The nominal current rating of the fuses is 5–30 A.
Electric preheating of engine induction air 150 A
Cab power supply 125 A

Bulbs
Headlights 60/55 W-H4
Front position (side) lamps 10 W
Rear/brake lights 5/21 W
Direction indicators 21 W
Working lights 55 W-H3
Cab lights 2x5W

- 360 -
 6. Technical specifications

Power sockets
Two-pin power socket ISO 4165
Three-pin power socket ISO/TR 12369
Trailer socket ISO 1724

6.9 Power transmission

6.9.1 Power shuttle
Type Planetary-type gear drives
2 wet multi-disc clutches
Wet multi-disc clutches 1 for forward driving
1 for reverse driving
Clutches operate also as a driving clutch for current
driving direction.

6.9.2 Clutch
Multi-disc clutch operation Controlled by oil pressure
Activated by pressing the RangeShift push button or
the clutch pedal
Disc numbers, forward/reverse driving 9 pcs/9 pcs
Friction area, forward/reverse driving 1 742 cm2/1 742 cm2

6.9.3 Gearbox
Transmission type Continuously variable transmission
Gear type Helical gears
Synchronisation Fully synchronised

Speed ranges 1) 40 km/h models 50 km/h models

• A = 0 - 6.5 km/h • A = 0 - 8 km/h
• B = 0 - 13.5 km/h • B = 0 - 17 km/h
• C = 0 - 21 km/h • C = 0 - 26 km/h
• D = 0 - 40 km/h • D = 0 - 50 km/h

1) The maximum driving speed for each speed range depends on the tyre size

Oil type
Valtra grade Valtra Transmission XT60 (classification: Valtra
G2-08)
API grade GL-4

Oil volume
When changing with filter Max. 65 litres

6.9.4 Rear axle differential lock

Type Electro-hydraulic multi-disc
Control Electro-hydraulic

- 361 -
6. Technical specifications

6.9.5 Rear power take-off

6.9.5.1 Rear power take-off alternatives

PTO alternatives
540 + 1000
540 + 1000 + PGS PTO
1000 EHD

1000 EHD + PGS PTO 1)

540 + 540E

540 + 540E + PGS PTO 1)

1000 + 540E

1000 + 540E + PGS PTO 1)

1) Proportional ground speed PTO

6.9.5.2 Rear power take-off ratios

Rear power take-off (PTO) ratios 540 rpm at engine speed 1 874 rpm
1 000 rpm at engine speed 2 000 rpm
540 E = 540 rpm at engine speed 1 539 rpm

6.9.5.3 Rear power take-off shafts

As standard tractor is equipped with one power take-off shaft. Additional shafts
are extra equipment.
Splines Standard Shaft diameter (mm)
6 splines 1) ISO 500 35

21 splines ISO 500 35

20 splines ISO 500 45
6 splines ASAE (Valtra 1203) 45
8 splines GOST 3480-58 38

1) Standard

6.9.5.4 Lower link end distance from rear power take-off shaft
The length of the Power take-off (PTO) shaft (T measure, mm)
lower links (mm) 6 splines 21 splines 8 splines 20 splines 1¾ 6 splines
940 740 740 755 722 742

- 362 -
 6. Technical specifications

GUID-3A495A70-9F56-4273-8001-7254707A4C47

1. 224 mm
2. T measure

6.9.5.5 Proportional ground speed

Model Power take-off (PTO) axle rpm/1 rear wheel rpm
40 km/h 40.81
50 km/h 40.96

6.9.5.6 Maximum power take-off output

The table shows the maximum power take-off (PTO) output at PTO speed of 1
000 rpm and engine speed of 2 000 rpm.
N122 D N142 D
Standard 78 kW (106 hp) 89 kW (121 hp)
Transport boost 83 kW (113 hp) 95 kW (129 hp)

6.9.6 Front power take-off

Oil type Oil volume (litres)
Shell Donax TX 2.2

6.9.6.1 Front power take-off ratios

Front power take-off (PTO) ratio 1 000 rpm at engine speed 1 920 rpm

6.9.6.2 Front power take-off shafts

Splines Standard Shaft diameter (mm)
6 ISO 500 35

6.10 Brake system

Operation • Hydraulically controlled multi-disc type brakes
with wet discs
• Two brake cylinders
• Oil spray cooling of the friction disc elements
when necessary.
Number of brake friction discs 5 pcs/side
Friction disc diameter 224 mm
Table continued on next page

- 363 -
6. Technical specifications

Brake friction area 3690 cm2/org.

Brake pedal free travel 70–80 mm
Brake fluid SAE J1703
Brake fluid volume 0.5 litre

Parking brake
Operation • Electro-hydraulically controlled with power shuttle
lever
• Driving brakes engaging with spring, disengaging
with hydraulic pressure
• When the engine is not running, the parking
brake is automatically applied

Hydraulic brake valve for trailer brakes, extra equipment

Operation • Operated with the hydraulic pump for
transmission and steering, controlled by the
braking pressure
• Trailer brake connection to the tractor with quick-
action coupling

Air pressure brakes for trailer, extra equipment

Operation • Operated with air pressure system, controlled by
the braking pressure
• Trailer brake connection to the tractor with quick-
action coupling

6.11 Steering system

Type • Hydrostatic
• Oil supply from the transmission hydraulic pump
via the priority valve
• Adjustable, telescopic steering column
• Central frame, one double action steering cylinder
Maximum working pressure 18.5 MPa (185 bar)
Shock valve opening pressure 25 MPa (250 bar)
Steering valve revolution volume (agricultural front 125 cm3
axle)
Steering valve revolution volume (industrial front 160 cm3
axle)
Steering pump capacity 81 l/min at engine speed 2 200 rpm
Steering speed Over 2 rounds/sec. at idling speed
Steering wheel rotation 4.5 turns

6.11.1 Powered front axle

Axle type Hi-lock, agricultural axle Hi-lock, agricultural axle Hi-lock, industrial axle 1)
with suspension 1)
Control, on/off Electro-hydraulically controlled multi-disc clutch
Differential lock Electro-hydraulically controlled multi-disc differential brake, simultaneously
controlled with rear axle differential lock
Front axle suspension, - yes -
control on/off
Steering arc, adjustable max 55° max 52° max 55°
Axle turning 12° 7° 12°
Caster 0° 5° 0°
Table continued on next page

- 364 -
 6. Technical specifications

Axle type Hi-lock, agricultural axle Hi-lock, agricultural axle Hi-lock, industrial axle 1)
with suspension 1)
King pin inclination (KPI) 5° 8° 5°
Camber 1° 1° 1°
Toe-in, mm 0–2 0–2 0–2
Flange distance, mm 1 800 1 760 1 900

1) Alternative equipment.

Ratio
Differential 2.923
Planetary gears 6.000
Total 17.538
Front axle/rear axle, 40 km/h 1.323
Front axle/rear axle, 50 km/h 1.329

Oil type
Valtra grade SAE grade API grade
Differential Valtra Axle LS 80W-90 GL-5
Hub reduction gears Valtra Axle or Valtra Axle
LS

Oil volume when changing with filter

Axle type Differential (litres) Hub reduction gears (litres)
Agricultural front axle without 7.9 2 x 0.7
suspension
Agricultural front axle with 6.9 2 x 0.8
suspension
Industrial front axle 7.4 2x2

6.11.2 Turning circle radius

Minimum turning circle radius (m), agricultural front 4.75
axle 14.9R28 tyres with standard track width

6.12 Cab and shields

6.12.1 Cab filter capacity
Standard filter (dop test, 300 m3) > Ø 0.2 μm 45%
> Ø 1 μm 45%
> Ø 5 μm 95%
> Ø 8 μm 100%

Active coal filter, cab (dop test, 300 m3) > Ø 0.2µm 10%
> Ø 1 µm 20%
> Ø 5 µm 90%
> Ø 8 µm 100%

6.12.2 Windscreen washer

Windscreen washer reservoir
Fluid type Washer fluid
Capacity 5 litres

- 365 -
6. Technical specifications

6.12.3 Air conditioning system

Refrigerant type Amount
R134a 900 g, 20°C

6.13 Hydraulic system

6.13.1 Low pressure circuit
Pump capacity (at engine speed 2 200 rpm) 65 litres/min
Maximum pressure 2.4 MPa (24 bar)
Oil supply for the following functions: • Transmission hydraulic circuit, control
• Four-wheel drive, disengaging
• Power take-off (PTO)
• Differential lock
• Power shuttle
• Parking brake
• Speed ranges changing
• Continuously Variable Transmission (CVT) unit
• Trailer hitch hydraulic releasing

6.13.2 Steering hydraulic circuit

Pump capacity 81 l/min at engine speed 2 200 rpm
Oil supply for the following functions: • Steering
• Hydraulic trailer brake valve
• Brake cooling
• Transmission lubrication

6.13.3 Working hydraulic circuit

Pump Variable-displacement pump that supplies oil when
needed.
Pump capacity 115 l/min at engine speed 2 200 rpm
Maximum pressure at 1 500 rpm 20.5 MPa (205 bar)
Shock valve opening pressure of working hydraulic 24 MPa (240 bar)
circuit
Supplies oil for following functions • Hydraulic lift
• Auxiliary hydraulics

Oil type
Valtra grade: Valtra Hydraulic 46 DIN-grade: DIN 51524-3 HVLP
Valtra grade: Valtra Transmission XT60 • Classification: Valtra G2-08
• API-grade: GL-4

Bio-oil 1) Standard ISO 15380, class HEES

1) Bio-oil can not be mixed with mineral oil.

Oil volume
When changing with filters 62 litres
Available volume of oil for auxiliary hydraulics 40 litres
(maximum longitudinal inclinations 10 degrees)

- 366 -
 6. Technical specifications

6.13.3.1 Valves for auxiliary hydraulics

Rear, standard • One on/off valve that controls the hydraulic top link
• Two double-acting valves with adjustable electric
control
Rear, extra equipment • One on/off valve with solid connection for the
hydraulic lift link or for the hydraulic trailer hitch
extension
• Two double-acting valves with adjustable electric
control
Front, extra equipment Four adjustable valves must be mounted at the rear
before the front valves can be mounted. The
following variations are possible:

• Two double-acting valves with adjustable electric

control. Additionally one of the following options
can be fitted as extra equipment:
• Front loader readiness or front loader
• Front linkage as extra equipment

• Three double-acting valves with adjustable

electric control. Additionally one of the following
options can be fitted as extra equipment:
• Front loader readiness
• Front loader
• Front loader readiness and front linkage
• Front loader and front linkage

On/Off valve
Type Directional control valve
Maximum capacity 12 l/min
Control With the rocker switch

Double-acting valve
Type Directional control valve including Zero leak
Maximum capacity 80-90 l/min
Control Electrically adjusted CAN-bus valves

• With joystick
• Rear valves 1 and 2
• Front valves 1 and 2

• With linear control levers

• Rear valves 3 and 4
• Front valve 3

Quick-action couplings
Standard ISO7241-1 Series A

6.13.3.2 Counter pressure when using the return connection for auxiliary
hydraulics
Flow l/min, temperature Return connection counter pressure
1/2 inch connection 3/4 inch connection 1 inch connection
50 l/min, 65°C 6 bar 5.5 bar 5 bar
80 l/min, 65°C 10 bar 8 bar 7 bar

- 367 -
6. Technical specifications

6.13.4 Rear linkage

Maximum lifting force Lifting cylinder ø Lower link type The length of the lower
links
81 kN 100 mm Category 3, quick 940 mm
coupling grabs

Function Linkage version ACD

With electro-hydraulic lower link draft sensing x
Draft control mixing (position control/draft control x
mixing)
Lowering speed, independent of load x
Transport height x
Drive balance control x
Slip control x

6.13.4.1 Maximum lifting force on the whole lifting area

Lifting cylinder diameter 100 mm

1 2 3 4

GUID-275999D9-3FCA-47F1-B599-812EABCCCD28

Lifting link's fastening point Lifting force (kN)

1 66
2 70
3 75
4 81

6.13.4.2 Lifting range at the end of the lower links

The length of the lower links is 940 mm.
Lifting cylinder diameter 100 mm

1 2 3 4

GUID-275999D9-3FCA-47F1-B599-812EABCCCD28

Lifting link's fastening point Lifting range, mm

1 850
2 790
3 735
4 690

- 368 -
 6. Technical specifications

6.13.5 Front linkage

Lifting force 35 kN
Number of lifting cylinders 2
Diameter of the lifting cylinders 90 mm
Lifting range at the end of the lifting links 750 mm
Quick coupling hooks Category 3/2

6.13.6 Trailer hitches and towing devices

Trailer hitch
Control Hydraulically controlled
Max. permissible vertical loading 30 kN (the max. axle loading must not be exceeded)
Trailer hitch height on the lower position from the tyre 705 mm
centre
Trailer hitch height from the ground (lower position 90 mm
and tyres 18.4R34)
Drawbar eye standard ISO 5692

Scharmüller towing device

Max. permissible total weight for the tractor with all jaws 9 000 kg
Max. permissible vertical loading for a trailer hitch 1 500 kg
with all jaws
Wagon towing device frame with a fixed hitch (Piton 2 000 kg
Fix), max. permissible vertical loading
Automatic jaw, main pin diameter 31 or 38 mm
Mechanical jaw, main pin diameter • 31.5 mm
• 28, 42, 50 mm (model Italy)
Drawbar standard DIN 74054 or DIN 11026

Euro trailer hitch

The horizontal distances of the pulling point from the power take-off (PTO) shaft
and the maximum vertical loadings:

Drawbar eye standard ISO 5692

- 369 -
6. Technical specifications

1
2
4 5 3
6
7 8
9

10 12
11

13

14
GUID-181E62A8-760D-43B0-A292-B941C62386B9

1. 388 mm
2. 298 mm
3. 208 mm
4. 272 mm
5. 181 mm
6. Z (number of splines on PTO shaft) = 6
7. 13 mm
8. Z = 20
9. 65 mm
10. 15 kN
11. 23 kN
12. 30 kN
13. 35 mm
14. 30 kN

Euro trailer hitch with hydraulic extension

Raising/lowering and extension Electro-hydraulic
Locking of the towing device latch Electro-hydraulic
Hitch or drawbar Replaceable
Maximum weight of the tractor 8 000 kg
Trailer hitch/jaw Lowered down to the ground when extended

The towing point distances from the take-off axle and the maximum vertical loads
in the horizontal direction are shown in the following figure.

- 370 -
 6. Technical specifications

3 4

GUID-E5534C17-5B27-4541-AD59-D07B832008C1

1. 350 mm
2. 215 mm
3. 30 kN
4. 10 kN
5. 250 mm

Drawbar eye
Drawbar eye standard ISO 5692

- 371 -
6. Technical specifications

4 5

6 7

GUID-6030232C-383E-458C-B4DD-0D7A194F8BA6

1. R 15 mm
2. max 50 mm/min 30 mm
3. 80 mm
4. 30 mm
5. max 20 mm/min 15 mm
6. 30 mm
7. Ø 50 mm
8. min 110 mm/max 120 mm

- 372 -
Alphabetical index
4 auxiliary hydraulics (continued)
4WD (four-wheel drive).........................122 controls..................................31, 189
disengaging.................................123 deactivating.................................190
engaging.....................................123 factory settings....................193, 194
functions......................................189
A Power Beyond couplings.............188
air cleaner quick-action couplings.................367
engine.........................................360 return coupling............................188
air compressor belt selecting joystick functions..........190
adjusting......................................277 user settings........................193, 194
changing......................................278 using joystick...............................191
air conditioning using on/off valves......................198
activating after battery valves..................................188, 367
disconnected.................................76 axle loading
adjusting compressor belt...........277 maximum.....................................354
air recirculation..............................80
automatic.......................................39 B
automatic deactivation of air ballast weights
recirculation...................................80 using..............................................19
checking refrigerant condition.....318 battery
control...........................................76 charging........................................20
controlling the fan..........................77 checking......................................327
fresh air intake...............................80 checking electrolyte level............281
maintaining..................................317 belts
manual....................................38, 74 checking tension.........................276
operating temperature...................75 biodiesel................................................260
temperature control knob..............78 blocked oil filter......................................343
temperature view...........................78 bonnet
using..............................................74 controls..........................................43
air filters book symbol..........................................349
changing......................................304 brake cam
air pressure system greasing......................................274
checking automatic water brake fluid
draining.......................................296 changing......................................311
air pressure Brake fluid volume.................................364
coupling.......................................250 brake pedals
system.........................................250 using..............................................91
trailer brakes...............................253 brakes
air recirculation adjusting pedal free travel...........288
using..............................................73 checking fluid level......................286
alternator...............................................328 checking pedal free travel...........288
A-pillar display.......................................142 brake system.........................................254
armrest bleeding.......................................312
adjusting........................................54 specifications...............................363
right side........................................54 trailer air pressure.......................295
automatic air conditioning braking.....................................................91
control panel..................................75 breather pipe
controls..........................................39 checking......................................285
defrosting......................................79 C
display...........................................75 cab filter
on/off button..................................78 capacity.......................................365
automatic check links............................183 cab light
adjusting......................................183 automatic.......................................69
using floating position..................185 manual..........................................69
automatic driving mode switch positions.............................69
activating.......................................96 using..............................................69
automatic jaw cab
maintaining..................................340 number............................................2
auxiliary hydraulics power supply fuse.......................333
controlling valves.................192, 193 cab ventilation
rear mudguard push buttons.......192 changing ventilation air filter........300
rear valve 1.................................192 cleaning cab ventilation air
return connection counter filter.............................................286
pressure......................................367 carbon monoxide poisoning....................16
using single-action valves...........197 caution definition.....................................13
auxiliary hydraulics chains
activating.....................................190 using............................................325
controlling valves.........................191

- 373 -
check links direction indicator buzzer
adjusting......................................181 activating.....................................139
cleaning direction indicators..................................70
engine compartment...................258 display backlight level
lights..............................................14 setting..........................................138
polycarbonate windows...............258 display brightness
quick couplings..............................14 adjusting......................................162
steps..............................................14 display contrast
tractor....................................14, 257 adjusting......................................142
clock mode display
changing......................................139 on Proline instrument panel..........23
clutch door hinges
pedal.............................................89 greasing......................................283
specifications...............................361 draft control...........................................172
clutch pedal selector........................................173
adjusting engagement position.....90 using............................................173
compressor belt drawbar
adjusting......................................277 agricultural...................................239
changing......................................278 attaching implements..................179
controls Euro.............................................244
air suspended driver's seat...........41 drive balance control
controls light..............................................176
auxiliary hydraulics........................31 selector........................................176
dashboard.....................................22 using............................................175
driving............................................27 driver's seat
front linkage...................................28 adjusting..................................45, 47
on bonnet......................................43 controls..........................................40
on front roof console.....................35 Valtra Evolution.......................42, 50
on rear mudguards........................43 drive view symbols
on right roof console......................37 general information.....................150
others............................................32 power shuttle...............................148
outside cab..............................43, 44 transmission................................149
power take-off (PTO).....................29 driving mode
rear linkage...................................28 automatic.......................................96
control stop..............................................60 driving modes..........................................95
using..............................................61 automatic, activating.....................96
coolant manual........................................100
checking......................................269 manual, activating ......................101
coolers...................................................270 semiautomatic...............................98
cooling system.......................................269 semiautomatic, activating..............99
cleaning.......................................314 driving
specifications...............................360 automatic driving mode.................97
counters changing direction...................59, 85
resetting......................................164 downhill.........................................18
cruise control.........................................109 manual driving mode...................102
driving speed...............................111 maximum angles.........................125
switches......................................110 on public roads..............................17
view.............................................160 on slopes.....................................125
cruise control for driving speed reverse drive system...................125
programming...............................111 run in.............................................45
setting..........................................111 semiautomatic driving mode.......100
cruise control for engine speed starting..........................................92
activating.....................................114 using standstill...............................85
deactivating.................................114 driving speed
cruise control view.................................128 controlling......................................18
cylinder block drain cock.......................315 limiting.........................................118
maximum.......................................18
D driving speed cruise control
danger definition......................................13 decreasing setting.......................112
dead battery............................................65 increasing setting........................113
definitions driving speed view.................................129
caution...........................................13 driving start automatics.........................123
danger...........................................13 setting..........................................124
important.......................................13
note...............................................13 E
warning..........................................13 ECO/Power function
differential lock using............................................106
disengaging.................................121 EEC type plate..........................................2
engaging.....................................121 electrical system
positions......................................120 protecting before welding............328
dimensions............................................354 specifications...............................360
electric feed pump.................................326

- 374 -
electrolyte four-wheel drive (4WD).........................122
density.........................................328 adjusting steering angle..............335
emergency brake.....................................35 disengaging.................................123
checking......................................282 engaging.....................................123
using..............................................91 frame nuts and bolts
emergency exits......................................15 tightening.....................................308
engine brake front axle mounting bearings
selecting the default setting.........108 greasing......................................275
engine brake setting..............................106 greasing hydraulically
selecting......................................107 suspended...................................275
engine control unit front axle
connector locking device.............329 changing oil in differential............298
connectors...................................329 changing oil in hubs....................300
engine checking oil level in
brake setting................................106 differential....................................292
changing oil.................................284 checking oil level in hubs............293
changing oil filter.........................284 number............................................2
control unit...................................329 pressure......................................355
heater............................................64 tyre loading..................................355
induction air preheater fuse.........332 front hydraulic valve settings view.........156
number............................................2 front linkage
oil drain plug................................284 controls..........................................28
speed view..........................130, 156 lifting link positions......................203
stopping.........................................60 maintaining..................................273
engine oil specifications...............................369
checking level..............................266 using............................................202
specifications...............................359 front loader
volume.........................................359 locking equipment.......................206
engine speed cruise control releasing equipment....................206
decreasing setting.......................115 using............................................204
increasing setting........................115 using quick coupling plate...........205
programming...............................113 front lower links' position view...............133
setting..........................................113 activating.....................................141
engine speed limiting.............................117 deactivating.................................141
environment front mudguards
protecting............................257, 258 adjusting flexible..........................338
equipment checking and adjusting................338
alternative........................................1 greasing......................................276
extra................................................1 front power take-off...............................218
errors activating.....................................219
indicated by indicator lights.........341 changing housing oil...................294
error situations checking......................................274
handling.......................................341 checking rubber couplings..........295
measures....................................350 deactivating.................................219
service codes..............................341 ratios...........................................363
Euro trailer hitch....................................244 shafts...........................................363
extending.....................................246 washing oil filter...........................294
hydraulically front power take-off speed view............130
extended.....................245, 246, 247 activating.....................................141
hydraulic unlatching....................236 deactivating.................................141
latching................................238, 247 front roof console
mechanical unlatching.................235 controls..........................................35
unlatching....................................245 fuel.........................................................259
with hydraulic extension..............245 biodiesel......................................260
expansion tank cap...............................314 filter system.................................260
extra cylinder injection system...........................260
controlling....................................207 requirements...............................259
storing.........................................259
F fuel consumption views.................131, 159
fan control knob.......................................75 fuel system
fire bleeding.......................................326
hazards.........................................20 changing filter..............................301
fixed views changing prefilter.........................302
instrument panel display.............126 checking prefilter.........................280
floating position checking sediment bowl..............280
activating.....................................196 specifications...............................360
deactivating.................................196 fuses and relays....................................329
using............................................169 cab power supply........................333
floor fan in electric centre..........................330
using..............................................72
flywheel ring gear
greasing......................................305

- 375 -
G ISOBUS.................................................231
gearbox extension connectors..................234
specifications...............................361 implement connector...................233
temperature view.................133, 156 terminal connector.......................233
grease...................................................260 J
Valtra Calsium LF........................261 jaws
Valtra Grease..............................261 adjusting height...........................240
Valtra Grease Moly.....................261 attaching trailers..........................242
H jump starting............................................65
hazard statements...................................13 L
headlights large drive view
adjusting......................................333 entering.......................................152
switch............................................66 length units
using........................................66, 67 changing......................................140
heater distance.......................................140
using..............................................72 driving speed...............................140
horn.........................................................70 implement width..........................140
hour display surface area................................140
changing......................................138 lift/stop/lower switch
hydraulic front suspension using............................................168
calibrating....................................120 lifting height
using............................................119 limiting.........................................171
hydraulic motor selector........................................171
using............................................201 lifting links
hydraulic oil level adjusting..............................180, 339
warning........................................347 lighter.......................................................81
hydraulic oil temperature warning.........346 lights................................66, 67, 68, 69, 71
hydraulics assistant limiting door opening.............................337
activating.....................................197 limiting the maximum driving speed......118
deactivating.................................197 linkage
hydraulics rear..............................................166
changing breather.......................307 lower field views....................................154
hydraulics settings view changing......................................153
entering.......................................161 lowering speed
hydraulic system selector........................................171
changing oil.................................296 setting..........................................171
changing oil filters.......................292 lower link quick couplings
checking oil level.........................267 clamp...........................................186
hydrostat lever............................................186
temperature view.........................157 setting release cable...................186
I lower links
ignition switch adjusting......................................181
using..............................................61 low fuel pressure
implement control system......................231 warning........................................345
implements low hydraulic oil level.............................347
attaching........................14, 179, 186 low pressure hydraulic circuit
indicator light...............................230 specifications...............................366
ISOBUS control system..............233 lubricating points
operating with................................18 greasing......................................257
PTO driven....................................18 M
resetting ISOBUS connection.....235 main air filter..........................................304
resetting signal connection..........231 main engine air filter
signal connection........................230 cleaning.......................................342
with agricultural drawbar.............239 replacing......................................342
implement main switch..............................................59
setting width........................138, 163 maintenance..........................................255
important definition..................................13 chart............................................264
indicator lights.................................25, 230 performing...................................256
errors...........................................341 periodical.............................255, 263
handling error situations..............341 schedule......................................255
lit when starting.............................63 view on instrument panel
on instrument panel.......................24 display.........................................134
rear linkage.................................170 yearly...........................................255
instrument panel display manual air conditioning
fixed views...................................126 controls..........................................38
selecting views............................127 manual driving mode.............................100
views...........................................127 activating ....................................101
warning........................................345 maximum driving speed
instrument panel forward..........................................18
indicator lights.........................24, 25 reverse..........................................18

- 376 -
memory locations..................................156 Power Beyond couplings (continued)
minute display using............................................200
changing......................................139 powered front axle
mirrors specifications...............................364
adjusting........................................56 power shuttle...........................................84
heating..........................................57 adjusting engagement speed........86
optional..........................................56 checking operation......................308
standard........................................56 lever..............................................59
mudguards specifications...............................361
checking and adjusting................338 power shuttle lever
multi-grooved fan belt using..............................................85
changing......................................278 power socket switch................................81
power take-off (PTO)
N changing shaft.............................334
noise checking transmission ratio of
protection......................................15 trailer...........................................335
note definition..........................................13 heavy use....................................210
O implements..................................210
off-road driving......................................336 maximum output..........................363
oil changing proportional ground speed..........216
hydraulic system.........................296 recommended shafts...................210
transmission................................308 speed views................................155
oil power take-off cruise control.................219
checking level..............................266 activating and deactivating..........220
cooler drain plug..........................315 using............................................220
oil filters power take-off
changing..............................291, 292 speed warning.............................349
identifying blocked.......................343 power
oil level turning off......................................61
hydraulic system.........................267 turning on......................................61
transmission................................266 preparing for use.....................................45
operating Proline instrument panel
practices........................................15 components...................................22
ordering Proline instrument panel display...........126
service.............................................2 enlarging middle row...................136
spare parts......................................2 fixed views.....................................23
other controls...........................................32 resetting views............................135
selectable views............................23
P symbols.........................................23
parameter setting mode views...........................................127
activating.....................................136 proportional ground speed
exiting..........................................136 specifications...............................363
parameter value
changing......................................137 Q
parking...................................................109 quick-action couplings
parking brake using............................................199
adjusting......................................289 quick couplings
checking......................................289 using............................................185
engagement speed limit................87 R
lever..............................................59 radar................................................16, 176
using..............................................87 radiator
parking lights...........................................66 cleaning.......................................270
passing switch for position control knob draining cock...............................314
passing the lower limit.................173 rear axle
passing the transport height differential lock............................361
set by the lifting height pressure......................................356
selector........................................174 tyre loading..................................356
pedals......................................................21 rear hydraulic valves
periodical maintenance settings view................................156
chart............................................264 rear linkage
ploughing activating.....................................167
adjusting depth............................172 controls..................................28, 166
poisoning diagnose light..............................166
carbon monoxide...........................16 draft control.................................172
pop-up views.........................................152 lift/lower indicator lights...............170
position control knob lifting force...................................368
using............................................168 lifting range at end of lower
position locking links.............................................368
activating.....................................195 specifications...............................368
deactivating.................................195 rear lower links' position view........132, 157
Power Beyond couplings rear mudguards
load-sensing system...................200 controls..........................................43

- 377 -
rear power take-off speed view.............130 slip control.............................................176
rear power take-off................................209 light..............................................177
activating.....................................211 using............................................177
alternatives..................................362 smoking...................................................20
attaching implements..................207 Softdrive................................................206
automatic stop.............................215 specifications.........................................365
deactivating.................................213 speed balance.......................................105
emergency stop...........................214 speed ranges...........................................93
headland turn..............................215 speed range
lower link end distance from changing while driving...................94
shaft............................................362 programming.................................95
ratios...........................................362 RangeShift..............................93, 94
selecting speed...........................211 selecting........................................93
shafts...........................................362 shifting automatics .......................95
starting........................................212 speed sensors
stopping temporarily....................213 calibrating....................................321
using............................................207 split drive view.......................................153
rear window entering.......................................153
opening.........................................33 standstill function.....................................88
recirculation filter starting
changing......................................301 jump starting..................................65
relays and fuses....................................329 under cold conditions....................64
repairing..................................................14 under normal conditions................63
replacing with auxiliary battery......................65
main engine air filter....................342 steering....................................................84
parts..............................................14 steering hydraulic circuit
safety and information signs.........13 specifications...............................366
reverse drive controls steering system
maximum driving speed..............125 malfunctions................................352
using............................................125 specifications...............................364
reverse drive system steering wheel
controls..........................................34 adjusting........................................55
using............................................125 steps
roof console adjusting for off-road driving........336
components...................................72 storing tractor
using..............................................72 longer than two months...............262
roof fan....................................................72 shorter than two months..............261
roof hatch stud dimensions....................................357
opening.........................................15 sun visor..................................................73
rotating warning light surface area view..........................134, 159
switch............................................71 symbols
using..............................................71 on Proline instrument panel
run in.......................................................45 display...........................................23
running the tractor in.....................262, 263 T
S temperature unit
safety air filter........................................304 Celsius........................................140
safety and information signs changing......................................140
replacing........................................13 Fahrenheit...................................140
safety temperature warning
children..........................................20 hydraulic oil.................................346
features.........................................15 three-pin power socket............................82
maintaining....................................14 three-point linkage.................................178
operating practices........................15 adjusting lifting links....................180
passengers....................................20 adjusting lower links....................181
people...........................................20 attaching implements..................179
precautions for electrical automatic check links..................183
system.........................................327 greasing......................................271
regulations.....................................13 using lower link quick
Scharmüller couplings.....................................185
towing device..............................240 toe-in
selecting the engine brake setting.........107 adjusting......................................306
selecting views checking......................................306
instrument panel display.............127 towing devices
semiautomatic driving mode....................98 Scharmüller.................................240
activating.......................................99 specifications...............................369
service...................................................135 towing............................................352, 353
inspection....................................255 implements....................................19
service codes........................................350 safety.............................................19
active...........................................349 track widths...........................................323
viewing........................................349 agricultural front axle...................323
front.............................................358

- 378 -
track widths (continued) upper headlights
industrial front axle......................324 switch............................................67
rear..............................................358 using..............................................67
rear axle......................................325 V
traction force control setting..................116
tractor construction..................................14 Valtra Evolution driver's seat
tractor serial number.................................2 adjusting........................................50
tractor terminal......................................146 valves
button functions...........................147 adjusting......................................307
components...................................26 ventilation nozzles
entering menus...........................147 using..............................................73
hydraulics view symbols..............161 viton seals...............................................20
transmission settings view..........164 volume unit
trailer...............................................19, 252 changing......................................141
air pressure brakes.....................253 gallon UK.....................................141
fluid brake valve..........................254 gallon US.....................................141
socket............................................83 litre..............................................141
total weight..................................252 W
trailer air-pressure brake system wagon towing device
checking and greasing................295 maintaining automatic jaw...........340
trailer hitch warning
adjusting lifting links....................339 definition........................................13
changing......................................250 symbol.........................................151
checking......................................272 warning flashers
Euro.............................................244 using..............................................71
greasing......................................272 weights
hydraulic unlatching....................236 front axle.....................................354
latching........................................238 rear axle......................................354
light switch.....................................68 total.............................................354
mechanical unlatching.................235 welding
specifications...............................369 protecting the electrical
transmission system.........................................328
changing breather.......................310 wheel discs spacing..............................357
changing oil.................................308 wheel nuts
checking oil level.........................266 checking tightness.......................287
droop...........................................103 tightening torque.........................355
information displayed on A- wheel slip view..............................129, 158
pillar.............................................144 wheels
transmission droop................................103 twin-mounted...............................326
transmission overload...........................348 windows
transmission speed rear..........................................33, 58
warning........................................347 washing.........................................58
transmission system wiper..............................................58
changing oil filters.......................291 windscreen washer
travel distance view.......................133, 158 fluid reservoir...............................283
turning circle radius...............................365 specifications...............................365
twin-mounted wheels.............................326 working hydraulic circuit
twin wheels specifications...............................366
limiting door opening...................337 working hydraulics
two-pin power socket.........................81, 84 oil temperature view....................157
type plate EEC..........................................2 working lights
tyre parameters.....................................320 using..............................................67
tyre pressure working time view..........................128, 158
checking......................................282
tyres
changing......................................319
setting parameter........................319
specifications...............................354
U
units of measurement
changing......................................163
U-Pilot headland automatics.................221
error codes..................................229
operating requirements...............221
programming...............................225
programming examples...............226
switches......................................222
symbols.......................................223
using............................................227
view.............................................222

- 379 -
Valtra Inc.
FI-44200 Suolahti, Finland
Tel. +358 20 45501
www.valtra.com

Copyright © 2009 by Valtra Inc.

All rights reserved.
Ref no 39 845 21 2 (11/2009)
Printed in Finland by Kopijyvä
English Valtra is a worldwide brand of AGCO Corporation ®